4.imimg.com...9 5 0 ! ! 3 ) :[ Yt [ 0 \ _W EDT¡FJE DVFDEBTO¢JNFGJBTO ET£GBH EDLGLFJE...

$: 4.imimg.com...9 5 0 ! ! 3 ) :[ Yt [ 0 \ _W EDT¡FJE DVFDEBTO¢JNFGJBTO ET£GBH EDLGLFJE DVFDEBTO¢JNFGJBTO & & = = r, 0Z :9W [0 1 Z (< ' 3 WXS[:s [) 8A[8A0 Q_:s IEDD\NITLD$
Sparex India

Chennai - India, www.sparexindia.com, Email - [email protected], What's Up Mobile +91 9444032532, Skype: sparex_india

Preface

1

Preface

Thank you for using ALPHA6000S, ALPHA6000V, ALPHA6700S series inverters.

This series of inverters adopt the most advanced inverter current vector control technology,low-speed rated torque output, ultra-quiet and stable operation and built-in or external PGfunctions, can easily achieve closed-loop control. They are characterized by diverse controlmodes, up to 36 perfect protection and alarm functions, on-line monitoring and on-lineadjustment of a variety of parameters, built-in RS-485 communication interface, flexibleoperation, and can satisfy various needs of users. Available extension card can meet the users'needs of system extension.

This series of inverters apply to most motor drive applications, including paper making, spinningand weaving, food, cement, printing and dyeing, plastic machinery, metallurgy, steel and otherindustries. As speed controllers, this series of inverters possesses good adaptability of load,running stability, high precision and good reliability. They can improve the power factor andefficiency, and be used as a power-efficient application.

If you have some problems that can’t be solved in operation, please contact the nearest localagents, or contact our company directly.

To ensure the perfect use of this product and the safety of users, please read the user manualcarefully before the operation of inverter and keep the manual in proper place for futurereference

The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice.

Before mounting, commissioning and using the inverter, it strongly suggested that you must readthe safety rules warnings listed in this book and cautions marked on the inverter to ensure yoursafety and extending the life of this equipment,. When in operation, we must pay attention to thesituation of load and all notes that related on safety

Sparex India


Foreword

2

Danger! This equipment contains dangerous voltage ,Not accord with the

warning or breach this manual operation. Electric shock can causeserious or fatal injury. Only qualified personnel shall wire the drive.

Please cut off the power before wiring and inspecting. It is notpermissible to touch PCB or interior components before battery controllamp goes off or until 5 minutes after the power has been removed. It isnecessary to use meters to confirm the charging capacitor has dischargedoff. Otherwise, a risk of electric shock may happen.

Don't contact AC power source to the output terminals U, V, W of theinverter. When using the inverter, the earthing terminal of the invertermust be grounded correctly and reliably according to IEC electricalsafety regulation.

Warning! Unauthorized change of inboard wiring and using accessories, which

sold or recommended by blame manufacturer may cause fire, electricshock and injury.

Since body static electricity may cause serious damage to MOSfield-effect transistor and other sensitive elements please don’t touch theinterior devices, such as PCB, IGBT module etc. before any measure istook to prevent static electricity.

Caution!

Keep all marks and labels are clear to read. Replace the lost or wornmark at any moment.

Please keep the user manual near the inverter that can be reached easilyand give this manual to the users who use the product.

All rights reserved. The contents in this document are subject to change without notice. Ifyou have any questions and problems about the use of our products, please contact ouragents or us. Any improved suggestions are welcome.

Sparex India


Table of Contents

3

ContentsPreface..............................................................................................................................................1

Chapter 1 Purchase Inspection.........................................................................................................61.1 Unpacking Inspection..................................................................................................... 61.2 Naming Rule................................................................................................................... 61.3 Nameplate of Inverter..................................................................................................... 7

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring....................................................................................................82.1 External Dimension and Installation Dimension (See Appendix 1)............................82.2 Mounting Place Requirements and Management........................................................... 8

2.2.1 Installation Location................................................................................................ 82.2.2 Ambient Temperature.............................................................................................. 92.2.3 Preventive Measures................................................................................................ 9

2.3 Installation Direction and Space..................................................................................... 92.4 Main Circuit Wiring......................................................................................................10

2.4.1 The Main Circuit Terminals Arrangement and wiring.......................................... 102.4.2 Main Circuit Wiring operation...............................................................................14

2.5 Control Circuit Connection...........................................................................................152.5.1 Function of Control Circuit Terminals.................................................................. 152.5.2 Wiring of control circuit terminals........................................................................ 19

2.6 Wiring of Inverter for Basic Operation.........................................................................282.7 Matters Needing Attentionon Wiring.......................................................................... 32

Chapter 3 Operation.......................................................................................................................333.1 Function and operation of keypad.................................................................................33

3.1.1 Keypad layout........................................................................................................ 333.1.2 Description of button function............................................................................... 343.1.3 Description of LED digitals and indicators........................................................... 353.1.4 Display state of keypad..........................................................................................363.1.5 Operation method of keypad..................................................................................38

3.2 Run command mode select........................................................................................... 403.3 Trial Operation..............................................................................................................40

3.3.1 Operation mode of inverter....................................................................................403.3.2 Check points before running..................................................................................413.3.3 Check points time during running..........................................................................413.3.4 Operation of initial power on.................................................................................433.3.5 First test run operation........................................................................................... 44

3.4 Commissioning of keypad............................................................................................ 463.5 Operation of Control Circuit Terminal......................................................................... 46

Sparex India


Table of Contents

4

Chapter 4 Parameter Index.............................................................................................................48

Chapter 5 Detailed Function Introductions....................................................................................905.1 Basic Function (Group P0)........................................................................................... 905.2 Start/Stop Control (Group P1)...................................................................................... 945.3 Auxiliary Operation (Group P2)................................................................................. 1035.4 I/O Terminal Ctrl (Group P3)..................................................................................... 1085.5 Analog and pulse function (Group P4)....................................................................... 1255.6 PLC Operating (Group P5)......................................................................................... 1295.7 Cut-to-length Function and Wobble Frequency Operating (Group P6)..................... 1345.8 PID Control (Group P7)..............................................................................................1395.9 Vector control mode(Group P8)................................................................................. 1425.10 V/F Control (Group P9)............................................................................................ 1465.11 Motor Parameters (Group PA)..................................................................................1505.12 MODBUS Communication (Group Pb)....................................................................1535.13 Display Control (Group PC)..................................................................................... 1545.14 Protection and Fault Parameters (Group Pd)............................................................ 1585.15 Running History Record (Group PE)........................................................................1645.16 Protection of parameters (Group PF)........................................................................165

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting.......................................................................................................... 1686.1 Troubleshooting.......................................................................................................... 1686.2 Warning display and explanation................................................................................1726.3 Motor’s faults and corrective measure........................................................................172

Chapter 7 Peripheral Equipment..................................................................................................1757.1 Peripheral Equipment Connection Diagrams..............................................................1757.2 Function of Peripheral Equipment.............................................................................. 177

7.2.1 AC Input Reactor................................................................................................. 1777.2.2 EMI Filter.............................................................................................................1787.2.3 Braking Unit and Braking resistor....................................................................... 1787.2.4 Leakage Protector................................................................................................ 1797.2.5 Capacitor Box...................................................................................................... 180

Chapter VIII Maintenance........................................................................................................... 1818.1 Inspection and Maintenance....................................................................................... 181

8.1.1 Daily Inspection................................................................................................... 1818.1.2 Regular Maintenance........................................................................................... 1828.1.3 Regularly-replaced Elements............................................................................... 184

8.2 Storage and Protection................................................................................................... 185

Chapter IX Quality guarantees.....................................................................................................186

Sparex India


Table of Contents

5

Appendix 1 External Dimension and Installation Dimension(Unit: mm)................................ 187

Appendix 2 Technical Specifications....................................................................................... 195

Appendix 3 Recommendation for Selection of the Main Circuit Output Cable.......................197

Appendix 4 Use of MODBUS Communication....................................................................... 198

Appendix 5 Keypad Installation Dimension (Unit: mm)..........................................................212

Appendix 6 LCD Keypad Use Instruction................................................................................214A6.1 LCD Keypad Instruction..........................................................................................214A6.2 LCD Use Instruction................................................................................................ 214A6.3 LCD Contrast Adjustment....................................................................................... 218

Appendix 7 Frequency Inverter Warranty Card....................................................................... 219

Sparex India


Chapter 1 Purchase Inspection

6


1.1 Unpacking InspectionAll inverters have passed the strict tests before delivery. After unpacking, please check if the product was damagedby careless transport, the product specification, and model is complied with the order, and if it has a quality checkpassed mark. If there is any problem, please contact the supplier.

1.2 Naming RuleThe naming rule of the product is as following

ALPHA6000S - 3 7R5 G B - X

附加说明

X：标准机型带底座

V：标准机型壁挂式

空：窄体机型

附加说明

B：带制动单元

空：无制动单元

适用负载

G：泛用型

适配电机功率

R75：0.75KW

7R5： 7.5KW

075： 75KW

额定电压

2：3相220V

3：3相380V

系列代号

ALPHA6000S

ALPHA6700S

ALPHA6000V

Bottom-level modules of ALPHA6000S and ALPHA6700S series inverters are high performance motorcontrol modules, which contain three control modes, i.e. V/F, sensorless vector control (SVC), V/Fseparation.

Bottom-level modules of ALPHA6000V series inverters are high performance motor control modules, whichcontain four control modes, i.e. V/F, sensorless open-loop vector control (SVC), speed sensor closed-loopvector control (VC) and V/F separation.

Notes: 1. If the user has special needs, please specify the technology requirement in the order.2. -X rule applies to 160KW-500KWmodels.

Series code Rated voltage Power of motor Suitable load Additional information Additional information

2:3-phase 220V

3:3-phase 380V

G: Generalpurpose

B: With brake unit

Blank: No brake unit

X: Standard model with base

V: Wall type standard model

Blank: narrow-body model

Sparex India



7

1.3 Nameplate of InverterOn the right side of the bottom plate of inverter, there is a nameplate, which marks the model and rated value ofinverter. See the following Figure:

Inverter model

Adaptive motor model

Rated input voltage, current,frequencyRated output voltage, current,frequency

Barcode information

Production date

ALPHA6000S Series Nameplate of Inverter

Notes: Nameplates of ALPHA6000S series inverters are similar with those of ALPHA6000V series inverters.After unpacking, check whether the nameplate of the drive is consistent with the demand, if it is inconsistent,contact the dealer or the supplier.

Sparex India


Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring

8

Chapter 2 Installation andWiring

2.1 External Dimension and Installation Dimension (See Appendix1)

2.2 Mounting Place Requirements and Management

·Don’t carry the inverter by its cover. The cover cannot support the weight of the inverter and may drop.

·Please install the inverter on a strong support, failing which the inverter may fall off.

·Don’t install the inverter in places where water pipes may leak onto it.

·Don’t allow screws, washers and other metal foreign matters to fall inside the inverter, otherwise there is adanger of fire or damage.

·Don’t operate the inverter if parts are not complete, otherwise there is a danger of fire or human injury.

·Don’t install the inverter under direct sunshine; otherwise, it may be damaged.

·Don’t short circuit PB, + and -, otherwise there is a danger of fire or the inverter may be damaged.

·Cable lugs must be connected to main terminals firmly.

·Don’t apply supply voltage (AC 220V) to control terminals except terminals TA, TB, TC.

Please mount the inverter as following application occasions and maintain appropriate condition

2.2.1 Installation Location

The installation location should meet the following conditions:

Good indoor ventilation

Ambient temperature: -10 °C ~ 40 °C. If the temperature is higher than 40 °C, the inverter should be forcedventilation is required and derating used.

Humidity should be lower than 95%, no condensing and rain water drops.

Do not mount the inverter on the timber or other combustible matters.

Avoid direct sunlight.

It is strictly prohibited to install the inverters in places where have flammable, explosive, corrosive gases orliquids;

Mount in the location free of dust, metal powder, corrosive gas or combustible gas.

The installation foundation should be solid and free of vibration.

No electromagnetic interference, away from source of interference.

Attention

Sparex India



9

Derating use must be considered when the inverter is installed at high altitude, greater than 1000 m. This isbecause the cooling effect of inverter is deteriorated because of the thin air. Derating 6% per 1000 m higher ofthe altitude.

2.2.2 Ambient Temperature

In order to enhance operating reliability of the inverter, be sure where the inverter mounted has a good ventilation;when the inverter is used in a closed case, cooling fans or an air-conditioning must be installed to keep the ambienttemperature below 40℃

2.2.3 Preventive Measures

Installing the inverter, please set a shield to prevent metal debris falling into it, and remove the shield after installing.

Please remove the protection membrane when the ambient temperature is over 40° C or the internal temperature istoo high due to other reasons. Please pay attention to avoid small parts falling into the inverter.

2.3 Installation Direction and SpaceInverters of this series are all equipped fans for forced cooling. In order to be an effective cooling cycle, the invertermust be mounted in the vertical direction, up, down, left and right away from adjacent articles or baffle (wall)maintain adequate space, as Figure 2-1

Figure 2-1 Installation Direction and Space

Greaterthan 50mm

Greaterthan 50mm

Greater than120mm

Greater than120mm

Sparex India



10

2.4 Main Circuit Wiring2.4.1 The Main Circuit Terminals Arrangement and wiring

Fig. 2-2 Wiring of terminals of major loops of S2R4GB ~ S2R75GB models

Table 2-1 Function and description of terminals of major loops of S2R4GB~S2R75GB

Terminalsymbol Terminal name and function

L.N Single-phase AC 220V input terminal+.PB Reserved terminals for an external braking resistorU.V.W Three-phase AC output terminals

PE Protective earth terminals for input power or shield earth terminals for motor cable andbraking resistor cables

Fig. 2-3 Wiring of terminals of major loops of S21R5GB ~ S22R2GB models

Table 2-2 Function and description of terminals of major loops of S21R5GB ~ S22R2GB models

Terminal symbol Terminal name and functionL.N Single-phase AC 220V input terminal+.PB Reserved terminals for an external braking resistor- DC negative bus output terminalsU.V.W Three-phase AC output terminals


Input power Braking resistor Electric motor Ground wire


Sparex India



11

Fig. 2-4 Wiring of terminals of major loops of 3R75GB ~ 3004GB models

Table 2-3 Function and description of terminals of major loops of 3R75GB~3004GB

Terminal symbol Terminal name and functionR.S.T Three-phase AC 380V input terminal+.PB Reserved terminals for an external braking resistor- DC negative bus output terminalsU.V.W Three-phase AC output terminals


Fig. 2-5 Wiring of terminals of major loops of 35R5GB ~ 3015GB models

Table 2-4 Function and description of terminals of major loops of 35R5GB~3015GB

Terminal symbol Terminal name and functionR.S.T Three-phase AC 380V input terminalP1.+/B1 Reserved terminals for an external DC reactor+/B1.B2 Reserved terminals for an external braking resistor- DC negative bus output terminalsU.V.W Three-phase AC output terminalsPE Protective earth terminals for input power or shield earth terminals for motor cable and


Reactor Brakingresistor

Electric motor

PE conductorcore and shieldlayer

Input power

Sparex India



12

braking resistor cablesNotes: When a DC reactor is not connected, the supplied short circuit sheet should be short-circuited with "P1" and"+ / B1"

Fig. 2-6 Wiring of terminals of major loops of 3018G ~ 3132G models

Table 2-5 Function and description of terminals of major loops of 3018G~3132G

Terminal symbol Terminal name and functionR.S.T Three-phase AC 380V input terminalP1.+ Reserved terminals for an external DC reactor- DC negative bus output terminalsU.V.W Three-phase AC output terminals


Notes: When DC reactor is not connected, please short “P1” and “+/B1” with supplied copper bar.

Input power

Braking unit

Brakingresistor

Reactor Motor

PE conductorcore and shieldlayer

Sparex India



13

Fig. 2-7 Terminals of major loops of 3160G ~ 3355G models

Fig. 2-8 Terminals of major loops of 3400G ~ 3500G models

Table 2-6 Function and description of terminals of major loops of 3160G~3500G

Terminal symbol Terminal name and functionR、S、T Three-phase AC 380V input terminalP1、+ Reserved terminals for an external DC reactor

- DC negative bus output terminalsU、V、W Three-phase AC output terminals


Upper wiring board Lower wiring board

Input power

Braking unit(external, optional)


Reactor (built-in,standard)

Electric motor

Upper wiring board Lower wiring board

Input power



Reactor (built-in,standard)

Electricmotor

Sparex India



14

Notes: When a DC reactor is not connected, the supplied short circuit sheet should be short-circuited with "P1" and"+"

2.4.2 Main Circuit Wiring operation

When the motor is running, please make sure if it is in positive rotation while the motor receives positive rotationcommand. If the motor is in reverse rotation, the rotation direction of the motor can be changed by exchanging anytwo wires of output terminals (U, V, and W) of the inverter. The rotation direction can also be changed by modifyingthe function code P2.37 to change the phase sequence of the motor.

Do not mistakenly connect the input power cable to the output terminal; otherwise the components in the inverterwill be damaged. Output terminals are prohibited to be grounded. The lines should not be collided with theenclosure, or short connected; otherwise the inverter will be damaged.

Earth terminal PE must be grounded. 380V class grounding resistance should be 10Ω or less. The earth wire shouldnever share with electric welder or power equipment. The earth wire should be of conductor diameter specified in thetechnical standard for electrical equipment, and should be as close to the ground point as possible. On occasionsusing more than two inverters at the same time, please do not form the earth wire into ring circuit. Proper groundingmethod and incorrect grounding method are shown in Fig. 2-9.

Inverter InverterRight

Inverter InverterInverterWrong

Inverter

Figure 2-9 Earthing Connection Method

Notes: The neutral point of motor using Y connection can’t be connected to earth.

Since the inverter output PWM wave, if a capacitor for improving power factor or a lightning varistor is installed onthe output side, which would case tripping or damage to parts, be sure to remove it.

If a contactor or other on-off part is needed to be installed between the output and the motor, be sure the on-offoperation is done when the inverter has no output, otherwise the inverter would be damaged.

Countermeasures to conduction interference: To inhibit conduction interference of the output, besides installingnoise filter and using shielded motor cables, leading all the output cables to earthing metal tube is also a method.Make the distance between the output cables and the control signal cables greater than 30 cm, the effect ofconduction interference will obviously decrease too.

Countermeasures to RFI: The input cables, output cables and the inverter itself would produce RFI. Placing noisefilters both at input and output sides, and shielded with metal shell would reduce RFI. The cables between theinverter and the motor should be as short as possible. Measure to reduce RFI is shown as Figure 2-10.

Powersupply

NoiseFilter

InverterNoiseFilter

Motor

Metal tube

Metal shell box

Figure 2-10 Method to Restrain RFI

Sparex India



15

The longer the distance between the inverter and the motor, the higher the carrier frequency would be, and thegreater the high harmonic leakage current of the cables would be. Leakage current has a negative impact to invertersand Equipment nearby, so reduce leakage current as little as possible.

The relationship of the distance between the inverter and the motor and carrier frequency is shown as Table 2-7

Table 2-7 Distance between the inverter and the motor and carrier frequency.

Distance between inverter and motor Below 50m Below 100m Above 100mCarrier frequency Below 8 kHz Below 4 kHz Below 2 kHz

2.5 Control Circuit Connection2.5.1 Function of Control Circuit Terminals

Fig. 2-11 Terminal arrangement of control loop of S2R4GB ~ 3004GB models

10V

AI3

AO2

AI2

GNDAO1

GND

X6

485-

X5

485+

X4

24V

X3

PLC

X2

COMDOY1

TA

CME

TB TC

COM

X1

AI1

Fig. 2-12 Terminal arrangement of control loop of 35R5GB and above models

Sparex India



16

X10

COM1

X9

COM1

X8X7

24V1 CME1

BRA

Y2

BRB BRC

Y3PLC1

Fig. 2-13 Terminal arrangement of extension board (optional for 35R5GB and above models)

In order to reduce interference and attenuation of control signal, the length of control cables should be limitedin 50m and away from power cables for more than 30cm. Avoid control wire and power wire being parallel. Try touse STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) to connect analog input and output signal.

Table 2-8 Function of control circuit terminalsCategory

Terminallabel Name Description of terminal

function Specification

Ana

log

inpu

t

AI1 Analog input 1 Receive voltage/current input.Voltage and current areselected by toggle switchesSW1, SW3, SW4. The rangespan of factory default inputvoltage is shown ininstructions in function codeP4.00 ~ P4.10 and P4.16 ~P4.20.

Range of AI1, AI2 input signals:0~10V or 0~20mA

Range of AI3 input signal:-10~10V or -20~20mA

The input impedance is 30kΩ whileinputting voltage signal. The inputimpedance is 250Ω while inputting thecurrent signalReference ground: GND

AI2 Analog input 2

AI3Analog input 3(Only for 35R5GBand above)

Ana

log

outp

ut

AO1 Analog output 1

Provide analogvoltage/current output. Itrepresents 14 magnitudes.The output voltage andcurrent are selected by switchSW2. The factory defaultinput voltage is shown ininstructions in function codeP4.21. Current output range: 0/4 ~ 20mA

Voltage output range: 0/2 ~ 10V

Reference ground:

AO2Analog output 2(Only for 35R5GBand above)

Provide analogvoltage/current output. Itrepresents 14 magnitudes.The output voltage andcurrent are selected by switchSW5. The factory defaultinput voltage is shown ininstructions in function codeP 4.22.

AO3 Reserve Reserve

Com

mun

ica

tion 485+ RS485

communicationinterface

485 differential signalpositive terminal

Standard RS-485 communicationinterface,Not isolated to GNDPlease use twisted pair or shieldedcable

485- 485 differential signalnegative terminal

Sparex India



17

Category


function SpecificationM

ulti-

func

tion

inpu

tter

min

al

X1 Multi-function inputterminal 1

It can be defined as amulti-function on-off inputterminal throughprogramming, please seeSection 5.4 of Chapter VFunction Description of InputTerminals of I/O TerminalControl (Group P3) fordetails.X3 can be used as an ordinarymulti-function terminal forS2R4GB ~ 3004GB seriesinverters, it can also beprogrammable and used as aninput port of high speedpulse; but it can only be usedas an ordinary multi-functionterminal for 35R5GB ~3500G series inverters.

Opto-coupler isolation inputInput impedance R = 3.9kΩMaximum input frequency:

200Hz (ordinary IO)50KHz (high-speed pulse)

Input voltage range: 0~30V

Common port: PLCReference ground: COM

COM

+24V

X1-X6

PLC +5V

24V

R




It can be defined as an inputport of high-speed pulsethrough programming, pleasesee Section 5.4 of Chapter VFunction Description of InputTerminals of I/O TerminalControl (Group P3) fordetails.X6 is exclusive for 35R5GBand above models.



Mul

ti-fu

nctio

nin

putt

erm

inal


It can be defined as amulti-function on-off inputterminal throughprogramming, please seeSection 5.4 of Chapter VFunction Description of InputTerminals of I/O TerminalControl (Group P3) fordetails.X7 ~ X10, located on IOextension board, areextension terminals,and are exclusive for35R5GB and above models.

Opto-coupler isolation inputInput impedance R = 3.9kΩMaximum input frequency: 400HzInput voltage range: 0~30VCommon port: PLC1Reference ground: COM1

COM1

+24V

X7-X10

PLC1 +5V

24V

R




Mul

ti-fu

nctio

nou

tput

DO Open collector outputterminal

It can be defined as amulti-function outputterminal for pulse signalthrough programming. It canalso be used as an on-offoutput terminal. Section 5.4of Chapter V FunctionDescription of OutputTerminals of I/O TerminalControl (Group P3).

Opto-coupler isolated open collectoroutput.Range of operating voltage: 0V~26VMaximum output current: 50mARange of Output frequency: 0~50KHz

Reference ground: COM

Y1 Open collector output It can be defined as a Opto-coupler isolated open collector

Sparex India



18

Category



Y1 multi-function on-off outputterminal throughprogramming, please seeSection 5.4 of Chapter VFunction Description ofOutput Terminals of I/OTerminal Control (Group P3)for details.

outputRange of operating voltage: 0V~26VMaximum output current: 50mA

Y terminals are exclusive for 35R5GBand above models. Y1 is a controlboard terminal with the common portof CME, Y2 ~ Y3, located on theextension board, are extensionterminals with the common port ofCME1.

Y2 Open collector outputY2

Y3 Open collector outputY3

Rel

ayou

tput

TA

Relay output

It can be defined as amulti-function relay outputterminal throughprogramming, please seeSection 5.4 of Chapter VFunction Description ofOutput Terminals of I/OTerminal Control (Group P3)for details.

TA-TB: NC;TA-TC: NO.Contact capacity:250VAC/2A (COSΦ=1)250VAC/1A (COSΦ=0.4)30VDC/1A

TB

TC

BRA

Relay output(exclusive for35R5GB and abovemodels, located on theextension board,extended function)

It can be defined as amulti-function relay outputterminal throughprogramming, please seeSection 5.4 of Chapter VFunction Description ofOutput Terminals of I/OTerminal Control (Group P3)for details.

BRA-BRB: NC;BRA-BRC: NO.Contact capacity:250VAC/2A (COSΦ=1)250VAC/1A (COSΦ=0.4)30VDC/1A

BRB

BRC

Pow

eran

dre

fere

nce

grou

nd

10V +10V power supplyProvide +10V power supplyexternally(Reference ground: GND)

Maximum output current 30 mAOpen circuit voltage can be up to 12V

24V +24V power supplyProvide +24V power supplyexternally(Reference ground: COM)

Maximum output current 200mA

24V1 IO extension board+24 V power

Provide +24V power supplyexternally(Reference ground: COM1)

Maximum output current 200mA

PLC Multi-function inputcommon port

Common port ofmulti-function input terminal

PLC is connected with 24V internallywhile leaving the factory

PLC1Multi-function inputcommon port of IOextension board

Common port ofmulti-function input terminalof IO extension board

PLC1 is connected with 24V1internally while leaving the factory

GND Reference ground of+10 V power supply

Reference ground of analogsignal and +10 V powersupply

Isolated to COM from insideCommon port of +10 V, AI1, AI2, AI3,AO1, AO2, AO3 signals

COM Common port of+24V power supply

Used in conjunction withother terminals

Isolated to GND, and short connectedwith CME while leaving the factory

COM1Common port of+24V power supply ofIO extension board

Used in conjunction withother terminals

Isolated to GND, and short connectedwith CME1 while leaving the factory

CME Common port of Common port of Short connected with COM while

Sparex India



19

Category



output terminal Y1 multi-function outputterminal Y1

leaving the factoryInternal isolation between CME andGND

CME1

Common port ofoutput terminalsY2~Y3 of IOextension board

Common port ofmulti-function outputterminals Y2~ Y3

Isolated to GND, and short connectedwith COM1 while leaving the factory

PE Shield ground

It is used for grounding ofterminal wiring shield layer.Shield layer of analog signallines, 485 communicationlines, and motor cables can beconnected to this terminal

It is internally connected to connectionterminal PE of major loop

2.5.2 Wiring of control circuit terminals

●Wiring of analog input terminalsAI1/AI2 terminals accept analog signal input, toggle switches SW1 and SW3 select the input voltage (0 ~ 10V) orthe input current (0 ~ 20mA). AI3 (exclusive for 35R5GB and above models) terminals accept analog signal input,toggle switch SW4 selects the input voltage ( - 10 ~ 10V) or the input current (-20 ~ 20mA). The wiring of terminalsis shown in Fig. 2-14:

AI1/AI2 0-10V/0-20mAAI3 -10-10V/-20-20mA

AI1 AI2 AI3

GND PE

Near-end of shieldline is grounded

I

V

SW1/SW3/SW4

Inverter

Fig. 2-14 Wiring diagram of analog input terminals

●Wiring of analog output terminalIn S2R4GB ~ 3004GB, analog output terminal AO1 external connecting analog meter can indicate a variety ofphysical quantities. Slide switch SW2 selects the output voltage (0/2 ~ 10V) or the output current (0/4 ~ 20mA). Thewiring of terminals is shown in Fig. 2-15:

Fig. 2-15 Wiring diagram of S2R4GB~3004GB analog output terminals

Inverter

Near-end of shield line isgrounded

Sparex India



20

In 35R5GB and above models, analog output terminal AO1 /AO2 external connecting analog meter can indicate avariety of physical quantities. Slide switch SW2/SW5 select the output voltage (0/2 ~ 10V) or the output current (0/4~ 20mA). The wiring of terminals is shown in Fig. 2-16:

A01 AO2

0/2-10V

0/4-20mA

AO1 A02

GNDPE


I

V

SW2/SW5

Inverter

Fig. 2-16 Wiring diagram of analog output terminals for 35R5GB and above models

Tips

1) Dialing SW1, SW2, SW3 SW4 SW5to “I” represents current, dialing to “V” represents voltage.2) Analog input and output signals are easily disturbed by exterior environment, so shielded cables must be used

for wiring and the length of the cables should be as short as possible.3) When an analog output equipment be connected to the inverter, sometimes because of error act because of

interference cased by the analog output equipment or the inverter, when which happened, a 0.01~0.1uF/50Vcapacitor or a ferrite bead (enwind 3 laps) could be connected to the analog output equipment.

● Input multi-function terminal wiringThe multi-function input terminals of this series of inverters adopt full bridge rectifier circuits. PLC is X1 ~ X6 (X1~ X5 are exclusive for 3004GB and below models) common terminals, and is connected with 24V through JP1 whileleaving the factory; PLC1 is X7 ~ X10 common terminals on extension board, and is connected with ]24V1 throughJP1 with the typical mode of connection as follows:

Dry contact way

1) 24V internal power of the inverter is used. The modes of connection are shown in Fig. 2-17 (control board) andFig. 2-18 (extension board).

X1~X6

R

COM

+24V24V

5VPLC

+

-K X7~X10

R

COM1

+24V24V1

5VPLC1

+

-K

Fig. 2-17 Connection diagram while using internal 24Vpower supply (control board)

Fig. 2-18 Connection diagram while using internal 24Vpower supply (extension board)

2) An external power is used with the mode of connection shown in Fig. 2-19 (control board) and Fig. 2-20(extension board).

Sparex India



21

X1~X6

R

COM

+24V24V

5VPLC

+

-K

+- DC

R

+24V

5V

+

-K

+- DC

24V1

PLC1

X7~X10COM1

Fig. 2-19 Connection diagram while using an externalpower supply (control board)

NOTE: Remove the short jumper JP1 connectinginternal PLC and 24V

Fig. 2-20 Connection diagram while using outsidepower supply (extension board)

NOTE: Remove the short jumper JP1 connectinginternal PLC1 and 24V1

Source (drain electrode) mode

1） Use internal +24 V power of the inverter. External controller is the connection mode of NPN type commonemitter output, which is shown in Fig. 2-21 (control board) and Fig. 2-22 (extension board).

X1

PE

24V DC

24V

5VPLC

+

-

外部控制器

COM

5V

+

-X6

COM

1

6

屏蔽线近端接地

+

-

X7

PE

24V DC24V1

5VPLC1

+

-

外部控制器

COM1

5V

+

-X10

COM

7

10


+

-

Fig. 2-21 Connection diagram while using source ofinternal + 24V power supply (control board)

Fig. 2-22 Connection diagram while using source ofinternal + 24V power supply (extension board)

2） Use internal +24 V power of the inverter. External controller is the connection mode of PNP type commonemitter output, which are shown in Fig. 2- 23 (control board) and Fig. 2-24 (extension board).

External controller External controller



Sparex India



22

X1

PE

24V DC

24V

5VPLC

+

-

外部控制器

COM

5V

+

-X6

1

6


+

-

X7

PE

24V DC

5V

+

-

外部控制器

5V

+

-X10

7

10


+

-

24V1

PLC1COM1

Fig. 2-23 Connection diagram while using drainelectrode of internal + 24V power supply (control

board)NOTE: Remove the short jumper JP1 connecting PLC and 24V,

and connect PLC to COM

Fig. 2-24 Connection diagram while using drainelectrode of internal + 24V power supply (extension

board)NOTE: Remove the short jumper JP1 connecting PLC1 and

24V1, and connect PLC1 to COM1

3) Use connection mode of source of an external power, as shown in Fig. 2-25 (control board) and Fig. 2-26(extension board).

X1

PE

24V DC

24V

5VPLC

+

-

外部控制器

COM

5V

+

-X6

COM

1

6


+

-

+-

9~30V

X7

PE

24V DC

5V

+

-

外部控制器

5V

+

-X10

COM

7

10


+

-

+-

9~30V

24V1

PLC1COM1

Fig. 2-25 Connection diagram while using source ofexternal power (control board)

NOTE: Remove the short jumper JP1 connecting internal PLCand 24V

Fig. 2- 26 Connection diagram while using source ofexternal power (extension board)

NOTE: Remove the short jumper JP1 connecting internal PLC1and 24V1

4) Use connection mode of drain electrode of an external power as shown in Fig. 2-27 (control board) and Fig. 2-28(extension board).


Near-end of shieldline is grounded Near-end of shield

line is grounded




Sparex India



23

X1

PE

24V DC

24V

5VPLC

+

-

外部控制器

COM

5V

+

-X6

1

6


+

-+-

9~30V

X7

PE

24V DC

5V

+

-

外部控制器

5V

+

-X10

7

10


+

-+-

9~30V 24V1

PLC1COM1

Fig. 2-27 Connection diagram while using drainelectrode of an external power (control board)

NOTE: Remove the short jumper JP1 connecting internal PLCand 24V

Fig. 2-28 Connection diagram while using drainelectrode of an external power (extension board)

NOTE: Remove the short jumper JP1 connecting internal PLC1and 24V1

● Wire Multi-function Output Terminals

1) Multi-function output terminals D0 as switching output can use the internal 24V power supply of inverter and thewiring method is shown in Figure 2-29.

5V

+24V24V

DO

COM

继电器

R

Fig. 2-29 On-off output connection mode 1 of multi-function output terminals

2) Multi-function output terminals DO as switching output can also use the external, 9~30V, power supply andthe wiring method is shown in Figure 2-30

COM

DO

24V+24V

5V继电器

DC 9~30V

+ -R

Fig. 2-30 On-off output connection mode 2 of multi-function output terminals




Relay

Relay

Sparex India



24

3) Multi-function output terminals / Pulse output terminal DO as pulse output can use the internal 24V power supplyand the wiring is shown in Figure 2-31.

数字频率计

5V+24V

24V

DO

COM

+24V

R

Fig. 2-31 Digital pulse output connection mode 1 of multi-function output terminals

4) Multi-function output terminals / Pulse output terminal DO as Pulse output can also use the external, 9~30V,power supply and the wiring is shown in Figure 2-32

5V+24V

24V

DO

COM

+24V

R

数字频率计

DC9~30V

+-

Fig. 2-32 Digital pulse output connection mode 2 of multi-function output terminals

5) Multi-function output terminals Y1, Y2, Y3 can use 24V internal power of the inverter with the connection modesshown in Fig. 2-33 (control board) and Fig. 2-34 (extension board).

继电器

COM

CME

Y1

24V+24V

+5V继电器

COM1

CME1

Y2 Y3

24V1+24V

+5V

Fig. 2-33 Wiring diagram of multi-function outputterminals (control board)

Fig. 2-34 Wiring diagram of multi-function outputterminals ( extension board)

Digital frequencystatistics

Digital frequencystatistics

Relay Relay

Sparex India



25

6) Multi-function output terminals Y1, Y2, Y3 also can use external power (9~30V) with the connection modes asshown in Fig. 2-35(control board) and Fig. 2-36(extension board).

+5V

+24V24V

Y1

CME

COM

继电器

DC 9~30V+-

+5V

+24V24V1

Y2 Y3

CME1

COM1

继电器

DC 9~30V+-

Fig. 2-35 Wiring diagram of multi-function outputterminals (control board)

Fig. 2-36 Wiring diagram of multi-function outputterminals (extension board)

● Wiring of relay output terminals TA, TB, TC and BRA, BRB, BRC (exclusive for 35R5GB and abovemodels)If the drive inductive loads (e.g. electromagnetic relays, contactors) should be equipped with surge voltageabsorption circuit, such as the RC absorption circuit, piezoresistor or flywheel diode (pay attention to the diodepolarity when used for DC electromagnetic circuit), etc. Components of absorption circuit should be installedclose to both ends of coil of relay or contactor.

Tips:

1. Don’t short circuit terminals 24V and COM, otherwise the control board may be damaged.2. Please use multi-core shielded cable or multi-stranded cable (above 1 mm) to connect the control terminals.3. When using a shielded cable, the shielded lay’s end that is nearer to the inverter should be connected to PE.4. The control cables should be as far away(at least 30 cm) from the main circuit and high-voltage cables as

possible (including power supply cables, motor cables, relay cables and cables of contactor). The cables shouldbe vertical to each other to reduce the disturbance to minimum.

● Wiring of serial communication interfaceThe series of inverters provides users with RS485 serial communication interface, and can compose master-slavecontrol system. The host machine can be a personal computer or PLC controller (called upper computer for short),and the slave-based machine is this series of inverter. The upper computer can be used for real-time monitoring,remote control and other operations to inverters in network.Fig. 2-37 Illustration of wiring between the upper computer and the inverter interface:

Relay Relay

Sparex India



26

Fig. 2-37 Wiring diagram between the upper computer and the inverter interface

When multiple inverters are connected in one RS485 system, the communication suffers more interference,and a maximum of 31 inverters can be connected through RS485 serial bus. Wiring is very important.Communication bus must be shielded twisted pair wiring. The following connection method is recommended:

485- GND485+

变频器

485- GND485+

变频器

485- GND485+

变频器

485- SG485+

PLC

屏蔽线

Fig. 2-38 Recommended wiring diagrams (inverters and motors are all well grounded) when PLC is in multicomputer communication with inverters

When a PC is used as the host machine, a RS232/RS485 bus adapter should be added between the host machine andthe bus; when a PLC controller is used as the host machine, connect the dotted terminals, namely RS485 terminal ofslave-based machine and RS485 terminal of the host machine.When multiple 35R5GB and above inverters compose RS485 bus communication, the matched resistance toggleswitch SW6 on the control board of this series of inverters at the farthest ends of the bus should be turned to ONposition, as shown in Fig. 2-39.

Fig. 2-39 Schematic illustration of RS485 matched resistance toggle switch

If using the above wiring still cannot communicate normally, the following measures can be taken:1) Supply the PLC controller (or the upper machine) separately or isolate its power;2) When using a RS232/RS485 converter module, separate power supply for the modular converter can be

considered. And modular converter with opto-coupler isolation is recommended to use;3) Apply a magnetic ring on the communication line, and reduce the carrier frequency of the converter

appropriately if site conditions permit.

Upper computerRS232/RS485 converter

Inverter

RS485 communication interface

Pin No. Signal

Enclosure

Shieldedcable

Terminal name Description of terminal

Positive terminal of 5Vpower supply

TXD

RXD

Negative terminal of 5Vpower supply

Terminal name

Negative terminal ofsignal

Positive terminal ofsignal

Description of terminal Terminal name Description of terminal

Negative terminal ofsignal

Positive terminal ofsignal

Inverter Inverter Inverter

Shield line

Sparex India



27

● Description of keypad interface

Keypad connection interface CN5 on the control board adopts 8PIN drop-out lines with fool-proof ports. Users cancustomize extended keypad cable according to actual needs. But the keypad extension cable does not exceed 15 m,because when it exceeds 15 m, normal work cannot be guaranteed.

Fig. 2-40 Keypad interface CN5 on control board

The cables connecting keypad and control board use standard super-five-class network cable. RJ-45 Interface usesthrough-line method, namely both sides are connected according to EIA/TIA568B standard. You can make the cableby yourself if you need.

Tips

1. Both sides of keypad cable should be connected refer to Table 2-9. Otherwise, the cable couldn’t work properlyor even the keypad would be damaged.

2. When the keypad extension cable is longer than 1 m, which must use shielded twist-pair network cable, RJ-45interfaces of both sides of the cable should use crystal with shielded metal shell, connect shielded metal shell toshielded layer. Otherwise, it is likely to cause error action because of disturbance.

3. Be sure the extension cable of the keypad is no longer than 15 meters, otherwise it wouldn’t work properly.

Table 2-9 Standard for linesequence

No. Color

1 Citrus orange

2 Orange

3 White green

4 Blue

5 White blue

6 Green

7 White brown

8 Brown

Sparex India



28

2.6 Wiring of Inverter for Basic Operation

PB -

制动电阻

（外接、选配件）

LL

NN

U

V

W

24V

PLC

X1

X2

X3

X4

X5

COM

PE

10V

AI1

AI2

GND

PE

单相 220V

50/60HZ

多功能输入选择1





速度指令 0~10V

0~10V 0~20mA

PE

GND

AO1

PE

M

模拟量输出

0/4~20mA电流信号

SW2

A01

0/4~20mA0/2~10V

断路器

24V

DO

COM

PE

频率表(开路集电极输出)

输出0~50KHZ高速脉冲信号

TA

TB

TC

可编程继电器输出

标准RS485通讯口485+

485-

GND

SW1/SW3

AI1/AI2

IV

VI

PE

PG

PE

X5X4COM24V

0/2~10V电压信号

编码器输入信号

电位器

(阻值大于500Ω）

0~10V电压信号

0~20mA电流信号

+

X3

0～20mA0～10V

0~50KHZ高速脉冲输入信号

Figure 2-41 S2R4GB ~ S22R2GB wiring diagram

Potentiometer (theresistance is greaterthan 500Ω)0-10V voltage signal0-20mA current signal

Standard RS485communication port

Programmable relay output

Frequency meter (open collectoroutput)Output 0-50 KHZ high-speedpulse signal

Analog output0/4~20mA current signal0/2~10V voltage signal

0-50KHZ high-speed pulse input signal

Encoder input signal

Speedcommand

Single phase

Braking resistor(external, optional)

Circuitbreaker

Multi-function inputselection 1Multi-function inputselection 2Multi-function inputselection 3Multi-function inputselection 4Multi-function inputselection 5

Sparex India



29

PB -

制动电阻

（外接、选配件）

LR

NT

U

V

W

24V

PLC

X1

X2

X3

X4

X5

COM

PE

10V

AI1

AI2

GND

PE

三相 380V

50/60HZ






速度指令 0~10V

0~10V 0~20mA

PE

GND

AO1

PE

M

模拟量输出

0/4~20mA电流信号

SW2

A01

0/4~20mA0/2~10V

断路器

24V

DO

COM

PE

频率表(开路集电极输出)

输出0~50KHZ高速脉冲信号

TA

TB

TC

可编程继电器输出

标准RS485通讯口485+

485-

GND

SW1/SW3

AI1/AI2

IV

VI

PE

PG

PE

X5X4COM24V

0/2~10V电压信号

编码器输入信号

电位器

(阻值大于500Ω）

0~10V电压信号

0~20mA电流信号

+

X3

0～20mA0～10V

S

0~50KHZ高速脉冲输入信号

Fig. 2-42 3R75GB~ 3004GB wiring diagram

Potentiometer (theresistance is greaterthan 500Ω)0-10V voltage signal0-20mA currentsignal Standard RS485 communication

port


Frequency meter (open collectoroutput)Output 0-50 KHZ high-speedpulse signal

Analog output0/4~20mA current signal0/2~10V voltage signal

Braking resistor(external, optional)

Three-phase

Circuitbreaker

Encoder input signal

0-50KHZ high-speed pulse inputsignal

Speedcommand


Sparex India



30

P1 +/B1 B2 -

DC reactor

(external,optional)

Braking resistor(external,optional)

RRSSTT

U

V

W

24V

PLC

X1

X2

X3

X4

X5

X6

X7

X8

COM1

PE

10V

AI1

AI2

GND

PE

Three-phase 380V

50/60HZ

Multi-function inputselection 1

PG

PEX6X5COM24V

BRC

BRB

BRAProgrammable relay output

0/2~10V voltage signal

Encoder inputsignal

Potentiometer

(the resistanceis greater than500Ω）0~10V voltagesignal0~20mA currentsignal

X9

X10

AI3-10~10V-20~20mA

PE

CME1

Output 3

SW7

A03

X40~50KHZ high-speed pulseinput signal

COM

24V1

PLC1

PE

AO3

GND1

PE

COM

PE

CME


Multi-function inputselection 7Multi-function inputselection 8Multi-function inputselection 9Multi-function inputselection 10

Programmable opencollector output

（opto-coupler isolation）

Speed command 0~10V

0~10V0~20mA

PE

GND

AO1

AO2

PE

M

Analog output

0/4~20mA current signal

SW2

A01

0/4~20mA0/2~10V

A02

SW5

Circuit breaker

24V

DO

COM

PE

Frequency meter(open

collector output)Output 0~50KHZ high-speedpulse signal

Y1

Y2

Y3

COM1



Output 1

Output 2

TA

TB

TC



485+

485-

GNDRS485

Matchedresistance

SW6ON ON

SW1/SW3/SW4

AI1/AI2/AI3

ONOFF

IV

VI

PE

Fig. 2-43 35R5GB~3015GB wiring diagram

Sparex India



31

RRSSTT

U

V

W

PE

M

PE

PN

PPB

24V

PLC

X1

X2

X3

X4

X5

X6

X7

X8

COM1

PE

10V

AI1

AI2

GND

PE

0~10V0~20mA

GND

AO1

AO2

PE

SW2

A01

0/4~20mA0/2~10V

A02

SW5

24V

DO

COM

PE

Y1

Y2

Y3

COM1

P1 + -

TA

TB

TC

485+

485-

GNDRS485

SW6ON ON

SW1/SW3/SW4

AI1/AI2/AI3

ONOFF

IV

VI

PG

PEX6X5COM24V

BRC

BRB

BRA

X9

X10

AI3-10~10V-20~20mA

PE

CME1

SW7

A03

X4

COM

24V1

PLC1

PE

AO3

GND1

PE

COM

PE

CME

DC reactor (externallyconnected ALPHA6000S-3132G

and the following options)

Brake unit and braking resistor

(external,optional)

Three-phase 380V

50/60HZ

Multi-function inputselection 1

Speed command 0~10V

Analog output

0/4~20mA current signal

Circuit breaker

Frequency meter(open

collector output)Output 0~50KHZ high-speedpulse signal



Output 1

Output 2



Matchedresistance


0/2~10V voltage signal

Encoder inputsignal

Potentiometer

(the resistanceis greater than500Ω）0~10V voltagesignal0~20mA currentsignal

Output 3

0~50KHZ high-speed pulseinput signal


Multi-function inputselection 7Multi-function inputselection 8Multi-function inputselection 9Multi-function inputselection 10



Fig. 2-44 3018G~ 3500G wiring diagram

Notes: 1.The set voltage or current of analog input terminals can be selected by toggle switch, and the factorysetting is the set voltage input. Its range can be set by parameter Group P4.2. The maximum output current of the control circuit terminal 10V is 30mA.3. X7-X10, BRA, BRB, BRC and other terminals in the figure are located on IO extension board.

Sparex India



32

2.7 Wiring Attention Be sure the input power supply of the inverter is cut off then you can remove or replace the motor. Be sure the inverter has stopped output then you can switch the motor or the power supply. If a peripheral (brake unit, reactor, filter) is added, test the insulation resistance of the peripheral to earth first

and be sure the value not below 4 MΩ. Besides shielding the input signal cable and the cable of frequency meter, the cables should be disposed

solely, not parallel with the main circuit cable, and far away from it as possible. In order to avoid error action caused by molestation, the control circuit cable should use stranding shielded

cables, and the wiring distance should be less than 50 meters. Be sure the shielded layers of shielded cables are not touching other signal cables or shell of equipment, you

can use insulating tape to enswathe bare shielding layer. The withstand voltage of all the cables should match with the voltage class of the inverter. In order to prevent accident, be sure that the control circuit terminal ”PE” and the main circuit terminal “PE”

are connected to earth, and the earthing cable can’t be shared with other equipment. The size of main circuitearthing cable should be more than one and a half of the main circuit cable. After completion of wiring,please check whether a cable, a bolt or a connection end. etc., was remained in the inverter, whether the boltswere fastened firmly, whether the bare cable of terminals were shorted to other terminals.

Sparex India


Chapter 3 Operation

33

Chapter 3 Operation

DANGER

1, Only turn on the input power supply after replacing the front cover. Do notremove the cover while the inverter is powered up.

2, When the retry function is selected, do not approach the inverter or the load, sinceit may restart suddenly after being stopped.

CAUTION

1, Since the stop key can be disabled by a function setting, install a separateemergency stop switch.

2, Since it is very easy to change operation speed from low to high speed, verify thesafe working range of the motor and machine before operation.

3, Do not check signals during operation.4, All inverter parameters have been preset at the factory. Do not change the settings

unless it is required. Failure to observe these precautions may result in equipmentdamage, serious personal injury or death.

3.1 Function and operation of keypadThe keypads of the inverter may have different exterior dimensions. However, all of them have the same array ofbuttons and LED display. Moreover, operation and function of them are all the same. Every keypad has four digitalsseven segments LED monitor, nine operation buttons, a digital encoder, and eight led indicators (five for statusindication and three for unit indication). User can perform function setting, inverter running, stop, and statusmonitoring with the keypad.

3.1.1 Keypad layout

四位数码管显示

编程键

移位键

运行状态指示灯

运行键

数字编码器上升

点动键

停止键故障复位键

频率单位：Hz

电流单位：A

电压单位：V

转速：r/min

线速：m/s

数字编码器下降

确定键

正反转切换键

RUN

PRGESC

＞＞ ENTERJOG

STOPRESET

百分比％

RUN FWD REV TRIPREMOTE

r/min

m/s%A

V

Hz

- +

Fig. 3-1 Keypad layout and name of each part

Above the keypad are five status indicators: RUN, FWD, REV, REMOTE and TRIP. The indicator RUN will be litup if the inverter is running; the indicator FWD will be lit up if it running forward and the indicator REV will be litup if it runs reverse. The indicator REMOTE will be lit up if the inverter is not controlled by keypad. The indictorTRIP will be lit up if fault occurs. To see the details, see Chapter 3-3 description.

Running-state LCDs

Four-digit digital tubedisplay

Programming

Shift key

Run

Switching between positiveand negative rotation Jog

Stop (reset in case offailure)

Enter

Decrease of digital encoder

Increase of digital encoder

Unit of voltage: V

Line speed: m/s

Unit of current: A Percentage

Rotate speed: r/min

Unit of frequency: Hz

Sparex India


Chapter 3 Operation

34

In monitoring status, the LED will display the content of current monitoring object. At abnormal state It will displaythe fault code when the inverter falls to run and show the warn code when the inverter is warning. At normal state, itwill display the object selected by parameter group PC. See table 3-1 description for details.In programming mode, nixie tube displays three-level menus: function group, function codes and function parametervalues. Under the function group display menu, it displays function group from "-P0-" to "-PF-"; under functioncode menu, it displays the corresponding function codes in the group. Under the parameters displayed in the functionmenu, the parameter values will be displayed.

Table 3-1 The LED monitoring objects

PC display control Monitoring object Permission of Modifyin running state

PC.01=1 Output frequency (Hz) (before compensation)

PC.02=1 Output frequency (Hz) (actual)

PC.03=1 Output current (A)

PC.04=1 Setting frequency (Hz blink) permission

PC.05=1 Motor rotate speed (r/min)

PC.06=1 Setting speed (r/min blink) permission

PC.07=1 Running linear speed (m/s)

PC.08=1 Setting linear speed (m/s blink)

PC.09=1 Output power (no unit)

PC.10=1 Output torque (%)

PC.11=1 Output voltage (V)

PC.12=1 Bus voltage (V)

PC.13=1 AI1 (V)

PC.14=1 AI2 (V)

PC.15=1 AI3 (V) (reserve for 3004GB and below models)

PC.16=1 Analog PID feedback (all unit lights are normally open, nounit)

PC.17=1 Analog PID setting (all unit lights flicker, no unit) permission

PC.18=1 Extern count value (no unit)

PC.19=1 State of terminal (no unit)

PC.20=1 Actual length(m)

3.1.2 Description of button function

On the inverter keypad, there are nine buttons. In addition, the function of each button is defined as table 3-2.

Sparex India


Chapter 3 Operation

35

Table 3-2 Keypad menu

key Name of key Key functions

PRGESC

Programming/Exit

Enter or exit programming mode. In monitoring mode, press PRG/ESC key toswitch to programming mode. First, enter function group, and press ENTER keyto enter function code and function parameters progressively; press PRG/ESC, itwill enter function parameters, then function code, function group, nextmonitoring state, exit step by step like this; in case of an inverter failure, switch tofailure display and function group. When giving an alarm, switch to alarm stateand functional group.

ENTER Enter Enter the sub-menu, or store parameters during parameter setting.

Digitalencoder+

-

Up (clockwise)+

It can increase the function code group number, and function code number orfunction code value. In parameter setting mode, LED nixie tube blinking displaysmodified bit. If pressing the key, the function code value will increase; in displaystate, if the keypad is set to be effective, digital frequency setting, speed PIDsetting or analog PID digital setting can be increased through the knob.

Down(counterclockwise)

-

It can reduce the function code group number, function code number or functioncode value. In parameter setting mode, LED nixie tube blinking displays modifiedbit. If pressing the key, the function code value will decrease; in display mode, ifthe keypad is set to be effective, digital frequency setting, speed PID setting oranalog PID digital setting can be decreased.

＞＞ Shift key In edit mode, the modified bit of the set data can be selected;In monitoring mode, display state parameter can be switchable.

JOG Jog In keypad mode, press this key to enter into inching running mode.

RUN Run In keypad control mode, the inverter will start running, and a running commandwill be given.

Direction switchkey

Press this button to change the direction of rotation. See P0.08 functiondescription for details.

STOPRESET

Stop/Reset key In keypad control mode, the key is used to stop the inverter. Clear the failure andreturn to normal state when there is a failure.

3.1.3 Description of LED digitals and indicators

On the inverter keypad there are four digitals seven segments LEDs, 3 unit indicators, 5 status indicators. The fourdigitals can display the monitoring object, the function parameter values and the fault code, the warning code. Thethree unit indicators have eight combinations, and each combination corresponds to one-unit. The combinations andtheir corresponding units are as Figure 3-2

亮灭

PID

r/min

m/s%A

V

Hz

无单位

r/min

m/s%A

V

Hz

Hz

r/min

m/s%A

V

Hz

A

r/min

m/s%A

V

Hz

V

r/min

m/s%A

V

Hz

r/min

r/min

m/s%A

V

Hz

m/s

r/min

m/s%A

V

Hz

%

r/min

m/s%A

V

Hz

Figure 3-2 Combinations of unit indicator and their means

The five status indicators are just above the four digitals and the mean of each indicator is shown in table 3-3

No unit

On Off

Sparex India


Chapter 3 Operation

36

Table 3-3 Description of state indicators

Indicator Display state The current state of the inverter indicated

RUN Running-state LCDs

Off StopOn Running

Flicker Zero frequency operation

FWD Forward running directionindication

Off Reverse rotation or not runNormally on Stable positive rotationQuick flash Acceleration and deceleration of positive rotationSlow flash Stop, the direction is forward

REV Reverse running directionindication

Off Positive rotation or not runNormally on Stable reverse rotationQuick flash Acceleration and deceleration of reverse rotationSlow flash Stop, reverse direction

TRIP failure indicatorOff NormalFlicker Failure

REMOTE indicator(Exclusive for control keypad)

Off Keypad control state

On Terminal control stateFlicker Serial communication state

3.1.4 Display state of keypad

The working state of this series inverter includes two states: stop state and running state.Stop State: If there is no running command input after the inverter is power on and initialized, or the inverter hasreceived a stop command input, the inverter will come into stop state.Running state: The inverter has received a running command and then comes into running state.Therefore, the display states of keypad include display of stop state, display of running state and display ofprogramming state and display of fault and warning state.

Display of stop state

If the inverter is a stop state, the four digitals of keypad will display the parameters value of stop state: For example,

the output frequency. See Figure-3-2, and the unit indicator will indicate the unit of the parameter. Press ＞＞ key,

the keypad will cycling display the value of different monitoring objects (selected by the parameter group PC) .

Display of running state

If the inverter got an effective running command, it will come into running state. Then the four digitals of keypadwill display the parameters value of running state. See example of Figure 3-3-3. and the unit indicator will indicate

the unit of the parameter. Press ＞＞ key, the keypad will cycling display the value of different monitoring objects

(selected by the parameter group PC) .

Fault and warning state

If the inverter has checked out a warning signal, it will come into warning state and show the warning codeflickeringly. See example of Figure 3-3-5. If the warning signal disappeared, the warning code will automaticallydisappear. If the inverter has checked out an error, it will come into fault state and show the fault code steadily.

Moreover, the indicator TRIP will light up, see example of Figure 3-3-6. By pressing the ＞＞ key, user can view

the parameters value of stop state. If you want to see the details of fault information, press the PRGESC

key, the

Sparex India


Chapter 3 Operation

37

keypad will go to programming state, to see the details, please see the parameter values of group PE. To reset the

inverter, press the STOPRESET key or control terminals or serial communication. If the fault signal is still exist, the

keypad will keep the fault code displaying and the indicator TRIP lighting

图1 上电初始化显示输出频率为0.00Hz

图2 停机状态，RUN灯熄灭 FWD慢闪指示设定方向

图3 运行状态，RUN灯亮，加速中FWD指示灯快闪

图4 运行状态，RUN灯亮，运行到设定频率，稳速时FWD恒亮

图5 告警时，闪烁显示告警字符

图6 故障时，显示故障代码TRIP故障指示灯闪烁

RUN

PRGESC

＞＞ ENTERJOG

STOPRESET


r/min

m/s%A

V

Hz

RUN

PRGESC

＞＞ ENTERJOG

STOPRESET


r/min

m/s%A

V

Hz

RUN

PRGESC

＞＞ ENTERJOG

STOPRESET


r/min

m/s%A

V

Hz

RUN

PRGESC

＞＞ ENTERJOG

STOPRESET


r/min

m/s%A

V

Hz

RUN

PRGESC

＞＞ ENTERJOG

STOPRESET


r/min

m/s%A

V

Hz

RUN

PRGESC

＞＞ ENTERJOG

STOPRESET


r/min

m/s%A

V

Hz

- +

- +- +- +

- +- +

Figure 3-3 Display of initialization, stop, running, warning and stop of inverter

Function code edit mode

In stopping, operation or failure alarm state, press PRGESC key, it will enter edit mode (if there is the user

password, see PF.00 description in Chapter 5.16 Parameter Protection), and the edit mode displays in there-levelmenu mode as shown in Fig. 3-4 with the sequence of function code group → function code number → function

code parameter, it can exit by pressing ENTER key. In function parameter display state, parameter storage

Fig. 1 This is in reset state, itdisplays that the output frequency is

0.00Hz

Fig. 2 This is in Shutdown state, RUNindicator goes out, FWD slow blinkindicator indicates the set direction

Figure 3 Running state, RUN indicatorlights, FWD indicator blinks fast during

acceleration

Fig. 4 This is in running state, RUNlights, the inverter runs to the setfrequency, FWD lights constantly

when the inverter runs steadily

Fig. 5 It is giving an alarm, blinkingdisplay the alarm character

Fig. 6 A fault occurs, the fault code isdisplayed, TRIP fault indicator flashes

Sparex India


Chapter 3 Operation

38

operation can be carried out by pressing ENTER key, and it can exit by pressing PRGESC key.

Figure 3-4 Display menus of programming state

3.1.5 Operation method of keypad

Here are some examples of how to run the inverter by the keypad:Monitoring object switching:

50.00 45.0 50.00 1440 1440 0.000

＞＞＞＞＞＞＞＞＞＞＞＞

50.00Display of LED

Operationof key

＞＞

Actual outputfrequency

Output frequencybefore compensation

Output current

Setting frequency

Motor rotate speed

Seting speed

Actual length

Fig. 3-5 Examples of running parameters display operations of (stopping switching method is the same as above)

Frequency adjustment at common running: (Example: change the setting frequency from 50.00 Hz to 40.00 Hz)

0.00 50.00 49.99 49.50

outputfrequency

Turn left thedigital

encoder,thekeyboard willautomatically

come intofrequency setting

state.Unit Hzwill blink.Andthe monitoring

object is settingfrequency

turn left 1time,setingfrequencydecrease0.01Hz

Keep onturnning,

the decreasestep length can

reach to0.10Hz,setingfrequence can

decrease 0.10Hz1 time.

The maximalstep lengthcan reach

to1Hz.Depressthe Enter

key to savethe desired

value.

40.00

3 secondslater,the

keyboard willautomaticallyreturn to the

originalmonitoringobject.

0.00

- - - -

Stoptrunning

Display of LED

Operationof key

Figure 3-6 Flow chart of frequency setting

This method applies to given frequency parameter adjustment when the initial display state is any state.

When the monitor display is set speed, analog PID digital setting, the parameters can be modified directly and can

display the set speed and analog PID digital setting by pressing + key (dextrorotation) or - key

(levogyration).

Shutdown stateparameter display oroperation stateparameter display orfault alarm display

Editing mode

First-levelmenu

Second-levelmenu

Third-levelmenu

Sparex India


Chapter 3 Operation

39

Setting of function code parameters: (example of changing Jog acceleration time, function code P2.01 from 6.0s to3.2s)

0.00 P2.01

monitoringstate

go intoprogramming

state.displayparametergroup menu

Enterinto

parametercode

numbermenu

turn right 1time,choseparameter

codenumberP 2.01

Enter intoparametervalue menu

Turn left 3times tochang the

number to 3

save thechanged valueand exit toparameter

code numbermenu

Displayof LED

Operationof key

Shift tochange theblinkingplace toright

Exit toparameter

groupmenu

Turn right 2times to

change thenumber to 2

Exit fromthe

programmingstate

turn right 2times,choseparametergroup P 2

P2.00-P2--P0-

-P2- P2.02 003.2 003.0

006.0 003.0

ENTERPRGESC

ENTER ＞＞P R GE S C

P R GE S C

ENTER ENTER+

+

+ -

Figure 3-7 Flow chart of parameter setting

In three-level menu state, no flicker bit for a parameter indicates that the function code cannot be modified, and thepossible reasons include: Modifying the value is forbidden because the parameter is actual measure value, or running record value or

fixed value. The function parameter cannot be changed when the inverter is at running state. However, it canbe changed at stop state.

So stop the inverter and then change the parameter value. The inverter parameters are protected. If function parameter value PF.01=1 or 2, the parameters are forbidden

to be changed. This parameter protection function is to avoid operation mistake. To change the protectionparameters, change value of function code PF.01 to zero, then all the parameters can be changedNote: When the digital encoder is damaged, JOG key can set as UP, key can be set as DOWN.

UP/DN activation method: UP/DN function can be activated by pressing the key combination ＞＞ +

JOG for 5s (operation illustration is shown in Fig3.8), which will reset after powering off. Parameter

PD.12 can be set by activating UP/DN function, please see PD.12 function description for details In monitoring or alarm mode: function of JOG and maintain unchanged

In programming mode: JOG acts as UP, acts as DN. continuous augmentation function is

activated by pressing JOG key or for 2s (operation illustration is shown in Fig. 3-9: modify the

run command control mode setting P0.07 = 0: keypad control into 4: serial communication)

Sparex India


Chapter 3 Operation

40

Fig. 3-8 Operation illustration of UP/DN activation Fig. 3-9 Operation illustration of key parameter editing

3.2 Run command mode selectThe run command modes determine the methods of the inverter running and stop. The inverter has three runcommand modes:

● Run command from the keypad: press the key RUN , STOPRESET , to control the inverter.

● Run command from the control circuit terminals: by using the terminal defined as FWD, REV, COM (2-wirecontrol mode) : FWD, REV, Xi ( 3-wire control mode ) to control the inverter.

● Run command from serial communication: Use a PC or PLC to control the inverter to run or stop.

Change P0.07 to select serial communication mode. The default setting is Keypad control mode (The defaultvalue P0.07 is 0) , If terminal control mode is needed, please change the value to 1 or 2. If we want to keep the

“STOP/RESET” key STOPRESET active in terminal control mode, we must set the value to 2.

If we need to control the inverter by PC or PLC serial communication, we should set P0.07 to 3 or 4.

If the indicator REMOTE is off, it tells that the inverter is controlled by the keypad. If the indicator REMOTE ison, it tells that the inverter is controlled by the terminals. In addition, if the indicator is flickering, it tells theinverter is controlled by serial communication.

3.3 Trial Operation3.3.1 Operation mode of inverter

This series of inverter have five operation modes: JOG operation, PID closed loop operation, Wobble frequencyoperation, PLC programmed operation and common operation.

JOG operation: If the inverter received a jog operation command (For example, press JOG key) at a stop

state, the inverter will jog running at the jog frequency reference set by function code P2.00~P2.02 PID closed loop operation: If PID close loop operation is selected by P0.03 (set the value to 11) , the inverter

will chose PID closed loop operation mode. In other word, it will come into PID adjustment as the PID feedand PID feedback. (See parameter group P7)

Wobble frequency operation: If Wobble frequency operation mode is active (set value of parameter code

LEDdisplay

Keyoperation

LEDdisplay

Keyoperation

While pressing theShift key and JOGkey at the sametime continuouslyfor 5s, functiongroup P1 will bedisplayed

Enter editingmode, displaythe first-levelmenu

Stop

para

met

erdi

spla

yst

ate Confirm

function codeand enter thesecond-levelmenu

JOG key actsas UP key,press JOG keyfor four timesto enter P0.04

Press ENTERkey to enterdisplay ofparameterP0.04

Exiteditingmode

Exiteditingmode

Go backto thefirst-levelmenu

Save themodified valueand go back tosecond-levelmenu

Press the JOGkey for fourtimes to setparameter P0.04from 0 → 4

Sparex India


Chapter 3 Operation

41

P0.03 to 12) , the inverter will come into Wobble frequency operation. The Wobble frequency runningparameters can be modified in parameter group P6. By selecting a multi-function terminal and setting thevalue to 46, connecting the terminal to terminal “COM”, Wobble frequency operation state can be reset (Fordetails please see Chapter IV Function of P3)

PLC program timing run: PLC function selection is active (P0.03 = 10), the inverter will select PLC operatingmode, and the inverter will run according to the preset operating mode (see Description of Group P5 functioncode). PLC program running can be paused through the function of multi-function terminal 43 (see ChapterIV Function of P3); PLC halt mode can be reset through the function of multi-function terminal 44 (Fordetails please see Chapter IV Function of P3);

Normal operation: It is also known as simple open-loop operation mode, including 9 modes, which arekeypad digital setting, terminal AI1, terminals AI2, terminal AI3 (Reserved for 3004GB and below models),pulse input, serial communication, multi-stage speed and terminal UP/DOWN, slip compensation rate, etc.

3.3.2 Check points before running

To check the inverter and be familiar with the operation, test run can be carried out before running, and thefollowing points should be checked before running: the wiring of major loop is correct; terminal screws aretightened; wiring is correct; short circuit caused by cable breakage should be avoided; load state is correct.

3.3.3 Check points during running

Motor is functioning smoothly; the motor rotates in correct direction; the motor has no abnormal vibration;acceleration or deceleration operation is smooth; the keypad display is correct.Running state of this series of inverter switches as shown in Fig. 3-10:

Sparex India


Chapter 3 Operation

42

Operation mode ofinverter

JOG active

PID termianl active

Wobble frequencyrunning terminal

active

P L C t e r m i a n la c t i v e

PID running

Wobble frequencyrunning

PLC running

Termianlfunction:

FC frequencysetting active

Common running

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

END

YES

Running according toP0.01 selection

JOG running

YES

YES

YES

YES

Figure 3-10 Operation modes switching of inverter

Sparex India


Chapter 3 Operation

43

3.3.4 Operation of initial power on

Please follow technical requirements provided in this manual for wiring and connections. After correct wiring andchecking power supply, power on air switch of AC power on input side of the inverter to supply power to theinverter, the contactor operates normally. When nixie tube displays output frequency, the inverter has beeninitialized.If the keypad is not normally connected, CCF2 fault will display after 5seconds, and then the keypad should bereconnected. Operation of initial power on is shown in Fig. 3-11:

Sparex India


Chapter 3 Operation

44

w i r i n g i s r i g h t .

w i r i n g a s t h er e q u i r e m e n t s t a t e d

i n t h i s m a n u a l

P o w e r O N

s e e o u t p u t f r e q u e n c ym o n i t o r : 0 . 0 0 H z

P o w e r o n f a i l e d

D i s c o n n e c t t h e p o w e ri n p u t a i r s w i t c h .

C h e c k t h e r e a s o n

h e a r d t h e s o u n d o fc o n t a c t o r i n d r a f t ?

D i s p l a y f a u l tc o d e " C C F 2 " o r n o

d i s o l a y

Y E S

N O

Y E S

N O

Y E S

Y E S

S t a r t

N O

N O

P O W E R O N s u c s e s s f u l

t h e i n p u tv o l t a t e i s r i g h t

Fig. 3-11 Operation process of initially powering on the inverter

3.3.5 First test run operation

Please perform the first test run operation according to the following processes (no extension PG card for 3004GBand below models).

Sparex India


Chapter 3 Operation

45

开始

确认接线正确后上电

恢复出厂参数（设置PF.02=3）

按照电机铭牌设定基本频率P0.09、最大输出电压P0.16、电机参数P0.14、PA.01-PA.04（PA.15-PA.18）

按下JOG键点动运行

若电机旋转方向错误，修改P2.37、P2.45或断电并交换任意两相电机线、编码器AB线后再上电

电机参数整定：带负载时实施静止参数整定PA.29=1；无负载时实施旋转整定PA.29=2

按下RUN键后开始自整定，整定完毕后自动停机

设置预备运行的设定频率P0.02

选择控制方式

P0.01=0或3，V/F控制，设定P9组V/F控制参数

P0.01=1或2，矢量控制

按RUN键运行

按STOP/RESET键停机

结束

若电机旋转方向错误,更改P2.37

P0.01=1闭环矢量(3004GB以下保留);

是否

使用内置PG

设置内置PG参数P2.44、P2.46、P3.05、P3.06(3004GB以下:P3.04、P3.05)、P2.49、P2.50;设置扩展PG参数P2.42、P2.46、P2.49、P2.50

监控运行电流和频率，如果出现异常则检查编码器每转脉冲数P2.42、更改编码器方向P2.43或

断电修改编码器的接线

监控运行电流和频率，如果出现异常则检查编码器每转脉冲数P2.44、更改编码器方向P2.45或

断电修改编码器的接线

若电机旋转方向错误，修改P2.37、P2.43或断电并交换任意两相电机线、编码器AB线后再上电

是否

Fig. 3-12 Operation process of inverter first test run operation

Start

Power on after correct wiring

Recovery factory parameters(set PF.02 = 3)

Set fundamental frequency P0.09, maximum output voltageP0.16, motor parameters P0.14, PA.01-PA.04 (PA.15-PA.18) in

accordance with the motor nameplate.

P0.01 = 0 or 3, V/F control,set V/F control parameters of

Group P9

Control manner select

P0.01 = 1 or 2, vector control

Tuning of motor parameters: perform static parameter tuning PA.29 =1 when there is load; perform rotation parameter tuning PA.29 = 2

when there is no load

Auto-tuning start after pressing Run key, and it willautomatically shut down after tuning

Press the JOG key for inchingrunning

P0.01 closed loop vector(reserve for models below

3004GB);

No Yes

NoUsing built-in PG

If the motor rotates inwrong direction,

change P2.37

Yes

Set extension parameters of PG, P2.42, P2.46, P2.49,P2.50

Monitor running current and frequency, if an abnormalityoccurs, check pulses per revolution P2.42 of the encoder,change encoder direction P2.43 or power off and modify

the wiring of the encoder

If the motor rotates in the wrong direction, modify P2.37,P2.43 or power off and exchange any two-phase motor cable

with encoder AB line, and then power on

Set the set frequency P0.02 ready to run

Press RUN key torun the inverter

Press the STOP/RESET keyto stop the inverter

End

If the motor rotates in the wrong direction, modify P2.37,P2.45 or power off and exchange any two-phase motor cable

with encoder AB line, and then power on

Monitor running current and frequency, if an abnormalityoccurs, check pulses per revolution P2.44 of the encoder,change encoder direction P2.45 or power off and modifythe wiring of the encoder

Setting built-in PG parameters P2.44, P2.46, P3.05,P3.06 (models below 3004GB: P3.04, P3.05), P2.49,

P2.50;

Sparex India


Chapter 3 Operation

46

3.4 Commissioning of keypadAssume that the inverter need to run forward at 30.00 Hz at first, then run reverse at the same frequency. Using thekeypad can take the following steps to realize the task:A typical operation pattern using the keypad:

P o wero n

Frequen cySet t in g

Fo rward Run

Fo rward

3 0 .0 0 Hz

Rev erse Run

a b c d

Rev erse

30.00Hz

e

S t o p

Figure 3-13 Operation sequence by keypad

Run and stop operation:

Figure 3-14 Flow chart of running and stop operation

Jog running operation: (Assume that the current run command mode is keypad and the inverter is at stop state)

0.00 0.50 5.00 0.00

outputfrequencymonitordisplay

depressjog keyand keep

on

Displayof LED

Operationof key

stopReleasethe key

JOGThe inverter goes intorunning state and theoutput frequecy goes upgradually to the jogging

setting frequency

JOGOutput frequency

will drop graduallyuntill the inverter

is stop

Figure 3-15 Example of Jog running

3.5 Operation of Control Circuit TerminalAssume that the inverter needs to run forward at 30.00 Hz at first, and then stop by terminal, using the keypad cantake the following steps to realize the task:

Sparex India


Chapter 3 Operation

47

Sequence of terminal operation:

Poweron

Frequencysetting

Running

Forward

30.00Hz

Stop

a b c d

Figure 3-16 Sequence of terminal operationOperation steps:

Figure 3-17 Flow chart of running and stop operation by terminal

Sparex India


Chapter 4 Parameter Index

48


Notes:“○”means that the parameters can be changed during inverter running and stop state;“×”means that the parameters cannot be changed during running;“*” means that the actually measured value or fixed parameters cannot be changed;“-” means that the parameters can be only set by the manufacturer and cannot be changed by the user.

P0: Basic functionFunction code Parameter LCD display Setting range Factory

setting Mod.MODBUSaddress

P0.00 Menu displaymode

Menu displaymode

0: Standard menu1: Check mode menu 0 ○ 0100

P0.01 Control mode Control mode

0: V/F control1: Closed-loop vector control2: Open-loop vector control3: V/F separation control(Closed loop vector controlmode is only active forALPHA6000V series inverters)

2 × 0101

P0.02 Frequency digitalsetting

Frequency digitalsetting 0-maximum frequency 0.00Hz ○ 0102

P0.03 Frequencysetting source 1

Frequencysetting source 1

0: NULL1: Frequency digital setting,

digital knob adjustment2: Terminal AI13: Terminal AI24: Terminal AI3 (reserve for

3004GB and belowmodels)

5: Pulse input6: Communication setting7: Line speed (reserve)8: Multi-stage speed9: Terminal UP / DOWN

10: Program timing run (PLC)11: PID12: Wobble frequency run

(reserve)When the frequency source is 0~ 7, if multi-stage speedterminals are effective, operateaccording to the operationprocess of "multi-stage speed"

1 × 0103

P0.04 Frequencysetting source 2

Frequencysetting source 2

0-8 (consistent with P0.03)9: Torque difference

compensation dosageThis frequency source has nomulti-stage speed terminalpriority mechanism

0 × 0104

Sparex India



49

Function code Parameter LCD display Setting range Factory


P0.05Frequencysettingcombination 1

Frequencysettingcombination 1

0: Frequency setting source 11: Frequency setting source 22: MIN (frequency setting

source 1, frequency settingsource 2)

3: MAX (frequency settingsource 1, frequency settingsource 2)

4: Frequency setting source 1 +frequency setting source 2

5: Frequency setting source 1 -frequency setting source 2

6: Frequency setting source1×frequency setting source2

7: Frequency setting source1÷frequency setting source2

8: |Frequency setting source1-frequency setting source2|

9: Frequency setting source 2 ×(maximum output frequency+ frequency setting source1) ÷ maximum outputfrequency

0 × 0105

P0.06Frequencysettingcombination 2

Frequencysettingcombination 2

0~9, ditto.It is enabled after defining FCterminal and the terminal isenabled

0 × 0106

P0.07Setting of runcommand setmode

Run commandset mode

0: Keypad control1: Terminal control 1 (STOP

key is inactive)2: Terminal control 2 (STOP

key is enabled)3: Serial communication 1

(STOP key is inactive)4: Serial communication 2

(STOP key is enabled)5: Terminal control 3 (STOP

and JOG keys are inactive)

0 ○ 0107

P0.08 Keypad directionsetting

Keypad directionsetting

0: Positive rotation 1: Reverserotation 0 ○ 0108

P0.09 Fundamentalfrequency

Fundamentalfrequency

3004GB and below:0.10~650.0Hz

35R5GB and above:0.10~400.0Hz

50.00Hz × 0109

Sparex India



50

Function code Parameter LCD display Setting range Factory


P0.10 Maximum outputfrequency

Maximumfrequency

3004GB and below:MAX [50.00Hz, upper limitfrequency, set frequency,multi-stage frequency, jumpingfrequency] ~ 650.0Hz35R5GB and above:MAX [50.00Hz, upper limitfrequency, set frequency,multi-stage frequency, jumpingfrequency] ~ 400.0Hz

50.00Hz × 010A

P0.11 Upper limitfrequency source

Upper limitfrequency source

0: Digital setting1: Terminal AI12: Terminal AI23: Terminal AI3 (reserve for

3004GB and below models)4: Pulse input5: Communication setting

0 × 010B

P0.12 Upper limitfrequency

Upper limitfrequency

MAX [lower limit frequency,jog frequency, UP/DN givenamplitude, sleep threshold] ~maximum frequency

50.00Hz ○ 010C

P0.13 Offset of upperlimit frequency

Offset of upperlimit frequency 0.00Hz~upper limit frequency 0.00Hz ○ 010D

P0.14 Rated voltage ofmotor

Rated voltage ofmotor 60~480V Rated

voltage * 010E

P0.15 Lower frequencylimit

Lower frequencylimit 0.00Hz~upper limit frequency 0.00Hz ○ 010F

P0.16 Maximum outputvoltage

Maximum outputvoltage 60~480V Rated

voltage × 0110

P0.17 Knob adjustingrate

Knob adjustingrate

0: Digital knob integralregulation(1~250)×(0.01Hz/1rpm)Knob adjusting rate

50 × 0111

P0.18 Accelerationtime 1

Accelerationtime 1

Power ≤ 132kW0.1~3600s

Power ≥ 160kW1.0~3600s

22kWandbelow:

6.0sOthers:

20.0s

○ 0112

P0.19 Decelerationtime 1

Decelerationtime 1

Power ≤ 132kW0.1~3600s

Power ≥ 160kW1.0~3600s

22kWandbelow:

6.0sOthers:

20.0s

○ 0113

Sparex India



51

P1: Start-stop controlFunction

code Parameter LCD display Setting range Factory setting Mod. MODBUSaddress

P1.00 Starting mode Starting mode

0: Start from the startfrequency

1: First brake (excitation),and then start at the startfrequency

2: Rotating speedtracking (must be

connected to PG orrotating speed trackingboard, 3004GB and belowmodels do not supportrotating speed trackingboard)

Note: The startup procedureincludes initial power-on,power restoration afterinstantaneous stop, externalfault reset, and all startupprocedure after free stopping

0 ○ 0200

P1.01 Startingfrequency

Startingfrequency 0.10~60.00Hz 0.50Hz ○ 0201

P1.02Startingfrequency holdtime

Start hold time 0.0~10.0s 0.0s ○ 0202

P1.03 Start DCbraking current

Start brakingcurrent

Depend on model0-100.0% of rated current ofthe motor.It is active only in V/Fcontrol mode, the upper limitis 80% of the nominal currentof inverter or smaller oneamong the nominal current ofthe motor; in vector controlmode, the current isdetermined by P8.00pre-excitation currentcompensation factor; whenthe set value is less than100%, perform it at 100%

0.0% ○ 0203

P1.04 Start DCbraking time

Start brakingtime 0.0~30.0s 0.1s ○ 0204

P1.05 Start presetfrequency

Start presetfrequency 0.00-maximum frequency 0.00Hz × 0205

P1.06Presetfrequency holdtime

Presetfrequency holdtime

0.0~3600.0s 0.0s × 0206

P1.07

Accelerationanddecelerationmode

Accelerationanddecelerationmode

0: Linear 1: S curve2: (Reserve) 3: (Reserve) 0 ○ 0207

P1.08 S curve starttime

S curve startsegment

10.0-50.0 % (acceleration anddeceleration time )P1.08+P1.09≤90%

20.0% ○ 0208

Sparex India



52

Functioncode Parameter LCD display Setting range Factory setting Mod. MODBUS

address

P1.09S curveascendingsegment time

S curveascendingsegment

10.0-80.0 % (acceleration anddeceleration time)P1.08+P1.09≤90%

60.0% ○ 0209

P1.10 Stop mode Stop mode0: Deceleration stop1: Free stop2: Deceleration + DC braking

0 × 020A

P1.11stoppingDCbrakingfrequency

Stopping brakefrequency

0.00-MIN(50.00Hz, upperlimit frequency ) 2.00Hz ○ 020B

P1.12

stoppingWaiting time ofDC braking atstop

stoppingWaiting time ofDC braking atstop

0.00~10.00s 0.00s ○ 020C

P1.13

Set source ofstoppingDCbraking currentat stop

DCbrakingStopping currentsource at stop

0: Digital setting1: Terminal AI12: Terminal AI23: Terminal AI3 (reserve for

3004GB and belowmodels)

4: Pulse input5: Communication settingRated current of the motor is

100% current

0 ○ 020D

P1.14stoppingDCbraking currentat stop

DCbrakingStopping current atstop

Depend on model0.0~100.0%Rated current of the motor is100% current

0.0% ○ 020E

P1.15stoppingDCbraking time atstop

DC brakingStoppingtimeat stop

0.0~30.0s 0.0s ○ 020F

P1.16 Stop holdfrequency

Stop holdfrequency 0.00-maximum frequency 0.00Hz × 0210

P1.17 Stop HoldTime

Stop HoldTime 0.0~3600.0s 0.0s × 0211

P1.18 Brakingselection

Brakingselection

0: Do not use brake1: Use dynamic braking2: Use magnetic flux braking3: Use dynamic and magneticflux braking

3 × 0212

P1.19 Dynamicbraking usage

Dynamicbraking usage

30.0%~100.0%Note: It is active for 3015GBand below built-in models ofthis series; automatically adddynamic braking indeceleration

100.0% × 0213

P1.20 Instantaneousstop handling

Instantaneousstop handling

0: It will be fault Uu1 in caseof instantaneous stop1: Give an alarm Uu within

instantaneous stop time,and give fault Uu1afterwards

2: It will give an alarm Uu incase of instantaneous stop

0 × 0214

P1.21 Instantaneousstop time

Instantaneousstop time 0.5~10.0s Depend on

model × 0215

Sparex India



53

Functioncode Parameter LCD display Setting range Factory setting Mod. MODBUS

address

P1.22

Operationselection afterinstantaneousstop alarm

Instantaneouspower failureoperationselection

0: Failure to actuate1: Slowdown running 0 ○ 0216

P1.23

Rate ofdecelerationduringinstantaneousstopdecelerationrunning

Decelerationrate ofInstantaneousstop

0.00Hz / s ~ maximumfrequency / s

10.00Hz / s ○ 0217

Sparex India



54

P2: Auxiliary runFunctioncode Parameter name LCD display Setting range Factory

setting Mod. MODBUS address

P2.00 Jog frequency Jog frequency 0.10Hz~upper limitfrequency 5.00Hz ○ 0300

P2.01 Jog accelerationtime

Jogaccelerationtime

Power ≤ 132kW0.1~3600s

Power ≥ 160kW1.0~3600s

22kW andbelow:6.0sOthers:20.0s

○ 0301

P2.02 Jog decelerationtime

Jogdecelerationtime

Power ≤ 132kW0.0~3600s

Power ≥ 160kW0, 1.0~3600s

Note: If the decelerationtime is 0, stop in themode of free stopping atstop in inching running

22kW andbelow:6.0sOthers:20.0s

○ 0302

P2.03

Time of switchingbetween positiveand negativerotation

Time ofswitchingbetweenpositive andnegativerotation

0.0~3600.0s 0.0s ○ 0303

P2.04Lower limitfrequency handlingmode

Lower limitmode

0: Running at lowerlimit frequency

1: Running at 0frequency

2: Stopping3: Reserve

0 × 0304

P2.05 Frequencydeviation setting

Frequencydeviation 0.00~2.50Hz 0.10Hz ○ 0305

P2.06Carrier frequencyadjustmentselection

Carrierfrequencyadjustmentselection

0: No automaticadjustment

1: Depending on theload,The inverterautomatically adjustthe temperature

It is the upper limit ofcarrier frequency invector control mode orwhen there is noautomatic adjustment

1 ○ 0306

P2.07 Upper limit ofcarrier frequency

Upper limit ofcarrierfrequency

Depend on model Depend onmodel × 0307

P2.08 Lower limit ofcarrier frequency

Lower limit ofcarrierfrequency

1.0~P2.07 1.0 kHz × 0308

P2.09 Hopping frequency1

Hoppingfrequency 1

0.00-maximumfrequency 0.00Hz × 0309


Hoppingfrequency 2

0.00-maximumfrequency 0.00Hz × 030A


Hoppingfrequency 3

0.00-maximumfrequency 0.00Hz × 030B

Sparex India



55

Functioncode Parameter name LCD display Setting range Factory


P2.12 Hopping frequencyamplitude

Hoppingfrequencyamplitude

0.00~15.00Hz 0.00Hz × 030C

P2.13 Multi-stagefrequency 1

Multi-stagefrequency 1

0.00-maximumfrequency

5.00 Hz

○

030D


Multi-stagefrequency 2 8.00 Hz 030E


Multi-stagefrequency 3 10.00 Hz 030F


Multi-stagefrequency 4 15.00 Hz 0310




















Multi-stagefrequency 14 48.00 Hz 031A


Multi-stagefrequency 15 50.00 Hz 031B

P2.28 Acceleration time 2 Accelerationtime 2

Power ≤ 132kW0.1~3600s

Power ≥ 160kW1.0~3600s

22kW andbelow:

6.0sOthers:

20.0s

○

031C

P2.29 Deceleration time 2 Decelerationtime 2 031D

P2.30 Acceleration time 3 Accelerationtime 3 031E

P2.31 Deceleration time 3 Decelerationtime 3 031F

P2.32 Acceleration time 4 Accelerationtime 4 0320

P2.33 Deceleration time 4 Decelerationtime 4 0321

P2.34Deceleration timeduring abnormalstopping

Decelerationtime duringabnormalstopping

Power ≤ 132kW0.1~3600s

Power ≥ 160kW1.0~3600s

22kW andbelow:3.0sOthers:

10.0s

○ 0322

P2.35Multiplying factorof acceleration andslowdown time

Multiplyingfactor ofaccelerationand slowdowntime

0: 1 time1:10 times2:0.1 times

0 × 0323

Sparex India



56

Functioncode Parameter name LCD display Setting range Factory


P2.36 Cooling fan control Fan control0: Automatic mode1: Running after power

on0 × 0324

P2.37 Wiring direction ofmotor

Wiringdirection ofmotor

0: Positive sequence1: Inverted sequence 0 × 0325

P2.38 Anti-reverseselection

Anti-reverseselection

0: Reverse rotation isactivated1: Reverse rotation isdisabled

0 × 0326

P2.39 Model of expandedIO card Expanded IO card

0: No1: YesReserve for 3004GB and

below models

0 × 0327

P2.40 Model of expandedPG card Expanded PG card

0: No1: YesReserve for 3004GB and

below models

0 × 0328

P2.41Extended PG outputfrequency dividingratio

Extended PGfrequencydividing ratio

1~128Reserve for 3004GBand below models

1 × 0329

P2.42 Extended PG pulsesper revolution

Extended PGpulses

1~9999Reserve for 3004GBand below models

1000 × 032A

P2.43 Extended PGdirection setting

Extended PGdirection

0: Phase A advancesduring positive rotation1: Phase B advancesduring positive rotationReserve for 3004GBand below models

0 × 032B

P2.44 Built-in PG pulsesper revolution

Built-in PGpulses 1~9999 1000 × 032C

P2.45 Built-in PGdirection setting

Built-in PGdirection

0: Phase A advancesduring positive rotation1: Phase B advancesduring positive rotation

0 × 032D

P2.46Selection of use ofspeed measurement

PG

Selection ofuse of PG

0: Use built-in PG1: Use expanded PG 0 × 032E

P2.47PG disconnectiondetection time(Reserve)

PGdisconnectiondetection time

0.0~10.0s 2.0 s × 032F

P2.48

Operation selectionin the event of PGdisconnection(Reserve)

PGdisconnectionoperation

0: Deceleration stopping1: Free stopping2: Abnormal stopping3: Continue to run

1 × 0330

P2.49 Number of PGreduction teeth 1

Number of PGreduction teeth1

1~1000 1 × 0331

P2.50 Number of PGreduction teeth 2

Number of PGreduction teeth2

1~1000 1 × 0332

Sparex India



57

P3: Switching value I / O terminal controlThis page is only for 3004GB and below models

Functioncode Parameter LCD display Setting range Factory

setting ModifyMODBUS

address

P3.00 Mode of terminalaction

Mode ofterminal action

0: Closing is active1: Open is active (normally

open / normally closed isunconstrained by this)

0 × 0400

P3.01 X1 terminalfunction

X1 terminalfunction

0: NULL not defined1: FWD Forward running2: REV Reverse running3: RUN4: F / R rotation direction5: HLD self-holding6: RST reset7: FC set frequency selection8: FJOG Forward jog9: RJOG Reverse jog

10: UP Go up11: DOWN Go down12: UP / DOWN reset13: FRE Free stopping14: Forced stopping (based on

deceleration time ofabnormal stopping)

15: Stopping process plus DCbraking

16: Acceleration anddeceleration prohibition17: Inverter run prohibition18: S1 multi-stage speed 119: S2 multi-stage speed 220: S3 multi-stage speed 321: S4 multi-stage speed 422: S5 multi-stage speed 523: S6 multi-stage speed 624: S7 multi-stage speed 725: Command to switch toterminal control 226: SS1 multi-stage speed27: SS2 multi-stage speed28: SS3 multi-stage speed29: SS4 multi-stage speed30: T1 acceleration anddeceleration time 131: T2 acceleration anddeceleration time 232: T3 acceleration anddeceleration time 333: T4 acceleration and

deceleration time 434: TT1 acceleration and

deceleration time35: TT2 acceleration and

deceleration time36: Forced stopping normally

closed37: EH0 external fault

1 × 0401

Sparex India



58

This page is only for 3004GB and below modelsFunction

code Parameter LCD display Setting range Factorysetting Modify

MODBUSaddress

normally open38: EH1 external fault

normally closed39: EI0 external interrupt

normally open40: EI1 external interrupt

normally closed41: Stopping state plus DC

braking(Continued on next page)


X2 terminalfunction

(Contd.)42: PLC program input43: PLC program run pause44: PLC stopping reset45: Wobble frequency input46: Wobble frequency state

reset47: PID input48: Switch between speed

mode and torquemode

49: Timing driven input50: Counter trigger signal

input51: Counter reset52: Actual length reset53: Timing unit selection54-74: Reserve75: Anti-stall action command

(reserve)76: Zero servo command

(reserve)77: PID output is forced to 078: PID integral time reset79: Command to switch to

keypad control

2 × 0402


X3 terminalfunction

0~79: ditto.80: PULSE Pulse input 37 × 0403


X4 terminalfunction

0~79: ditto.81: Single-phase tachometer

pulse or biphasetachometer pulse phase Apulse input

0 × 0404


X5 terminalfunction


pulse or two-phasetachometer pulse phase Apulse input (input of X4is active when both X4and X5 are 81)

82: Biphase speedmeasurement Phase Bpulse input phase

0 × 0405

P3.06 Reserve Reserve - - * 0406P3.07 Reserve Reserve - - * 0407

Sparex India



59



MODBUSaddress

P3.08 Reserve Reserve - - * 0408P3.09 Reserve Reserve - - * 0409P3.10 Reserve Reserve - - * 040AP3.11 Reserve Reserve - - * 040BP3.12 Reserve Reserve - - * 040C

P3.13 X terminal filtertime

X terminal filtertime 0.002s~1.000s 0.010s ○ 040D

P3.14 Reserve Reserve - - * 040E

P3.15 Operation modesetting

Operation modesetting

0: Two-wire operation mode 11: Two-wire operation mode 22: Three-wire operation mode

1 - self hold function(attach any one of X1 ~X5 terminals)

3: Three-wire operation mode2 - self hold function(attach any one of X1 ~X5 terminals)

0 × 040F

P3.16Terminal UP /DOWNSpeed

UP / DOWNspeed 0.01~99.99Hz/s 1.00

Hz/s ○ 0410

P3.17 Amplitude of UP /DOWN set point

Amplitude of UP/ DOWN setpoint

0.00~upper limit frequency 10.00Hz × 0411

P3.18Digital frequencyUP / DOWNstorage options

UP / DOWNstorage options

0: UP / DOWN set point isreset to 0 after receivingSTOP

1: UP / DOWN set point not isreset to 0 after receivingSTOP, which will not saveafter power off

2: UP / DOWN set point not isreset to 0 after receivingSTOP, which will saveafter power off; whenP0.03 is set to 1, P0.02adjusts power failuresaving online.

2 × 0412

P3.19 D0 terminalfunction

D0 terminalfunction

0: NULL not defined1: RUN2: FAR frequency reaching3: FDT frequency detection4: FDTH upper limit

frequency reaching5: FDTL lower limit

frequency reaching6: upper and lower limits of

wobble frequency7: Inverter is in zero speed

operation8: Simple PLC stage

operation completionindication

0 × 0413

Sparex India



60



MODBUSaddress

9: PLC cycle completionindication

10: Completion of readinessfor operation of inverter(RDY)

11: Free stopping12: Auto restart13: Timing reaching14: Counting reaching output15: Set running time reaching16: Torque reaching detection17: CL current-limit action18: Overvoltage stall19: Inverter failure20: External fault stopping

(EXT)21: Uu1 undervoltage

stopping22: CE communication alarm23: Overload detection signal

(OLP)24: Abnormality of analog

signal 125: Abnormality of analog

signal 226: Reserve27: Reserve28: Cut-to-length reaching,level signal29: Sleeping30: Zero speed31: Zero servo state (reserve)32: Reverse control signal(reserve)33: Actual direction ofrotation34: Reserve35: Underload detection signal

(ULP)P3.20 Reserve Reserve - - * 0414P3.21 Reserve Reserve - - * 0415P3.22 Reserve Reserve - - * 0416P3.23 Reserve Reserve - - * 0417

P3.24

Relay 1(TA/TB/TC)Output functionselection

Relay output 0 to 35: the same with P3.19 19 × 0418

P3.25Cut-to-lengthreaching terminaloutput hold time

Cut-to-lengthoutput hold 0.0~3.0s 1.0s × 0419

Sparex India



61

This page is only for 35R5GB and above models

Functioncode

Parameter LCD display Setting rangeFactorysetting

Mod.

MODBUSaddress

P3.00 Mode of terminalaction

Mode ofterminal action

0: Closing is active1: Open is active (normally

open / normally closed isunconstrained by this)

0 × 0400


X1 terminalfunction

0: NULL not defined1: FWD Forward running2: REV Reverse running3: RUN4: F / R rotation direction5: HLD self-holding6: RST reset7: FC set frequency selection8: FJOG Forward jog9: RJOG Reverse jog

10: UP Go up11: DOWN Go down12: UP / DOWN reset13: FRE Free stopping14: Forced stopping (based on

deceleration time ofabnormal stopping)

15: Stopping process plus DCbraking

16: Acceleration anddeceleration prohibition

17: Inverter run prohibition18: S1 multi-stage speed 119: S2 multi-stage speed 220: S3 multi-stage speed 321: S4 multi-stage speed 422: S5 multi-stage speed 523: S6 multi-stage speed 624: S7 multi-stage speed 725: Command to switch to

terminal control 226: SS1 multi-stage speed27: SS2 multi-stage speed28: SS3 multi-stage speed29: SS4 multi-stage speed30: T1 acceleration and

deceleration time 131: T2 acceleration and



deceleration time 434: TT1 acceleration and

deceleration time35: TT2 acceleration and

deceleration time36: Forced stopping normally

closed

1 × 0401

Sparex India



62


Functioncode


Mod.

MODBUSaddress

37: EH0 external faultnormally open

38: EH1 external faultnormally closed

39: EI0 external interruptnormally open

40: EI1 external interruptnormally closed

41: Stopping state plus DCbraking

(Continued on next page)


X2 terminalfunction

(Contd.)42: PLC program input43: PLC program run pause44: PLC stopping reset45: Wobble frequency input46: Wobble frequency state

reset47: PID input48: Switch between speed

mode and torquemode

49: Timing driven input50: Counter trigger signal

input51: Counter reset52: Actual length reset53: Timing unit selection54-74: Reserve75: Anti-locked rotor

operation command(reserve)

76: Zero servo command(reserve)

77: PID output is forced to 078: PID integral time reset79: Command to switch tokeypad control

2 × 0402


X3 terminalfunction 37 × 0403


X4 terminalfunction

0~79: ditto.80: PULSE Pulse input 0 × 0404


X5 terminalfunction


pulse or biphasetachometer pulse phase Apulse input

0 × 0405


X6 terminalfunction


pulse or two-phasetachometer pulse phase Apulse input (input of X5is active when both X5and X6 are 81)

82: Biphase speed

0 × 0406

Sparex India



63


Functioncode


Mod.

MODBUSaddress

measurement Phase Bpulse input phase


X7 terminalfunction

0~79: ditto.

0 × 0407






X10 terminalfunction 0 × 040A

P3.11 Reserve Reserve - - * 040BP3.12 Reserve Reserve - - * 040C

P3.13 X terminal filtertime

X terminal filtertime 0.002s~1.000s 0.010s ○ 040D

P3.14 Reserve Reserve - - * 040E

P3.15 Operation modesetting

Operation modesetting

0: Two-wire operation mode 11: Two-wire operation mode 22: Three-wire operation mode

1 - self hold function(attach any one of X1 ~X10 terminals)

3: Three-wire operation mode2 - self hold function (attachany one of X1 ~ X10terminals)

0 × 040F

P3.16 Terminal UP /DOWN speed

UP / DOWNspeed 0.01~99.99Hz/s 1.00

Hz/s ○ 0410

P3.17 Amplitude of UP /DOWN set point

Amplitude of UP/ DOWN setpoint

0.00~upper limit frequency 10.00Hz × 0411

P3.18Digital frequencyUP / DOWNstorage options

UP / DOWNstorage options

0: UP / DOWN set point isreset to 0 after receivingSTOP

1: UP / DOWN set point not isreset to 0 after receivingSTOP, which will not saveafter power off

2: UP / DOWN set point not isreset to 0 after receivingSTOP, which will saveafter power off; whenP0.03 is set to 1, P0.02adjusts power failuresaving online.

2 × 0412

P3.19 D0 terminalfunction

D0 terminalfunction

0: NULL not defined1: RUN2: FAR frequency reaching3: FDT frequency detection4: FDTH upper limit

frequency reaching5: FDTL lower limit

frequency reaching

0 × 0413

P3.20 Y1 terminalfunction

Y1 terminalfunction 1 × 0414





Sparex India



64


Functioncode


Mod.

MODBUSaddress

6: upper and lower limits ofwobble frequency

7: Inverter is in zero speedoperation

8: Simple PLC stageoperation completionindication

9: PLC cycle completionindication

10: Completion of readinessfor operation of inverter(RDY)

11: Free stopping12: Auto restart13: Time reaching14: Counting reaching output15: Set running time reaching16: Torque reaching detection17: CL current-limit action18: Overvoltage stall19: Inverter failure20: External fault stopping

(EXT)21: Uu1 undervoltage

stopping22: CE communication alarm23: Overload detection signal

(OLP)24: Abnormality of analog

signal 125: Abnormality of analog

signal 226: STEP Steps of program

running(Valid for DO \ Y1 \ Y2 \Y3, 26 is required to set)

27: Fault type output(Valid for DO \ Y1 \ Y2,27 is required to set)

(Continued on next page)

P3.23 reserve reserve 0 × 0417

P3.24

Relay 1(TA / TB / TC)Output functionselection

Relay 1 output

(Contd.)28: Cut-to-length reaching,

level signal29: Sleeping30: Zero speed31: Zero servo state (reserve)32: Reverse control signal

(reserve)33: Actual direction of

rotationthirty-four: Abnormality of

analog signal 335: Underload detection signal

19 × 0418

P3.25

Relay 2(BRA/BRB/BRC)Output functionselection

Relay 2 output 0 × 0419

Sparex India



65


Functioncode


Mod.

MODBUSaddress

(ULP)

Sparex India



66

Function

code Parameter LCD display Setting rangeFactorysetting

Modify

MODBUS

address

P3.26Frequencyreaching FARdetection width

FAR width 0.00~10.00Hz 2.50Hz ○ 041A

P3.27 FDT level FDT level 0.00-maximumfrequency 50.00Hz ○ 041B

P3.28 FDT lag FDT lag 0.00~10.00Hz 1.00Hz ○ 041C

P3.29

Upper limitfrequencyreaching terminaloutput delay time

Upper limitfrequency outputdelay

0.0~100.0s 0.0s ○ 041D

P3.30

Lower limitfrequencyreaching terminaloutput delay time

Lower limitfrequency outputdelay

0.0~100.0s 0.0s ○ 041E

P3.31 Torque detectionset point

Torque detectionsetting 0.0~200.0% 100.0% ○ 041F

P3.32 Count valuereaching setting

Count valuereaching setting 0~9999 0 ○ 0420

P3.33 Timing reachingsetting

Timing reachingsetting 0.0~6553.0 0.0 ○ 0421

P3.34 Set running time Set running time 0~65530h 65530h × 0422

P3.35 Underloaddetection set point

Underload detectionsetting 0.0~200.0% 10.0% ○ 0423

P3.36Underloaddetection terminaloutput delay time

Underload terminaloutput delay 0.0~100.0s 5.0s ○ 0424

Sparex India



67

P4: Analog and pulse input and output terminalsFunctioncode Parameter LCD display Setting range Factory


P4.00 Analog nonlinearselection

Analognonlinearselection

0: No 1: AI12: AI2 3: Pulse 0 × 0500

P4.01 Input value of AI1minimum analog

AI1 minimumanalog 0.00~P4.03 0.00V ○ 0501

P4.02

Correspondingphysical quantity ofinput value of AI1minimum analog

Minimumcorrespondingphysical quantityof AI1

-100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○ 0502

P4.03 Input value of AI1maximum analog

AI1 maximumanalog P4.01~10.00V 10.00V ○ 0503

P4.04

Correspondingphysical quantity ofinput value of AI1maximum analog

Maximumcorrespondingphysical quantityof AI1

-100.0%~100.0% 100.0% ○ 0504

P4.05 AI1 input filter timeconstant

AI1 input filtertime 0.01~50.00s 0.05s ○ 0505


AI2 minimumanalog 0.00~P4.08 0.00V ○ 0506

P4.07



-100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○ 0507


AI2 maximumanalog P4.06~10.00V 10.00V ○ 0508

P4.09



-100.0%~100.0% 100.0% ○ 0509


AI2 input filtertime 0.01~50.00s 0.05s ○ 050A

P4.11 Minimum pulse inputvalue

Minimum pulseinput value 0.00~P4.13 0.00

kHz ○ 050B

P4.12

Correspondingphysical quantity ofinput value ofminimum pulsequantity

Correspondingphysical quantityof minimumpulse quantityinput

-100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○ 050C

P4.13Input value ofmaximum pulsequantity

Input value ofmaximum pulsequantity

P4.11~50.00kHz 50.00kHz ○ 050D

P4.14

Correspondingphysical quantity ofinput value ofmaximum pulsequantity

Correspondingphysical quantityof maximumpulse quantityinput

-100.0%~100.0% 100.0% ○ 050E

P4.15 Pulse input filter time Pulse input filtertime 0.01~50.00s 0.05s ○ 050F


AI3 minimumanalog

-10.00V~P4.18Reserve for 3004GBand below models

0.00V ○ 0510

Sparex India



68



P4.17



-100.0%~100.0%Reserve for 3004GBand below models

0.0% ○ 0511


AI3 maximumanalog

P4.16~10.00VReserve for 3004GBand below models

10.00V ○ 0512

P4.19



-100.0%~100.0%Reserve for 3004GBand below models

100.0% ○ 0513


AI3 input filtertime

0.01~50.00sReserve for 3004GBand below models

0.05s ○ 0514

P4.21 AO1 functiondefinition

AO1 terminaloutput

0: NULL1: Output current (0 to 2times of rated current ofthe inverter) 2: Outputvoltage (0 ~ maximumvoltage)3: PID setting (0 ~ 10V)4: PID feedback (0 ~10V)5: Calibration signal(5V)6: Output torque (0 ~ 2times of the rated torqueof the motor)7: Output power (0 ~ 2times of the rated powerof the inverter)8: Bus voltage (0 ~1000V)9: AI1(0~10V/4~20mA)10: AI2(0~10V/4~20mA)11: AI3 (0 ~ 10Vcorresponds to-10V ~10V)12: Output frequencybefore compensation (0~ maximum frequency)13: Output frequencyafter compensation (0 ~maximum frequency)14: Running speed (0 to2 times of the ratedspeed)

0 × 0515

P4.22

AO2 functiondefinition (reservefor 3004GB andbelow models)

AO2 terminaloutput 0 × 0516

P4.23

AO3 functiondefinition(Reserve for 3004GBand below models)

AO3 terminaloutput 0 × 0517

P4.24 DO output D0 output 0~ fourteen, ditto. 0 × 0518

P4.25 AO1 output rangeselection

AO1 outputrange selection

0: 0~10V/0~20mA1: 2~10V/4-20mA 0 ○ 0519


AO2 outputrange selection

0: 0~10V/0~20mA1: 2~10V/4-20mAReserve for 3004GBand below models

0 ○ 051A


AO3 outputrange selection 0 ○ 051B

Sparex India



69



P4.28 AO1 Gain AO1 Gain -10.00~10.00 1.00 ○ 051CP4.29 AO2 Gain AO2 Gain -10.00~10.00

Reserve for 3004GBand below models

1.00 ○ 051D

P4.30 AO3 Gain AO3 Gain 1.00 ○ 051E

P4.31 AO1 offset AO1 offset -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○ 051FP4.32 AO2 offset AO2 offset -100.0%~100.0%

Reserve for 3004GBand below models

0.0% ○ 0520

P4.33 AO3 offset AO3 offset 0.0% ○ 0521

P4.34 DO maximum outputfrequency

DO maximumoutput frequency

DO minimum outputfrequency ~50.00KHz

10.00KHz ○ 0522

P4.35 DO minimum outputfrequency

DO minimumoutput frequency

0,0.08 KHz ~ DOmaximum outputfrequency

0.00KHz ○ 0523

Sparex India



70

P5: PLC runFunctioncode

Parameter LCD display Setting range

Factorysetting

Mod.

MODBUSaddress

P5.00 Program run mode Program run mode

0: Single cycle 11: Single cycle 2 (keeping

the final value)2: Continuous cycle

2 × 0600

P5.01Selection of PLCinterrupt operationre-start mode

PLC interruptre-start options

0: Start running from thefirst stage

1: Continue to run at thestage frequency at themoment of interrupt

2: Continue to run at theoperation frequency atthe moment of interrupt

0 × 0601

P5.02

PLC state parametersaving options at themoment of powerfailure

PLC state savingoptions at themoment of powerfailure

0: Not save a: SaveProgram running recordswill be automaticallycleared when the parameteris set to 0

0 × 0602

P5.03 Selection of stagetime unit

Selection of stagetime unit 0: sec one: min 0 × 0603

P5.04 Program runningtiming T1

Program runningtime 1 0.1~3600 10.0 ○ 0604


Program runningtime 2

0.0~3600

10.0 ○ 0605


Program runningtime 3 10.0 ○ 0606








Program runningtime 7 10.0 ○ 060A


Program runningtime 8 10.0 ○ 060B


Program runningtime 9 10.0 ○ 060C


Program runningtime 10 10.0 ○ 060D


Program runningtime 11 10.0 ○ 060E


Program runningtime 12 10.0 ○ 060F







Sparex India



71

Functioncode

Parameter LCD display Setting range

Factorysetting

Mod.

MODBUSaddress

P5.19 Setting of programrunning on T1 stage

Program runningsetting 1

1 F/r ~ 4 F/r

1F ○ 0613


Program runningsetting 2 1F ○ 0614












Program runningsetting 8 1F ○ 061A


Program runningsetting 9 1F ○ 061B


Program runningsetting 10 1F ○ 061C


Program runningsetting 11 1F ○ 061D


Program runningsetting 12 1F ○ 061E


Program runningsetting 13 1F ○ 061F





P5.34 Clear programrunning record

Clear programrecord

0: Not clear 1: ClearAutomatically recover to 0after clearing

0 × 0622

P5.35Record of number ofstages of programrunning

Number of stages ofprogram running 0~15 0 * 0623

P5.36Time of programrunning through thestage

Run time 0.0~3600 0.0 * 0624

Sparex India



72

P6: Cut-to-length and textile wobble frequencyFuncti

oncode Parameter LCD display Setting range

Factorysetting

Modify

MODBUS

address

P6.00 Set length Set lengthMax (0.000,-P6.06) (fixed lengthstopping function is inactive) ~65.53 m

0.000 m ○ 0700

P6.01 Actual length Actuallength

0.000 ~ 65.53 m (save after powerfailure) 0.000 m * 0701

P6.02Lengthmultiplyingfactor

Lengthmultiplyingfactor

0.001~30.00 1.000 ○ 0702

P6.03Lengthcorrectionfactor

Lengthcorrection 0.001~1.000 1.000 ○ 0703

P6.04 Measurementperimeter

Measurement perimeter 0.10~100.0 cm 10.00 cm ○ 0704

P6.05 Decelerationpoint

Decelerationpoint 50~100 % 90 % × 0705

P6.06 Amount ofdeviation

Amount ofdeviation Max (-200.0, -P6.00) ~200.0 mm 0.0 mm × 0706

P6.07

Start modefor stoppingat wobblefrequency

Start atwobblefrequency

0: Start according to the statebefore stopping1: Re-start

0 × 0707

P6.08

Save afterpower failurein wobblefrequencystate

Wobblefrequencysave

0: Not save after power failure1: Save after power failure 0 × 0708

P6.09 Preset wobblefrequency

Presetwobblefrequency

35R5GB and above:0.00~400.0Hz3004GB and below: 0.00~650.0Hz

0.00Hz ○ 0709

P6.10

Waiting timeof presetwobblefrequency

Waiting timeof presetwobblefrequency

0.0~3600s 0.0s ○ 070A

P6.11 Amplitude ofoscillation

Amplitudeofoscillation

0.0-50.0% (relative to P0.02) 0.0% ○ 070B

P6.12 Stepfrequency

Stepfrequency 0.0-50.0% (relative to P6.11) 0.0% ○ 070C

P6.13 Step time Step time 5~50ms 5ms ○ 070D

P6.14Wobblefrequencycycle

Wobblefrequencycycle

0.1~999.9s 10.0s ○ 070E

P6.15 Swing ratio Swing ratio 0.1~10.0 1.0 ○ 070F

P6.16Stochasticswingselection

Stochasticswingselection

0: Invalid stochastic swing1: Valid stochastic swing 0 ○ 0710

P6.17Stochasticswing ratioMAX

Stochasticswing ratioMAX

0.1~10.0 10.0 ○ 0711

Sparex India



73

P6.18Stochasticswing ratioMIN

Stochasticswing ratioMIN

0.1~10.0 0.1 ○ 0712

Sparex India



74

P7: PID controlFunctioncode

Parametername LCD display Setting range Factory

setting

Modification

MODBUSaddress

P7.00 PID settingsource 1

PID settingsource 1

0: PID digital setting1: AI1 terminal2: AI2 terminal3: Terminal AI3 (reserve for

3004GB and below models)

4: Pulse input5: Serial communication

0 × 0800

P7.01 PID settingsource 2

PID settingsource 2 0~ 5: ditto. 0 × 0801

P7.02 Combination offixed variables

Combinationof fixedvariables

0: PID setting source 11: PID setting source 22: Min (PID setting source 1, PID

setting source 2)

3: Max (PID setting source 1, PIDsetting source 2)

4: PID setting source 1 + PIDsetting source 2

5: PID setting source 1 - PIDsetting source 2

6: PID setting source 1 x PIDsetting source 2

7: PID setting source 1 ÷ PIDsetting source 2

0 × 0802

P7.03 PID feedbacksource 1

PID feedbacksource 1

0: Built-in PG or single-phasespeed measurement input

1: AI1 terminal2: AI2 terminal3: Terminal AI3 (reserve for

3004GB and below models)


0 × 0803

P7.04 PID feedbacksource 2

PID feedbacksource 2

0: Extended PG card speedmeasurement input

1~ 5: ditto.0 × 0804

P7.05Combination offeedbackquantity

Combinationof feedbackquantity

0: PID feedback source 11: PID feedback source 22: MIN (PID feedback source 1,

PID feedback source 2)

3: MAX (PID feedback source 1,PID feedback source 2)

4: PID feedback source 1 + PIDfeedback source 2

5: PID feedback source 1-PIDfeedback source 2

0 × 0805

P7.06 Analog PIDdigital setting

Analog PIDdigital setting

-1000.0-1000.0, subject tolimitation of setting range 0.0 ○ 0806

Sparex India



75

Functioncode


setting

Modification

MODBUSaddress

P7.07 Analog PIDsetting range

Analog PIDsetting range 1.0~1000.0 100.0 ○ 0807

P7.08 Speed PIDdigital setting

SpeedPID

digital setting0~24000rpm 0rpm ○ 0808

P7.09 Proportionalgain 1 Scale factor 1 0.1~30.0 12.0 ○ 0809

P7.10 PID integraltime 1

Integral time1 0.00~100.0s 0.60s ○ 080A

P7.11 PID derivativetime 1

Derivativetime 1 0.00~1.00s 0.00s ○ 080B

P7.12 Switchingfrequency 1

Switchingfrequency 1 0.00 ~ switching frequency 2 5.00Hz ○ 080C

P7.13 Proportionalgain 2 Scale factor 2 0.1~30.0 6.0 ○ 080D

P7.14 PID integraltime 2

Integral time2 0.00~100.0s 1.00s ○ 080E

P7.15 PID derivativetime 2

Differentialtime 2 0.00~1.00s 0.00s ○ 080F

P7.16 Switchingfrequency 2

Switchingfrequency 2

Switching frequency 1 ~ maximumfrequency

20.00Hz ○ 0810

P7.17 Differentialobject selection

Differentialobjectselection

0: Feedback differentiation1: Derivation differentiation 0 × 0811

P7.18 PID integralamplitude limit

PID integralamplitudelimit

0.0%~100.0%Maximum output frequency is100%

20.0% ○ 0812

P7.19PIDdifferentiationamplitude limit

PIDdifferentiationamplitudelimit


5.0% ○ 0813

P7.20 PID outputamplitude limit

PID outputamplitudelimit


100.0% ○ 0814

P7.21 PID delay timeconstant

PID delaytime 0.00~25.00s 0.00s ○ 0815

P7.22 Error margin Error margin 0.0~999.9 0.0 ○ 0816

P7.23 PID regulationcharacteristics

PIDregulationcharacteristics

0: Direct action 1: Reaction 0 × 0817

P7.24 Integral controlselection

Integralcontrolselection

0: Stop integral control when thefrequency reaches the upper andlower limit

1: Continue integral control whenthe frequency reaches the upperand lower limit

0 × 0818

P7.25 Enablehibernation

Enablehibernation 0: Disable 1: Enable 0 × 0819

P7.26 Sleep delay Sleep delay 0~999s 120s ○ 081A

P7.27 Sleep threshold Sleepthreshold 0~upper limit frequency 20.00

Hz ○ 081B

P7.28 Wake-upthreshold

Wake-upthreshold 0.0~999.9 3.0 ○ 081C

Sparex India



76

P8: Vector control parametersFunctioncode

Parameter LCD display Setting range Factorysetting

Modification

MODBUSaddress

P8.00

Pre-excitationcurrentcompensationamount

Pre-excitationcurrentcompensation

0.0~500.0%100.0% corresponds to themotor no-load current; theresponse time is set in P1.04The upper limit is 80% of therated current of the inverter orthe smaller rated current of themotor

100.0% × 0900

P8.01Speed loopproportional gain1

Speed loopproportionalgain 1

0.1~30.0 10.0 ○ 0901

P8.02 Speed loopintegral time 1

Speed loopintegral time 1 0.001~10.000s 0.200s ○ 0902

P8.03Speed loopswitchingfrequency 1

Speed loopswitchingfrequency 1

0.00Hz ~ speed loop switchingfrequency 2 5.00Hz ○ 0903

P8.04Speed loopproportional gain2

Speed loopproportionalgain 2

0.1~30.0 10.0 ○ 0904

P8.05 Speed loopintegral time 2

Speed loopintegral time 2 0.001~10.000s 0.600s ○ 0905

P8.06Speed loopswitchingfrequency 2

Speed loopswitchingfrequency 2

Speed loop switching frequency1 ~ maximum frequency

10.00Hz ○ 0906

P8.07 Speed loop filtertime

Speed loopfilter time 0.000s~0.100s 0.030s ○ 0907

P8.08 Current loopproportional gain

Current loopproportionalgain

0.1~9.9 1.0 ○ 0908

P8.09 Current loopintegral time

Current loopintegral time 0.001~1.000s 0.100s ○ 0909

P8.10 Torque controlmode Torque mode

0: Run in speed control mode1: Run in torque control mode2: Run in moment motor mode

0 ○ 090A

P8.11 Driving torquesetting source

Driving torquesetting source

0: Digital setting1: AI12: AI23: AI3 (reserve for 3004GB and

below models)


0 × 090B

P8.12 Upper limit ofdrive torque

Upper limit ofdrive torque 0.0%~200.0% 160% ○ 090C

P8.13 Upper limit ofbraking torque

Upper limit ofbraking torque 0.0%~200.0% 160% ○ 090D

P8.14Instruction slipcompensationcoefficient

Instruction slipcompensationcoefficient

0.0%~200.0% 102.4% ○ 090E

P8.15 Torqueacceleration time

Torqueaccelerationtime

0.00~120.0s 0.50s ○ 090F

Sparex India



77

Functioncode

Parameter LCD display Setting range Factorysetting

Modification

MODBUSaddress

P8.16 Torquedeceleration time

Torquedecelerationtime

0.00~120.0s 0.50s ○ 0910

P8.17Estimated lowspeed slipcompensation

Estimated lowspeed slipcompensation

50.0%~200.0% 130.0% ○ 0911

P8.18Estimated highspeed slipcompensation

Estimated highspeed slipcompensation

50.0%~200.0% 117.0% ○ 0912

P8.19Zero servofunction isenabled (reserve)

Zero servofunction isenabled

0: Disable zero servo function1: Enable Zero servo function 0 ○ 0913

P8.20Zero servo startfrequency(reserve)

Zero servo startfrequency 0.00~10.00Hz 0.30Hz ○ 0914

P8.21Zero servo gain(reserve) Zero servo gain

(reserve) 1.00~99.99 1.00 × 0915

P8.22

Zero servotolerance(reserve)

Zero servotolerance(reserve)

0~16383 10 × 0916

P8.23 Zero speedtorque lifting

Zero speedtorque lifting 0.0~50.0% 0.0% ○ 0917

P8.24 Zero speedthreshold

Zero speedthreshold 0-20% (maximum frequency) 5% ○ 0918

P8.25 Braking torquesetting source

Braking torquesetting source

0: The same with the final drivetorque set point calculatedwith P8.11

1: AI12: AI23: AI3 (reserve for 3004GB and

below models)


0 × 0919

P8.26

High-speedtorquecompensationgain

High-speedtorquecompensationgain

40.0%~160.0% 100.0% ○ 091A

P8.27

High-speedtorquecompensationbasis

High-speedtorquecompensationbasis

0: Compensate according to theoperating frequency

1: Compensate according to theline speed (reserve)

0 ○ 091B

P8.28 Pre-excitationtime

Pre-excitationtime 0.05~3.00s 0.2s ○ 091C

Sparex India



78

P9: V / F control parameterFunctioncode

Parameter name LCD display

Setting range Factorysetting

Modification

MODBUSaddress

P9.00 V / F curvesetting

V / F curvesetting

0: Constant torquecharacteristic curve 0

1: Lower torquecharacteristic curve 1(2.0)



4: User sets V / F curve(determined by P9.01 ~

P9.06 function code)

0 × 0A00

P9.01 V/F frequencyF1

V/F frequency1

0.0~P9.03 10.00Hz × 0A01

P9.02 V/F voltage V1 V/F voltage 1 0.0~100.0% 20.0% × 0A02


V/F frequency2

P9.01~P9.05 25.00Hz × 0A03

P9.04 V/F voltage V2 V/F voltage 2 0.0~100.0% 50.0% × 0A04


V/F frequency3

P9.03~P0.09 40.00Hz × 0A05

P9.06 V/F voltage V3 V/F voltage 3 0~100.0% 80.0% × 0A06

P9.07 Torque lifting Torque lifting0.0: Automatic torquelifting0.1-30.0%: Manual lifting

0.0% ○ 0A07

P9.08Manual torquelifting cutoffpoint

Lifting cutoffpoint

0.00~50.00Hz 16.67Hz ○ 0A08

P9.09 Slip frequencycompensation

Slip frequencycompensation

0.0-250.0% (rated torque is100%)

0.0% ○ 0A09

P9.10Slipcompensationtime constant

Compensationtime constant

0.01~2.55s 0.20s ○ 0A0A

P9.11 Energy efficientcontrol selection

Energyefficientcontrolselection

0: Energy efficient controlis disabled1: Energy efficient controlis enabled

0 × 0A0B

P9.12 Energy efficientgain coefficient

Energyefficient gaincoefficient

0.00~655.3 Depend onmodel

× 0A0C

P9.13Energy efficientvoltage lowerlimit (50Hz)

Energyefficientvoltage lowerlimit

0~120% 50% × 0A0D

P9.14Energy efficientvoltage lowerlimit (5Hz)

Energyefficientvoltage lowerlimit

0~25% 12% × 0A0E

P9.15 Average powertime

Average powertime

(1~200)×(25ms) 5 × 0A0F

Sparex India



79

Functioncode

Parameter name LCD display

Setting range Factorysetting

Modification

MODBUSaddress

P9.16 AVR function AVR function

0: Failure to actuate1: Run all the time2: Not act only duringdeceleration

2 × 0A10

P9.17 Overmodulationaction

Overmodulation action

0: Invalid 1: Valid 0 × 0A11

P9.18Droop control(loaddistribution)

Droop control0.00~10.00Hz 0.00Hz ○ 0A12

P9.19 Output voltageoffset source

Output voltageoffset source

0: Digital setting1: Terminal AI12: Terminal AI23: Terminal AI3 (reserve

for 3004GB and belowmodels)

4: Pulse input5: Communication settingMaximum output voltage is

100%Valid only in V / F

separation mode

0 × 0A13

P9.20 Output voltageoffset

Output voltageoffset

0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○ 0A14

P9.21Oscillationsuppressioncoefficient

Oscillationsuppressioncoefficient

0~100 0 ○ 0A15

Sparex India



80

PA: motor parametersFunctioncode

Parameter name LCD display Setting range Factorysetting

Modification

MODBUSaddress

PA.00 Motor selection Motor selection 0: Use motor 11: Use motor 2 0 × 0B00

PA.01 Number of poles ofmotor 1

Number ofpoles 2~56 4 × 0B01

PA.02 Rated power of motor1 Rated power 0.4~999.9kW

Depend onmodel

× 0B02

PA.03 Rated speed of motor 1 Rated speed 0~24000r/min ○ 0B03

PA.04 Rated current of motor1 Rated current 0.1~999.9A × 0B04

PA.05 No-load current I0 ofmotor 1 No-load current 0.1~999.9A × 0B05

PA.06 Stator resistance R1 ofmotor 1

Statorresistance R1 0.001~65.000Ω ○ 0B06

PA.07Stator leakageinductance L1 ofmotor 1

Stator leakageinductance L1 0.1~2000.0mH ○ 0B07

PA.08 Rotor resistance R2 ofmotor 1

Rotorresistance R2 0.001~65.000Ω ○ 0B08

PA.09Mutual inductanceresistance Lm of motor1

Mutualinductanceresistance Lm

0.1~2000.0mH ○ 0B09

PA.10 Saturation coefficient1 of motor 1

Saturationcoefficient 1 0.0%~100.0% ○ 0B0A


Saturationcoefficient 2 0.0%~100.0% ○ 0B0B


Saturationcoefficient 3 0.0%~100.0% ○ 0B0C


Saturationcoefficient 4 0.0%~100.0% ○ 0C0D


Saturationcoefficient 5 0.0%~100.0% ○ 0B0E

PA.15 Number of poles ofmotor 2

Number ofpoles 2~56 4 × 0B0F

PA.16 Rated power of motor2 Rated power 0.4~999.9kW

Depend onmodel

× 0B10

PA.17 Rated speed of motor 2 Rated speed 0~24000r/min ○ 0B11

PA.18 Rated current of motor2 Rated current 0.1~999.9A × 0B12

PA.19 No-load current I0 ofmotor 2 No-load current 0.1~999.9A × 0B13

PA.20 Stator resistance R1 ofmotor 2

Statorresistance R1of

0.001~65.000Ω ○ 0B14

PA.21Stator leakageinductance L1 ofmotor 2

Stator leakageinductance L1 0.1~2000.0mH ○ 0B15

PA.22 Rotor resistance R2 ofmotor 2

Rotorresistance R2 0.001~65.000Ω ○ 0B16

PA.23Mutual inductanceresistance Lm of motor2

Mutualinductanceresistance Lm

0.1~2000.0mH ○ 0B17

Sparex India



81

Functioncode


Modification

MODBUSaddress


Saturationcoefficient 1 0.0%~100.0% ○ 0B18


Saturationcoefficient 2 0.0%~100.0% ○ 0B19


Saturationcoefficient 3 0.0%~100.0% ○ 0B1A


Saturationcoefficient 4 0.0%~100.0% ○ 0B1B


Saturationcoefficient 5 0.0%~100.0% ○ 0B1C

PA.29 Motor parametertuning

Motorparametertuning

0: No operation1: Static parametertuning2: Rotating parametertuning

0 × 0B1D

PA.30 Parameter tuningprocess information

Tuning processinformation - * 0B1E

Sparex India



82

Pb: MODBUS communicationFunctioncode


Modification

MODBUSaddress

Pb.00 Baud rateselection

Baud rateselection

0: 1200bps 1: 2400bps2: 4800bps 3: 9600 bps4: 19200bps 5: 38400bps

3 × 0C00

Pb.01 Local address Local address 0~31 1 × 0C01

Pb.02 Even-odd checkselection

Check bitselection

0: Even parity1: Odd parity2: No parity

0 × 0C02

Pb.03Communicationtimeoutdetection time

CommunicationtimeoutdetectionTime

0.0~100.0s0: No timeout detectionOther: Timeout detectiontime

0.0s ○ 0C03

Pb.04 Response delaytime Response delay 0~500ms 5ms × 0C04

Pb.05

Communicationtransmissionfrequencycommand unit

Frequencycommand unit

0: 0.01Hz1: 0.1Hz 0 × 0C05

Pb.06Communicationdata Eepromsave options

Communicationdata Eepromsave options

0: Not save Eeprom directly1: Save Eeprom directly 0 × 0C06

Pb.07 CCF6Troubleshooting

CCF6Troubleshooting

0: Resume without reportingfailure1: Reported failure and shutdown automatically

0 × 0C07

Pb.08 Reserve Reserve Reserve 0 - 0C08

PC: display controlFuncti

oncode Parameter name LCD display Setting range

Factory

setting

Modify

MODBUS

address

PC.00 LCD LanguageSelection

LanguageSelection 0: Chinese 1: English 0 ○ 0D00

PC.01

Outputfrequency (Hz)(Beforecompensation)

Outputfrequency (Hz)(Beforecompensation)

0: Not displayed 1: Displayed 1 ○ 0D01

PC.02Outputfrequency (Hz)(Actual)

Outputfrequency (Hz)(Actual)


PC.03 Output current(A)

Output current(A) 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed 1 ○ 0D03

PC.04 Set frequency(Hz flicker)

Set frequency(Hz flicker) 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed 1 ○ 0D04

PC.05 Operating speed(r/min)

Operating speed(R / min) 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed 1 ○ 0D05

Sparex India



83

Function

code Parameter name LCD display Setting range

Factory

setting

Modify

MODBUS

address

PC.06 Set speed(R / min blink)

Set speed(R / min blink) 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed 0 ○ 0D06

PC.07Running linespeed(m/s)

Running linespeed(m/s)


PC.08 Set line speed(m / s blink)

Set line speed(m / s blink) 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed 0 ○ 0D08

PC.09 Output power(kW)

Output power(kW) 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed 0 ○ 0D09

PC.10 Output torque(%)

Output torque(%) 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed 0 ○ 0D0A

PC.11 Output voltage(V)

Output voltage(V) 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed 1 ○ 0D0B

PC.12 Bus voltage (V) Bus voltage (V) 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed 0 ○ 0D0CPC.13 AI1 (V) AI1 (V) 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed 0 ○ 0D0DPC.14 AI2 (V) AI2 (V) 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed 0 ○ 0D0E

PC.15

3004GB andbelowReserve

Reserve - - *

0D0F35R5GB andabove:AI3 (V)

AI3 (V) 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed 0 ○

PC.16Analog PIDfeedback(%)

Analog PIDfeedback 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed 0 ○ 0D10

PC.17Analog PIDsetting(%, blink)

Analog PIDsetting 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed 0 ○ 0D11

PC.18 External countvalue

External countvalue 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed 0 ○ 0D12

PC.19 Terminal state(No unit) Terminal state 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed 0 ○ 0D13

PC.20 Actual length Actual length 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed 0 ○ 0D14

PC.21Power onindicationselection

Power onindication 1~20 1 ○ 0D15

PC.22 Speed displaycoefficient Speed coefficient

0.1~999.9%Mechanical speed = measuredspeed × PC.22 (PG)Mechanical speed = 120 ×operating frequency ÷ motorpoles × PC.22 (non-PG)Set speed = PID set speed ×PC.22 (PG)Set speed = 120 × setfrequency ÷ motor poles ×PC.22 (non-PG)Notes: Have no effect on actualspeed

100.0% ○ 0D16

Sparex India



84

Function

code Parameter name LCD display Setting range

Factory

setting

Modify

MODBUS

address

PC.23 Line speedcoefficient

Line speedcoefficient

0.1~999.9%Line speed = operatingfrequency × PC.23 (non-PG)Line speed = mechanical speed× PC.23 (PG)Set line speed = set frequency× PC.23 (non-PG)Set line speed = set speed ×PC.23 (PG)Notes: Have no effect on actualspeed

100.0% ○ 0D17

Sparex India



85

Pd: protection and fault parametersFunction

code Parameter name LCD display Setting range Setup Modification

MODBUS address

Pd.00Motor overloadprotection modeselection

Overloadprotectionselection

0: Failure to actuate1: Common motor (with

low speedcompensation)

2: Variable frequencymotor (without lowspeed compensation)

3: Sensor protection(immediate protectiononce more than thethreshold)

1 × 0E00

Pd.01Protectionthreshold ofmotor 1

Protectionthreshold ofmotor 1

0.0~10.0V 10.0V × 0E01

Pd.02Protection sensorinput channel ofmotor 1

Sensor channelof motor 1

0: Terminal AI11: Terminal AI22: Terminal AI33: Pulse input4: Communication setting

0 × 0E02

Pd.03Protectionthreshold ofmotor 2

Protectionthreshold ofmotor 2

0.0~10.0V 10.0V × 0E03

Pd.04Protection sensorinput channel ofmotor 2

Sensor channelof motor 2

0: Terminal AI11: Terminal AI22: Terminal AI33: Pulse input4: Communication setting

0 × 0E04

Pd.05

Electronicthermal relayElectricalprotection value

Electronicthermal relay 20~110% 100% ○ 0E05

Pd.06Overloadpre-alarmdetection level

Overloadpre-alarmdetection level

20.0~200.0% 160.0% × 0E06

Pd.07Overloadpre-alarmdetection time

Overloadpre-alarmdetection time

0.0~60.0s 60.0s × 0E07

Pd.08 Currentamplitude limit

Currentamplitude limit

0: Invalid1: Valid duringacceleration anddeceleration, and inactiveduring constant speed2: Valid during bothacceleration anddeceleration and constantspeed3: Lower operating speedduring overcurrent

1 ○ 0E08

Pd.09Currentamplitude limitlevel

Currentamplitude limitlevel

80~180% 160% ○ 0E09

Pd.10 Overvoltage stallselection

Overvoltage stallselection

0: Disable (it isrecommended tochoose when

1 × 0E0A

Sparex India



86

Functioncode Parameter name LCD display Setting range Setup Modif

icationMODBUS address

installing brakingresistor)

1: Allowed

Pd.11 Overvoltage stallpoint

Overvoltage stallpoint

3004GB and below: 110.0~ 150.0% of the busvoltage35R5GB and above:120.0 ~ 150.0% of thebus voltage

220Vmodels:120%380Vmodels:140%

× 0E0B

Pd.12Input defaultphase detectionreference

Input defaultphase detectionreference (100%corresponds to800V)

1~100% 100% × 0E0C

Pd.13Input defaultphase detectiontime

Input defaultphase detectiontime

2~255s 10s × 0E0D

Pd.14Output defaultphase detectionreference

Output defaultphase detectionreference (100%corresponds torated current ofthe motor)

0~100% 0% × 0E0E

Pd.15Output defaultphase detectiontime

Output defaultphase detectiontime

0.0~2.0s 0.2s × 0E0F

Pd.16Keypad keysUP/DNactivation

Keypad keysUP/DNactivation

0: Invalid1: Activation 0 × 0E10

Pd.17 AE1, AE2, AE3alarm selection

AE1, AE2, AE3alarm selection

0: Do not display warning1: Display warning 0 × 0E11

Pd.18

Number ofautomatic resettimes

Number ofautomatic resettimes

0-10, 0 indicates noautomatic resetOnly three failures haveautomatic reset function

0 × 0E12

Pd.19 Reset intervaltime

Reset intervaltime 2.0~20.0s 5.0s × 0E13

Pd.20

Confirm the timebeforedeceleration dueto overcurrent

Confirm the timebeforedeceleration dueto overcurrent

0~200ms 50ms × 0E14

Pd.21Run protectionwhile poweringon

Run protectionwhile poweringon

0: Not protect1: Protect 0 ○ 0E15

Pd.22

Run protectionafter switchingthe runcommand setmode

Command toswitch runprotection

0: Continue to run1: stop, received a new

run commandRe-run after thecommand

0 × 0E16

Pd.23Action selectionin case of stall(reserve)

Anti-stall actionselection

0: Do not executeanti-stall action sequence1: Execute anti-stallaction sequence

0 × 0E17

Pd.24 Stall actiontoggle condition

Stall actiontoggle condition

0: The output currentexceeds the togglelevel

2 × 0E18

Sparex India



87

Functioncode Parameter name LCD display Setting range Setup Modif

icationMODBUS address

1: The control terminal isclosed

2: Output current exceedsthe set point or controlterminal is closed

3: Timing cycle execution

Pd.25 Stall actiontoggle level

Stall actiontoggle level 100.0~300.0% 200.0% ○ 0E19

Pd.26 Stall actiontoggle period

Stall actiontoggle period 0.00h~200.0h 0.00h ○ 0E1A

Pd.27 Forward stepfrequency

Forward stepfrequency

0.00Hz~upper limitfrequency 0.00Hz ○ 0E1B

Pd.28 Forward stepduration

Forward stepduration 0.0s~1000s 0.0s ○ 0E1C

Pd.29 Reverse stepfrequency

Reverse stepfrequency

0.00Hz~upper limitfrequency 0.00Hz ○ 0E1D

Pd.30 Reverse stepduration

Reverse stepduration 0.0s~1000s 0.0s ○ 0E1E

Pd.31Forward andreverse stepinterval

Forward andreverse stepinterval

0.0s~1000s 0.0s ○ 0E1F

Pd.32Number ofrepetitions ofstep action

Number ofrepetitions ofstep action

0~100 0 ○ 0E20

Pd.33 Software currentlimit point

Software currentlimit point 0.0%~250.0% Depend on

models ○ 0E21

Pd.34 Enable hardwarecurrent limit

Enable hardwarecurrent limit 0: Disable; 1: Enable 1 ○ 0E22

Sparex India



88

PE: Run history recordFunction

codeParameter

name LCD display Setting range Factorysetting

Modification

MODBUS address

PE.00 Type oflatest fault

Types oflatest faults

0: NULL1: Uu1 bus undervoltage2: Uu2 control circuit

undervoltage3: Uu3 poor charging circuit4: OC1 acceleration overcurrent5: OC2 deceleration overcurrent6: OC3 constant speed

overcurrent7: Ou1 acceleration overvoltage8: Ou2 deceleration overvoltage9: Ou3 constant speed

overvoltage10: GF Ground11: OH1 radiator overheat12: OL1 motor overload13: OL2 inverter overload14: SC load short circuit15: EF0 external fault from an

serial communication16: EF1 external fault on terminals17: SP1 input phase loss or

unbalance18: SPO output phase loss or

unbalance19: CCF1 control loop fault 1. The

transmission between theinverter and the keypad stillcannot be established 5s afterpowering on

20: CCF2 control loop fault 2.After connecting the inverterand the keypad, thetransmission failure last formore than 2 seconds

21: CCF3 EEPROM failure22: CCF4 AD translation

exception23: CCF5 RAM failure24: CCF6 CPU is disturbed25: PCE Parameter name

replication error26: Reserve27: HE Hall current detection fault28: De Cut-to-length detection

fault29: Cue Feed off fault

NULL * 0F00

PE.01

Outputfrequencywhen thelatest faultoccurs

Outputfrequencywhen a faultoccurs

0~upper limit frequency 0.00Hz * 0F01

Sparex India



89

Functioncode


settingModification

MODBUS address

PE.02

Setfrequencywhen thelatest faultoccurs

Setfrequencywhen a faultoccurs

0~upper limit frequency 0.00Hz * 0F02

PE.03

Outputcurrentwhen thelatest faultoccurs

Outputcurrentwhen a faultoccurs

0 ~ 2 times of the rated current 0.0A * 0F03

PE.04

DC busbarvoltagewhen thelatest faultoccurs

Bus voltagewhen a faultoccurs

0~1000V 0V * 0F04

PE.05

Serviceconditionwhen thelatest faultoccurs

Serviceconditionwhen a faultoccurs

0: StP Stop 1: Acc Acceleration 2:dEc deceleration3: con Constant speed

StP * 0F05

PE.06 Fault history(the latest)

Faulthistory 1 The same with PE.00 NULL * 0F06

PE.07 Fault history2


PE.08 Fault history3


PE.09Accumulated runningtime

Runningtime 0~65530h 0h * 0F09

PE.10Cumulativepower-ontime

Power-ontime 0~65530h 0h * 0F0A

PE.11

Totalelectricityconsumption(MWh)

Cumulativeelectricityconsumption (MWh)

0~9999MWh 0MWh * 0F0B

PE.12

Totalelectricityconsumption(KWh)

Cumulativeelectricityconsumption (KWh)

0~999KWh 0KWh * 0F0C

Sparex India



90

PF: Parameter protection and product identification informationFunction

code Parameter name LCD display Setting range Factorysetting Modify

MODBUSaddress

PF.00 User password User password 0: No passwordOther: Password protection 0 ○ 1000

PF.01Parameterwriteprotection

Parameterprotectionselection

0: All parameters are allowed to berewritten

1: Except for setting frequency(P0.02), and the function code,the other function codes areprohibited to be rewritten

2: Except for this function code, allothers are prohibited to berewritten

0 ○ 1001

PF.02 ParameterInitialization

ParameterInitialization

0: No operation1: Clear the fault history2: Restore factory setting

(Except record \ password \motor parameters)

3: Restore factory setting(Except record \ password)

0 × 1002

PF.03 Parameter copy Parameter copy

0: No action1: Parameter download2: Parameter upload3: Without download of motorparametersNote: Only active for LCD keypad

0 × 1003

PF.04 Reserve Reserve - 0 × 1004PF.05 Product No. 1 Product No. 1 0~9999 * 1005PF.06 Product No. 2 Product No. 2 0~9999 * 1006PF.07 Product No. 3 Product No. 3 0~9999 * 1007PF.08 Product No. 4 Product No. 4 0~9999 * 1008

PF.09 Product serialnumber

Product serialnumber 0~9999 * 1009

PF.10 Softwareversion number

Softwareversion number 0.00~99.99 * 100A

PF.11Non-standardversion andserial number

Non-standardversion andserial number

0.000~9.999 * 100B

PF.12Softwareidentificationcode

Softwareidentificationcode

0~9999 * 100C

Sparex India


Chapter 5 Detailed Function Introductions

91


5.1 Basic Function (Group P0)

P0.00 Menu display mode Setting range: 0~1 [0]

0: Standard menu 1: Check mode menuNotes: Pressing “FWD/REV” will switch the direction, and change the value of this parameter P0.08. But the

changed direction only takes effect currently. Only by changing value of function code and pressing “ENTER” to save the value, keypad direction

setting will be saved permanently.Direction priority: Terminal set is the highest, second is set by communication, keypad is the lowest. If the high oneis invalid, the lower priority will take effect. When P0.00 is set to 1, enter the menu check mode. In this mode, youcan view and modify each modified function code by the knob adjustment. The remaining unmodified function codewill be shielded.

P0.01 Control mode Setting range: 0~3 [2]

0: V/F control 1: Close loop vector control2: Open loop vector control 3: V/F separation control

Notes: V / F control: When using one inverter to drive more than one motor, please select the control mode when

self-tuning of parameters of motors cannot be performed correctly or the parameters of motors cannot beobtained correctly through other means.

Closed-loop vector control: It is speed sensor closed-loop vector control mode, mainly used in places havestrict requirements for control performance, such as places required to realize high accuracy speed control,torque control, etc. When selecting the control mode, it is necessary to install pulse coder and other speedsensors, and relevant parameters of the encoder should be correctly set. The control mode is exclusive forALPHA6000V series inverters.

Open loop vector control: It is sensorless vector control mode, can be used in ordinary high-performancevariable speed drive places.

V/F separation control: The control mode can be used in some places where are required to control thefrequency and the voltage independently.

Tips:When selecting open loop or closed loop vector control mode control mode, if the motor is not default ordinaryquadrupole asynchronous motor, it is required to correctly set the nameplate parameters of the motor first, and carryout self-tuning of parameter of motor to obtain accurate parameters of motor. To obtain the best control performance,it is suggested to carry out nameplate parameter setting and self-tuning of motor parameters before the initialrunning; and to set the relevant parameters of vector control correctly, please see description of Group P8 vectorcontrol parameters for details.Note that in this control mode, usually, one inverter motor can only control one motor, and the power class of theinverter should not be too different from that of the motor, power class of the motor can be one class bigger orsmaller than that of the inverter, otherwise it will result in poor control performance or improper running.

P0.02 Reference frequency Setting range: 0 ~Maximum frequency [0.00Hz]

Notes: When the function code P0.03 or P0.04 = 1, the function is enabled when setting frequency digital setting

with a keypad. It defined the frequency set point of the inverter.

Sparex India



92

Tips:The changed value of P0.02 by keypad digital encoder will be active immediately. If press "ENTER" key, the valuewill be stored into the inverter’s internal EEPROM and will not be lost even power-off the inverter.When P0.03is set to 1: if P3.18 is set to2, the changed value of P0.02 by keypad digital encoder will be saved whenpower loss. Otherwise, the changed value will not be saved

P0.03 Frequency setting source 1 Setting range: 0~12 [1]

0: NULL 1: keypad digital setting, digital knob adjustment

2: Terminal AI1 3: Terminal AI2

4: Terminal AI3 (reserve for 3004GB andbelow models) 5: Pulse input

6: Serial communication 7: Line speed(reserve)

8: Multi-step Speed 9: Terminal UP/DOWN

10: Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) 11: PID close-loop

12: Wobble frequency operating

P0.04 Frequency setting source 2 Setting range:: 0~9 [0]

0: NULL 1: keypad digital setting, digital knob adjustment


4: Terminal AI3 (reserve for 3004GB andbelow models) 5: Pulse input

6: Serial communication 7: Line speed(reserve)

8: Multi-step Speed 9: torque slip compensation dosage

Notes: If P0.03 is set to 1: During keypad digital setting, in monitoring state, the set frequency can be modified

through digital knob on the keypad; when the set frequency is related to P0.02, in monitoring state, value ofP0.02 can be adjusted through the keypad knob.

Terminal AI1, AI2 and AI3 are analog input signals. When using terminal AI1, AI2, the output frequency canbe adjusted through 0~10V voltage signal or 0~20mA current signal; when using terminal AI3, the outputfrequency can be adjusted through - 10V~ 10V voltage signal or - 20mA~20mA current signal; negativevalue represents reversing operation.

Signal type is selected through the relevant toggle switch on the control circuit board, and please refer toSection 2.5 Wiring Instruction for Control Loop.

Corresponding relationship between sizes and frequencies of terminal AI1, AI2, AI3, and pulse input signal isprogrammable; please see detailed descriptions of Group P4 parameters.

Serial communication setting, the user can connect the serial communication port to a PC or PLC. The setfrequency of the inverter is controlled by the communication mode.

When P0.03 is set to 9, see description of Group P3 UP / DOWN. When P0.04 is set to 9, compensation is half of the corresponding slip frequency difference of the set torque

and the actual torque.

P0.05 Frequency setting combination 1 Setting range: 0~9 [0]

P0.06 Frequency setting combination 2 Setting range: 0~9 [0]

0: Frequency setting source 1 1: Frequency setting source 2

2: MIN(Frequency setting source 1, Frequency 3: MAX(Frequency setting source 1, Frequency setting

Sparex India



93

setting source 2) source 2)

4: Frequency setting source 1＋Frequency settingsource 2

5: Frequency setting source 1-Frequency setting source 2

6: Frequency setting source 1 x Frequency settingsource 2 7: Frequency setting source 1÷Frequency setting source 2

8: |Frequency setting source 1-Frequency settingsource 2

9: Frequency setting source2 × (Maximum outputfrequency＋frequency setting source1)

÷Maximum output frequencyNotes: Frequency setting source 1: It represent the frequency set based on P0.03 frequency setting source 1. Frequency setting source 2: It represent the frequency set based on P 0.04 frequency setting source 2 The frequencies set based on frequency setting source 1 and the frequency setting source 2 is used as the final

set frequency after appropriate combination operation. If "FC" function terminal is defined (see P3.01-P3.11), and the terminal function is enabled, then the result of

frequency setting combination 2 of P0.06 is actual set frequency; if the "FC" function terminal is not defined,or it is defined, but the terminal function is disabled, then result of frequency setting combination 1 of P0.05is the actual set frequency. Users can switch at will between the two different frequency setting combinations.If the combination mode is 6,7, then the value set by frequency setting source 2 no longer representsfrequency, instead it will be used as the coefficient, and the absolute value is the final result we want.

P0.07 Run command mode selection Setting range: 0~5 [0]

0: Keypad control 1: Terminal control 1 (STOP invalid)

2: Terminal control 2 (STOP valid) 3: Serial communication 1 (STOP invalid)

4: Serial communication 2 (STOP valid) 5: Terminal control 3 (STOP and JOG invalid)Note 1: In keypad control mode, the user controls start and stop of the inverter directly through RUN, STOP keys on

the keypad. In terminal control mode, the user needs to define multi-function input terminal first to realize the operation

functions of RUN, F/R, FWD, REV, HLD, etc. (see P3.01~ P3.11), and then the terminal controls the startand stop of the inverter.

In serial communication control mode, the user connects the serial communication port to a PC or PLC. Thestart, stop, positive and negative rotation of the inverter is controlled by the communication mode.

When STOP key is enabled, the user can stop the inverter with the STOP key on the keypad, which is used inoccasions of site emergency stop. When STOP key is disabled, the user can only stop the inverter through theset control mode.

When P0.07 is set to 5, JOG and STOP keys on the keypad are disabled; when JOG key is disabled, the JOGkey on the keypad fails, the user can only enable inching running through terminal.

In keypad and terminal control modes, the communication read/write parameter operations are ignored.

P0.08 Keypad direction setting Setting range: 0.1 [0]

0: Forward 1: ReverseNotes: Pressing “FWD/REV” will switch the direction, and change the value of this parameter P0.08. But the

changed direction only takes effect currently. Only by changing value of function code and pressing “ENTER” to save the value, keypad direction

setting will be saved permanently.Direction priority: Terminal set is the highest, second is set by communication, keypad is the lowest. If thehigh one is invalid, the lower priority will take effect.

Sparex India



94

P0.09 fundamental frequency Setting range: 3004GB and below: 0.10 ~ 650.0Hz 35R5GB and above:0.10~400.0Hz

P0.10 maximum outputfrequency

Setting range: 3004GB and below: MAX [50.00Hz, upper limit frequency, setfrequency, multi-stage frequency, hopping frequency] ~ 650.0Hz [50.00Hz]35R5GB and above: MAX [50.00Hz, upper limit frequency, set frequency,multi-stage frequency, hopping frequency] ~ 400.0Hz [50.00Hz]

Notes: Fundamental frequency FBASE: When the output voltage of the inverter is equal to the minimum output

frequency of the rated voltage UN, it is used as the benchmark of the regulating frequency. Usually, the ratedfrequency of the motor is used as the set point of the fundamental frequency. The adjustable range offundamental frequency FBASE of this series of inverters is 0.10 ~ 650.0Hz. In the usual case of the use,FBASE is selected according to the rated frequency of the motor. In particular occasions of use, it can be setaccording to the operating requirement, but it should be noted the fitting with V / F characteristic of the loadmotor and the output requirements of the motor, which is shown in Fig. 5-0-1 Relationship between outputfrequency and output voltage.

输出电压V

额定电压

输出频率(Hz)

基本频率最大输出频率

Fig. 5-0-1 Relationship between output frequency and output voltage

Maximum frequency FMAX is the maximum frequency of this series of inverter allowed to output. If the setpoint is greater than the rated value of the drive unit, it may result in damage to motor and mechanicalequipment.

P 0.11 upper limit frequencysource Setting range: 0 ~ 5 [ 0]

0: Digital setting 1: Terminal AI12: Terminal AI2 3: Terminal AI3 (reserve for 3004GB and below models)4: Pulse input 5: Communication setting

Notes: In non-zero setting, adjustable range of the upper limit frequency is the set point of 0 ~ P0.12 upper limit

frequency.

P0.12 upper limit frequency Setting range: MAX (lower limit frequency, jog frequency, UP/DN givenamplitude, sleep threshold) ~ maximum frequency [50.00Hz]

P0.13 Offset of upper limitfrequency Setting range: 0.00 ~ upper limit frequency [0.00Hz]

P0.14 Rated voltage of motor Setting range: 60 ~ 480V [Rated voltage]

P0.15 lower limit frequency Setting range: 0.00 ~ upper limit frequency [0.00Hz]

P0.16 Maximum output voltage Setting range: 60 ~ 480V [Rated voltage]Notes: Upper limit frequency is the highest frequency allowing forwarding rotation and reverse rotation of the

inverter, lower limit frequency is the minimum frequency allowing rotation of the inverter. Set the upper limitfrequency and lower limit frequency, and automatically ensure that the output frequency is not higher than the

Fundamentalfrequency

Rated voltage

Output frequency (Hz)

Output voltage V

Maximum outputfrequency

Sparex India



95

upper limit frequency, and not less than the lower limit frequency. This function is commonly used to ensurethat the motor operates at the allowable frequency in order to avoid misoperation or accidents of mechanicalsystem or inverter caused by unintended causes. It is particularly applicable to occasions preventinglow-speed or overspeed running (see P2.04).

Upper limit frequency offset: When the upper limit frequency source is an analog set point, the parameter isused as the analog offset. Its benchmark is P0.12. Bias frequency is applied to the analog frequency set pointas the set point of the final upper limit frequency. When the upper limit frequency source is the digital setpoint, offset plus upper limit set frequency is the set point of the final upper limit frequency.

The maximum output voltage is the corresponding voltage when the inverter outputs fundamental frequency,it is usually the rated input voltage specified on the motor nameplate.

P0.17 Step length of digitalencoder regulation Setting range:0~250×(0.01Hz/1rpm) [50]

Notes:This parameter is only active for the online adjustment of the set frequency and the set speed in monitoring state; When the function code is set to 0, and the keypad knob is integral regulation mode, which means rotating the

knob continuously and keeping the rotation speed can increase the adjustment step width gradually from 1 to10, from 10 to 100, and up to 100 (maximum);

When the function code is not set to 0, it is the Cut-to-length regulation mode. The set value is thecorresponding variation of the set frequency/speed when rotating the knob for one position, which means theadjustment amount of set frequency / speed when rotating the knob for one position is (P0.17 × 30) ×(0.01Hz/1rpm).

When the adjustment object is the set frequency, the unit of P0.17 is 0.01Hz; when the adjustment object isthe set speed, in general operating mode, the unit of P0.17 is (6 ÷ (5 × motor poles)) rpm, in digital PIDmode, the unit of P0.17 is 1rpm;

Example:In general operating mode, in the adjustable range of the frequency, when P0.17 = 100, when rotating the knob onthe keypad for one circle, the set frequency increases or decreases 30.00Hz, the speed increases or decreases 900rpm;when P0.17 = 10, then the set frequency and the speed increase or decrease 3.00Hz and 90rpm respectively. Indigital PID operation mode, when P0.17 = 10, the speed increases or decreases 300rpm while rotating the knob onthe keypad for a circle;

P0.18 Acc time1 Setting range: 0.1~3600s [6.0s/20.0s]

P0.19 Dec time1 Setting range: 0.1~3600s [6.0s/20.0s]Notes: Acceleration time: The time that the inverter speed rises from null speed up to the maximum frequency.

Deceleration time: The time that the inverter speed decelerates from the maximum frequency to null speed. This series of inverter defines four groups acceleration and deceleration time (the others see P2.28 ~ P2.33),

user can select different acceleration and deceleration time through external terminals according to the needs,or can select different acceleration and deceleration time during the program timing run.

the default units of acceleration and deceleration time is s, the acceleration and deceleration time can bereduced or enlarged to 10 times by modifying P2.35 acceleration and deceleration time multiplying factor.

5.2 Start/Stop Control (Group P1)

P1.00 Start mode Setting range:: 0~2 [0]

0: Start directly: 1: Brake first and then start

2: Rotating speed tracking

Notes: Start directly: Speeds up from zero-speed and accelerate to the preset frequency within the preset Acc time.

Sparex India



96

Brake first and then start: Inverter adds some DC braking power to load first, and then startup. As shown inFigure. 5-1-1. Starting mode 1 is suitable for small inertia load which is running forward or reverse while theinverter is in stop state, such as fan load. DC braking parameters refer to P1.03 and P1.04.

When the control mode is "closed-loop vector control", even if the startup mode is "starting at the startingfrequency", the speed tracking start-up is also performed. The difference from "speed tracking" startup modelies in that when "P1.02 starting frequency hold time" is not 0, and the corresponding running frequency ofthe current speed is greater than the starting frequency, decrease the speed to the corresponding speed ofstarting frequency, and keep the inverter run at the set frequency after maintaining "starting frequency holdtime".

Brake First and then startOutput Freq.(Hz)

DC injec tion br aking time

Brakingenergy

Time

Time

Braking voltage

Running command

St op command

Figure. 5-1-1 Brake First and then start

Rotating speed tracking restart: Search and catch the motor’s running direction and speed, and then start at

the caught speed , running to the reference frequency within the Acc/Dec time, realize smooth start of motor,as shown in Figure. 5-1-2. This mode is suitable for the motor with big inertial load.

Sparex India



97

Poweroff

Operation Freq.

Motor speed

Detect motor's speed and direction

Output voltage

Time

Time

Time

Figure. 5-1-2 Rotating speed tracking restart

Starting process includes the start of inverter power on, power recover, external fault reset, and restart aftercoast-to-stop.

Tips:

Speed tracking function only with encoder (PG) or with speed tracking card.

P1.01 Start frequency Setting range: 0.10~60.00Hz [0.50Hz]

P1.02 Start frequency holding time Setting range: 0.0~10.0s [0.0s]

Notes:Start frequency is the initial frequency at which the inverter starts, see fS as shown in Figure. 5-1-3 ; Holding time ofstarting frequency is the time during which the inverter operates at the starting frequency, see t1 as shown in Figure.5-1-3:

Sparex India



98

Figure. 5-1-3 Starting frequency and starting time

Tips:

1. Starting frequency is not restricted by the frequency lower limit.2. If reference frequency is lower than starting frequency during acceleration, the inverter will run at zero-speed

P1.03 DC braking current at start This value depends on the inverter model [0.0%]

P1.04 DC braking time at start Setting range: 0.0~30.0s [0.1s]Notes: P1.03 and P1.04 are only active when P1.00 is set to 1 (start mode 1 is selected), as shown in Figure. 5-1-1. In V/F mode, 100.0% corresponds to the rated current of the motor; in vector mode, the starting DC braking

current is determined by P8.00 pre-excitation current compensation coefficient (100.0% corresponds tono-load current of the motor).

The set upper limit of the starting DC braking current is 80% of the rated current of the inverter or the smallerrated current of the motor.

When the starting DC braking time is 0.0s, there is no DC braking process.

Tips:

Tips Before using DC braking function, the rated parameters of the motor must be correctly set.

P1.05 start preset frequency Setting range: 0.00 ~ maximum frequency [0.00Hz]

P1.06 preset frequency hold time Setting range: 0.0 ~ 3600.0s [0.0s]

Sparex India



99

t2t1

设定频率

启动频率保持时间启动预置频率保持时间

Figure 5-1-4 Start frequency and Start preset frequency schematic diagram

Tips:

When starting preset frequency is less than the starting frequency or starting preset holding frequency time is 0,the starting preset frequency is invalid.

P1.07 Acc/Dec mode Setting range: 0~3 [0]

0: Linearity 1: S-curve

2: Reserved 3: Reserved

Notes: Linear Acc/Dec mode used for ordinary load: The output frequency increases or decreases according to a

constant rate. As shown in Figure. 5-1-5.

Figure. 5-1-5 Linear acceleration/deceleration

S-curve change output frequency slowly at start of acceleration or end of deceleration, in order to reducemechanism noise and shake, lash of start and stop. It is suitable for the load that needs descending torque atlow frequency, and short-time acceleration at high frequency, such as conveying belt.

Setfrequency

Starting frequencyhold time

Starting preset frequencyhold time

Output frequency (HZ)

Maximum frequency

Set frequency

Time

Set acceleration time Set deceleration time

Actual acceleration time Actual deceleration time

Sparex India



100

Running Freq.(Hz)

Time

Acc Time Dec Time

③

②

①①

③

②

Figure.5-1-6 S-curve acceleration/deceleration

P1.08 Time of S-curve initial Setting range: 10.0~50.0% [20.0%]

P1.09 Time of S-curve rising Setting range: 10.0~80.0% [60.0%]

Notes: P1.08 and P1.09 are only active when the Acc/Dec mode is S-curve mode (P1.07=1) and P1.08+P1.09≤90%.

Starting process of S-curve is shown in Figure. 5-1-6 as “①”, where the changing rate of output frequencyincreases from 0.

Rising process of S-curve is shown in Figure. 5-1-6 as “②”, where the changing rate of output frequency isconstant.

Ending process of S-curve is shown in Figure. 5-1-6 as “③”, where the changing rate of output frequencydecreases to zero.

Tips:

S-curve Acc/Dec mode is suitable for the conveying load such as elevator and conveying belt.

P1.10 Stop mode Setting range: 0~2 [0]

0: Deceleration to stop 1: Coast to stop

2: Deceleration +DC braking

Notes: 0: Dec-to-stop

After receiving the stop command, the inverter reduces its output frequency within the Dec time, and stopswhen the frequency decreases to zero.

1: Coast-to-stopAfter receiving the stop command, the inverter stops output immediately and the load stops under the effectsof mechanical inertia.

2: Dec-to-stop +DC brakingAfter receiving the stop command, the inverter reduces its output frequency according to the Dec time andstarts DC braking when its output frequency reaches the preset frequency of braking. Refer to the Notes ofP1.11~P1.15 for the functions of DC braking.

Sparex India



101

P1.11 DC braking frequency at stopSetting range: 0~MIN (50.00, Frequency upper limit)[2.00Hz]

P1.12 DC braking waiting time at stop Setting range: 0.00~10.00s [0.00s]

P1.13 StoppingDC braking current setting source Setting range: 0~5 [0]

0: Digital setting 1: Terminal AI1

2: Terminal AI2 3: Terminal AI3 (reserve for 3004GB and below models)

4: Pulse input 5: Communication setting

P1.14 stoppingDC braking current Setting range: depending on the model [0.0%]

P1.15 stoppingDC braking time Setting range: 0.0 ~ 30.0s [0.0s]

Notes: DC braking is injecting DC current to motor, to let it stop quickly, and keep the spindle of motor in

standstill until finished DC braking If there is pre-shoot or slewing during deceleration stopping or positive and negative dead zone, the value of

P1.11 can be decreased or increased appropriately.

Figure. 5-1-7 DC braking

DC braking frequency at stop is the frequency at which DC braking action begins when the inverter inDec-to-stop process. In the process of constant rate deceleration, if the output frequency is at or below the“DC braking frequency at stop, the DC braking function will startup.

The upper limit of the stopping DC braking current is 80% of the rated current of the inverter or the smallerrated current of the motor.

When the stopping DC braking time is 0.0s, there is no DC braking process. Stopping DC brake time: It is DC braking current hold time. This time cannot be set too long, as this may

cause overheat of the inverter. If the DC braking time is equal to zero, then DC braking does not operate.

Tips:

Sparex India



102

This function will start up after inverter received stop command. Usually, it is used to improve the stopprecision and not for deceleration braking in common running. If faster stop required, braking energyregeneration unit should be fitted, or the inverter that has the function of brake energy regeneration should beselected.

P1.16 Stopping holding frequency Setting range: 0~Maximum frequency [0.00Hz]

P1.17 Stopping holding time Setting range:0~3600.0s [0.0s]

Notes: The stopping holding frequency: under the conditions of press the STOP key or other normal stopping, the

operation frequency will drop to stopping holding frequency, then drop to 0. When stopping holding time is 0, stopping holding frequency is invalid; when current setting holding

frequency is greater than the operation frequency, stopping holding frequency is invalid.

P1.18 Dynamic braking selection Setting range: 0,3 [3]

0: Dynamic braking is disabled 1: Dynamic braking is enabled

2: Use flux brake 3: Use energy consumption and flux brake

Tips:

On occasions where the load inertia is not great and there is no special requirements on the deceleration time,magnetic flux braking can be used only without connecting braking resistor; while on occasions where therotary inertia is great, and fast stopping is required, it is suggested to set the parameter to 1 or 3 and select thematching dynamic braking unit and braking resistor.15kW and below models is designed with built-in braking unit.

P1.19 Dynamic braking usage Setting range: 30.0% to 100.0% [100.0%]

Notes: The larger the set value is, the better the braking effect will be got, but the temperature rise of the braking

resistor will be greater. Therefore, setting of this parameter should consider the impedance and power of thebraking resistor, choose the appropriate usage to achieve a balance between rapid braking and avoidingbraking resistor overheat.

Dynamic braking operation voltage point relates to stall overvoltage point (Pd.11). For 380V input models,dynamic braking operation voltage point is about 52V lower than stall overvoltage point (namely the defaultoperation point is 700V); for 220V input models, dynamic braking operation voltage point is about 23V lowerthan stall overvoltage point (namely the default operation point is 350V). Please see Pd.11 description formore details.

P1.20 Trip-free handling Setting range: 0 ~ 2 [ 0]

0: It will be fault Uu1 after Trip-free 1: Give an alarm Uu within instantaneous stop time, and givefault Uu1 afterwards;

2: It will give an alarm Uu after Trip-free

P1.21 Trip-free time Setting range: 0.5-10.0s [This value depends on the invertermodel]

P1.22 Action selection after transient stop Setting range: 0.1 [0]

Sparex India



103

alarm

0: Failure to actuate 1: Slowdown running

P1.23 Rate of deceleration duringinstantaneous stop deceleration running Setting range: 0.00 ~ - maximum frequency [10.00Hz /s]

Notes: If undervoltage occurs at the time of stopping, it only give an alarm of Uu, at this time, the motor cannot be

started. As shown in Fig. 5-1-8: If undervoltage occurs during running, it will give an alarm of Uu or Uu1 as shown in Fig. 5-1-8; when Uu

occurs, the pulse will be locked and the inverter will run at 0Hz frequency. Uu will disappear after therecovery; when Uu1 occurs, the inverter will shut down, if the voltage continues to drop to 300V or less, itwill not be regarded as a fault record or a fault output; it will record fault Uu1 after the recovery.

When the action is selected as 1 after the instantaneous stop alarm, the inverter should run slowly at theinstantaneous stop deceleration speed, if the mains supply recovers during the deceleration, the frequencyshould be recovered to the set frequency according to the set acceleration time.

Power 1 ON

OFF

ON

Trip-free time

Treatment 0 RUN

Treatment 1 RUN

Treatment 2 RUN

Uu1 Uu1 Uu1 ... Recorded

Uu

Zero-speed Uu1 Uu1 ... Recorded

Uu Uu Not record

Zero-speed Zero-speed

Power 2 ON

OFF

Trip time

Treatment 0 RUN

Treatment 1 RUN

Treatment 2 RUN

Uu1 Uu1 Uu1 ... Not recorded

Uu

Zero-speed Uu1 Uu1 ... Not recorded

Uu Uu Not recorded

Zero-speed Zero-speed

Figure. 5-1-8 Trip-free diagram

Sparex India



104

5.3 Auxiliary Operation (Group P2)

P2.00 Jog Frequency Setting range: 0.10~Frequency upper limit [5.00Hz]

P2.01 Acc time of Jog Setting range: 0.1~3600s [6.0/20.0s]

P2.02 Dec time of Jog Setting range: 0.0~3600s [6.0/20.0s]

Notes: P2.00~P2.02 define the related parameters of Jog. As shown in Figure. 5-2-1, t1 is Acc time of Jog and t3 is Dec time of Jog t2 is the Jog time; P2.00 is the Jog

frequency. Actual Acc time of JOG (t1) can be determined by the following formula. So does the actual Dec time of JOG

(t3). JOG stop mode depends the value of P2.02: If P2.02 setting is not 0, the motor will stop as stop mode 0; if

P2.02 setting is 0, the motor will coast to stop

Operation Freq.(Hz)

P2.00

JOG Command

Time

t2t1 t3

t1=P2.00×P2.01

P0.07

Fig. 5-2-1 Description of Jog parameters

Tips:

1. In Jog operation, the inverter starts according to starting mode 0. The unit of Acc/Dec time is second.2. If deceleration time of Jog is 0: coast-to-stop, but DC braking terminal takes effect when stop Jog

operation, the deceleration time will be P2.23 Dec time 4.3. Jog operation can be controlled by keypad, terminals or serial port.

P2.03 Switching time between run forwardand reverse Setting range: 0.0~3600s [0.0s]

Notes: The delay time is the transition time at zero frequency when the inverter switching its running direction as

shown in Figure. 5-2-2 as t1.

Sparex India



105

Operation Freq.(Hz)

Timet1

Figure. 5-2-2 FWD/REV switching time

P2.04 Frequency lower limit deal mode Setting range: 0~3 [0]

0: Run at Frequency lower limit 1: Run at zero-speed.

2: Stopping 3: Zero speed operation

Notes: If setting is 0, when the reference frequency is lower than frequency lower limit, the inverter will run at

frequency lower limit instead of reference frequency. As shown in Figure. 5-2-3.

Operation Freq.(Hz)

Lower limit Frequency

TimeReference

Frequency 2

Reference Frequency 1

Figure. 5-2-3 Running at Frequency lower limit

Option 1: When the inverter runs at 0 frequency, if the set frequency is less than the lower limit frequency, theinverter should run at the lower limit frequency, and run at 0 frequency after the delay time arrives at P3.30,as shown in Fig. 5-2-4.

Operation Freq.(Hz)

Frequency lower limit

TimeReference

Freq. 2

Reference Freq. 1

Frequency lower limit arrivied delay time(P3.22)

Figure. 5-2-4 Zero-speed running

Sleep function is enabled and the inverter is in sleep running, then no matter P2.04 is 0 or 1, the invertershould be regarded as running at 0 frequency.

Option 3: Reserve

Frequency lower limit arrived delay time (P3.30）

Sparex India



106

P2.05 Frequency departure setting Setting range: 0.00~2.50Hz [0.10Hz]

Notes: Prevent analog setting fluctuation leading joggling of output frequency. When the frequency setting source is

terminal AI or pulse input, it takes effect only when the set frequency changes and the variation range exceedsthe set range.

P2.06 carrier frequency adjustmentselection Setting range:0.1 [0]

0: No automatic adjustment 1: Adjust automatically according to the load and the temperature ofthe inverter

Notes: The carrier frequency is the upper limit of the carrier frequency in vector control mode or when there is no

automatic adjustment. Option 1: This function option can adjust the carrier frequency by automatically synthesizing the load and

temperature of the inverter so as to regulate the width of the frequency domain of the noise of the motor orreduce the probability of the inverter issuing overheat alarm.

P2.07 Carrier frequency upper limit Setting range: depending on model

P2.08 Carrier frequency lower limit Setting range: 1.0~P2.07 [1.0KHz]Notes: In order to obtain better control characteristics, it is suggested that the ratio of the carrier frequency and the

maximum operating frequency of the inverter is not less than 36. To reduce the noise, higher carrier frequency can be selected; if the inverter is not required to be absolutely

quiet during running, lower carrier frequency can be used to reduce loss of the inverter and intensity ofradio-frequency radiation.

If the used carrier frequency is greater than the factory set value, then the rated continuous-service current ofthe inverter will be reduced.

P2.09 Jump frequency 1 Setting range: 0.00~Max frequency [0.00Hz]



P2.12 Jump frequency bandwidth Setting range: 0~15.00Hz [0.00Hz]

Notes: In order to make the set frequency of the inverter avoid the resonance frequency point of the mechanical load,

the set frequency of the inverter can hop near some frequency point. The operating frequency correspondingto the resonance frequency is hopping frequency as shown in Fig. 5-2-5.

Frequency set t ing signal

Reference Freq.(Hz)

Jumpfrequency 1

Jumpfrequency 2

Jumpfrequency 3

Jumpfrequency

bandwidth

Jump frequencybandwidth

Jump frequency bandwidth

Sparex India



107

Figure. 5-2-5 Jump Frequency

The inverter can set three jump frequency points, and the jump frequency bandwidth can overlap or nesting.If overlapped, the range broadens. When all three jump frequency set to 0.00 Hz, the jump function will bedisabled.

P2.13 Multi-step frequency 1 Setting range: 0.00~Max frequency [5.00Hz]








P2. 21 Multi-step frequency 9 Setting range: 0.00~Max frequency [30.00Hz]







Notes: Define Multi-step frequency respectively, which can be used in Multi-step speed running and simple PLC

running.

P2.28 Dec time 2 Setting range : 0.1~3600s [6.0/20.0s]

P2.29 Acc time 2 Setting range : 0.1~3600s [6.0/20.0s]





P2.34 Deceleration time duringabnormal stopping Setting range : 0.1~3600s [3.0/10.0s]

Notes: Define acceleration and deceleration time 2, 3, 4 respectively (acceleration and deceleration time is defined

by P0.18 and P0.19) Acceleration time and deceleration time during inverter operation are determined byexternal terminal via parameters P3.01 ~ P3.11; if they are all disabled, then it is acceleration and decelerationtime 1. When the terminal option is forced outage or unusual stopping, perform according to decelerationtime of unusual stopping. Acceleration and deceleration time of program timing run and jog run is out ofcontrol of external terminals, but is selected by the set parameters.

Sparex India



108

When the inverter is in unusual stopping state or terminal forced stopping state, it should be stoppedaccording to P2.34 abnormal deceleration stopping time, is subject to the limit of stop mode (P1.10).

the default units of acceleration and deceleration time is s, the acceleration and deceleration time can bereduced or enlarged to 10 times by modifying P2.35 acceleration and deceleration time multiplying factor.

P2.35 acceleration and deceleration timemultiplying factor. Setting range: 0~2 [0]

0: 1 time 1: 10times

2: 0.1timeNotes: Actual acceleration and deceleration time = acceleration and deceleration time × acceleration and

deceleration time multiplying factor

P2.36 Fan control mode Setting range: 0.1 [0]

0: Auto stop mode 1: The fan runs after power onNotes: Auto stop mode

The fan keeps running during inverter operation, internal temperature detection program starts automatically3 minutes after the inverter stops. Running and stopping of the fan is dependent on the module temperatureconditions. When module temperature> 60 ℃, the fan continues to run; when module temperature ≤ 50 ℃,the fan stops. 3004GB and below models do not have temperature measurement module, these models willautomatically shut down after 3 minutes.

The fan runs after power onThe fan runs after power on the inverter

P2.37 Wiring direction of motor Setting range: 0.1 [0]

0: Positive sequence 1: Inverted sequenceNotes: The inverter output positive rotation direction may be inconsistent with the actual positive rotation direction

of the motor. Users can change phase sequence of incoming line of the motor to adjust the rotation directionof the motor or change the function code.

In closed loop vector control mode, if the function code is modified, the direction setting of used encoder (PG)must be modified accordingly.

P2.38 Prohibit reverse operation Setting range: 0.1 [0]

0: Reverse operation disabled Reverse operation enabled

Notes:When it is set to 1: Reverse rotation is disabled, When the keypad is set to reverse running, the inverter will run at 0 frequency When terminal RJOG reverse jog is enabled, the inverter does not run. When the Run command is controlled by terminal and when REV reverse rotation terminal is enabled, the

inverter does not run.

P2.39 IO extended card mode (reserve for 3004GB andbelow models) Setting range: 0.1 [0]

0: Null 1: Full

P2.40 PG extended card model (reserve for 3004GB andbelow models) Setting range: 0 [0]

Sparex India



109

0: Null 1: Full

P2.41 expanded PG output frequency dividing ratio (reservefor 3004GB and below models) Setting range: 1~128 [1]

P2.42Extended PG pulse number per turn (reserve for3004GB and below models) Setting range: 1~9999 [1000]

P2.43 Extended PG direction setting (reserve for 3004GBand below models) Setting range: 0.1 [0]

P2.44 Built-in PG pulse number per turn Setting range: 1~9999 [1000]

P2.45 Built-in PG direction setting Setting range: 0. 1 [0]

0: A phase advance when foreward rotatio 1: B phase advance when foreward rotatio

P2.46 Speed measurement PG usage selection Setting range: 0, 1 [0]

0: Use built-in PG 1: Use extended PGNotes: P2.41: Set perform how many times of frequency division to AB phase pulse input from pulse encoder,

Z-phase pulse will not have frequency division. P2.42/P2.44: Set according to pulse number per revolution of the actually used pulse encoder. P2.43/P2.45: When it is set to 0, phase A signal of PG card advances phase B signal of PG card, it is regarded

that the motor is in forward rotation; when it is set to 1, phase B signal of PG card advances phase A signal ofPG card, it is regarded that the motor is in reverse rotation. In closed-loop vector control mode, if the speedcannot exceed 5HZ and the current is abnormal, this function code should be modified (modify P2.43 ormodify P2.45 when using extended PG).

P2.46: When it is set to 0, use the built-in PG; when it is set to 1, use extended PG.

P2.47 PG disconnection detection time (reserve) Setting range: 0.0-10.0 [2.0s]

P2.48 PG disconnection operation selection (reserve) Setting range: 0 ~ 3 [ 1]

0: Deceleration stopping 1: Free stopping

2: Abnormal stopping 3: Continue to runNotes: When the inverter is controlled with an encoder, P2.47 is used to define encoder signal disconnection

detection time. If the encoder is disconnected for longer than the time set by P2.47, then the inverter willoperate according to the operation defined by P2.48.

P2.49 PG deceleration teeth number 1 Setting range: 0~1000 [1]

P2.50 PG deceleration teeth number 2 Setting range: 0~1000 [1]Notes: When the encoder (PG) is not mounted directly on the motor shaft, the parameters is required to be set,

number of PG reduction teeth 1 is the same with the number of teeth of the driving wheel on the motor shaftor the diameter; number of PG reduction teeth 2 is the same with the number of teeth of the driving wheel onPG mounting shaft or the diameter.

5.4 I/O Terminal Ctrl (Group P3)

P3.00 Terminal function mode Setting range: 0.1 [0]

0: Close valid 1: Open valid (Normally open and normally close are notlimited)

Notes: Close valid: Signal is enabled if the control terminal and COM terminal are short-circuit;

Sparex India



110

Open valid: Signal is disabled if the control terminal and COM terminal are short-circuited. (Normally openand normally close are not limited)

3004GB and below models:P3.01 P3.01 Multi-function input selection TerminalX1 Setting range: 0~79 [1]

P3.02 P3.01 Multi-function input selection TerminalX2 Setting range: 0~79 [2]




P3.06 Reserved -

P3.07 Reserved -

P3.08 Reserved -

P3.09 Reserved -

P3.10 Reserved -

P3.11 Reserved -

P3.12 Reserved -

35R5GB and above models:

P3.01 Multi-function input selection Terminal X1 Setting range: 0~79 [1]











P3.12 Reserved -

Notes: Control terminals X1 ~ X10 are multi-function terminals, their specific functions can be defined by setting

the value of P3.01 ~ P3.10. Allow duplicate definitions, among repeatedly defined terminals, when oneterminal is active, this function is enabled. Set points and functions are as shown in Table 5-3-1.

Sparex India



111

Table 5-3-1 Multi-function Input Menu

Setting Function Setting Function

0 NULL: No defined 1 FWD: Running Forward

2 REV: Running Reverse 3 RUN

4 F/R: Running direction 5 HLD: self-hold selection

6 RST: reset 7 FC: Setting frequency selection

8 FJOG: JOG FWD 9 RJOG: JOG REV

10 UP 11 DOWN

12 UP/DOWN Reset 13 FRE: Coast-to-stop

14 Forced stopping (Deceleration timeaccording to abnormal stopping) 15 DC braking

16 Acc/Dec prohibit 17 Inverter running prohibit

18 S1 Multi-step Speed 1 19 S2 Multi-step Speed 2



24 S7 Multi-step Speed 7 25 Command channel switch to Terminalcontrol 2

26 SS1 Multi-step Speed 27 SS2 Multi-step Speed

28 SS3 Multi-step Speed 29 SS4 Multi-step Speed

30 T1 Acc/Dec time 1 31 T2 Acc/Dec time 2

32 T3 Acc/Dec time 3 33 T4 Acc/Dec time 4

34 TT1 Acc/Dec time 35 TT2 Acc/Dec time

36 Forced outage normally close 37 EH0: External fault signal normally open

38 EH1: External fault signal normally close 39 EI0: External interrupt signal normallyopen

40 EI1: External interrupt signal normallyclose 41 Stopping plus DC brake

42 Start PLC operation 43 Pause the PLC operating

44 Reset PLC stop status 45 Start wobble frequency operation

46 Reset the wobble frequency operatingstatus 47 Start PID operation

48 Speed/torque mode switching 49 Timing drive input

50 Counter trig signal input 51 Counter clear

54 Reserved 55 Reserved




Sparex India



112

Setting Function Setting Function







74 Reserved 75 Anti rotor-blocking command (reserve)

76 Zero servo command(reserve) 77 PID output is forced to 0

78 PID integral time reset 79 Command channel switch to Keypadcontrol

80 PUL: Pulse input 81Single phase speed measurement pulse ordouble phase speed measurement A phasepulse input

82Double phase speed measurement Bphase pulse input

Notes to functions listed in Table 5-3-1:

0: NULL: No defined

The defined terminal is invalid. The inverter does not detect the status of the terminal nor response to theterminal. In other words, the function of terminal is forbidden. To avoid disturbance or mistake actioneffectively, define the terminals that are not in use as this function

1~ 5: Operation mode

See P3.15 operation mode setting

6: RST: Reset

In fault state, the inverter can be reset by keypad by pressing “STOP/RESET ” or by terminal on or off, if theterminal has been set as RST function. In running state, it can stop the inverter according to selection of stopmode. RST function is active at the rising edge, so it must be operated as “disabled-enabled-disabled”, shownin Figure. 5-3-1.

Figure. 5-3-1 Terminal reset

Sparex India



113

7: Setting frequency selection FC frequency setting options: If the "FC frequency setting options" is "enable function terminals", the

frequency set point is determined by P0.06 running frequency setting combination 2; if this function terminalis inactive, the frequency set point is determined by P0.05 running frequency setting combination 1. Duringinverter operation, frequency setting mode can be switched through FC terminal to control the inverter outputfrequency flexibly.

8~9:Jog operation signal (FJOG/RJOG) If setting is 8 or 9, this terminal can enable jog operation, when inverter didn’t start up by other running

command. FJOG is for jog forward command and RJOG is for jog reverse command, as shown inFigure.5-3-2. The defined Jog function of terminal isn’t limited by run command mode selection (P0.07).When Jog frequency, and jog Acc/Dec time can be defined in P2.00~P2.02.

Operation Freq.(Hz)

P2.00

JOG

Time

Figure. 5-3-2 JOG operation

10~12: UP/DOWN

When P0.05 is 4, the frequency is set to 1 +2Whether the UP/DOWN terminal is effective or not, the reference frequency will be the sum of initial valueof UP/DOWN and frequency setting 2. If any UP/DOWN terminal is effective, the frequency will increase ordecrease at the rate of UP/DN rate (P3.16). And the UP/DOWN frequency range will be from the sub offrequency setting 2 and P3.17 to the sum of frequency setting 2 and P3.17. If UP/DOWN function terminal isnot effective, the frequency reference of UP/DOWN will keep constant. The frequency reference ofUP/DOWN will be saved or not according to the UP/DN reference saving selection P3.18, if UP/DOWNfunction is not effective and STOP key has been pressed. But if UP/DOWN function is effective, thefrequency reference of UP/DOWN will keep the initial value. As shown in Figure.5-3-3.

When P0.05 is not 4, the frequency is set to 1 and terminal is UP / DN;At the beginning of the running, if UP / DOWN terminals are all inactive or are active, then the inverter runsat the initial set point of UP / DOWN (if the value is negative, the inverter runs at 0 frequency); if oneterminal of UP / DOWN is active, then the set frequency is controlled by UP / DOWN terminal, increase ordecrease on the basis of the current speed at the speed of terminal UP / DOWN (P3.16). At this point, if theUP / DOWN terminal is inactive, then the running frequency at this time is the set frequency. When the UP /DOWN terminal is inactive, press STOP key, save the current set frequency to the given value of UP /DOWN in the method determined by the function code P3.18 with the sign as positive. When the UP /DOWN terminal is active, then the given value of UP / DOWN is the initial value as shown in Fig. 5-3-4.

Sparex India



114

Reference Freq.(Hz)

Frequency setting 2

Run command

UP command

DOWN command

STOP command

amplitude

Frequency setting1+Frequency setting 2 UP/DOWN Terminal RunUP/DN reference

Figure. 5-3-3 UP/DOWN combination operation

NOTES: The terminal UP / DOWN is active only when P0.03 = 8 and when the inverter is in running state.

Operation Freq.(Hz)

UP/DOWNreference Initial

Run Command

UP command

DOWN Command

Stop command

UP/DN reference amplitude

Figure. 5-3-4 UP/DOWN non-combination operation

13: FRE Free stopping When defining terminal of the function is active, the inverter immediately locks PWM output, and exits

running state. Only during FRE releasing, the run command takes effect. Once the function is defined, nomatter the control mode (P0.07) is what, the function is active and is not subject to the limit of stop mode(P1.10).

14: Forced stopping (based on deceleration time of abnormal stopping); 36: Forced stopping normally closed Shut down slowly at deceleration time of abnormal stopping, it is subject to the limit of stop mode (P1.10).15: Stopping process plus DC braking

Sparex India



115

Use the terminal to perform DC braking to the system during the stopping process for accurate positioning ofthe motor. Braking starting frequency, braking waiting time, brake current are defined in P1.11 ~ P1.14; thebraking time is bigger one between the time defined by P1.15 and the effective duration of the controlterminal, which is as shown in Fig. 5-3-5.

Figure. 5-3-5 DC braking

16: Acc/Dec prohibit The motor operate at present speed without being influenced by external signal (except STOP command).17: Inverter running prohibition When the terminal is active, the inverter during running will freely stop, the standby state is prohibited to

enable. It is mainly used in occasions where safety interlock is needed.18 ~ 24, 26 ~ 29: Multi-stage speed Start / stop control of multi-stage speed operation can choose keypad, terminal command or serial

communication. S1 ~ S7: Multi-stage speed command, it is used to specify that the set frequency of theinverter is one stage from multi-stage speed frequency S1 to S7 (P3.01 ~ P3.11). If two or more multi-stagespeeds are active, the terminal of smaller number takes precedence. SS1 ~ SS4 multi-stage speed command,defined through combination, is used to specify the multi-stage speed, and it has up to 15 stages of speed. Asshown in Table 5-3-2:

Sparex India



116

Table 5-3-2 Multi-stage frequencySelected frequency Legend

SS4 SS3 SS2 SS1 FrequencysettingOFF OFF OFF ON Multi-stagefrequency 1OFF OFF ON OFF Multi-stagefrequency 2OFF OFF ON ON Multi-stagefrequency 3OFF ON OFF OFF Multi-stagefrequency 4OFF ON OFF ON Multi-stagefrequency 5OFF ON ON OFF Multi-stagefrequency 6OFF ON ON ON Multi-stagefrequency 7ON OFF OFF OFF Multi-stagefrequency 8ON OFF OFF ON Multi-stagefrequency 9ON OFF ON OFF Multi-stagefrequency 10ON OFF ON ON Multi-stagefrequency 11ON ON OFF OFF Multi-stagefrequency 12ON ON OFF ON Multi-stagefrequency 13ON ON ON OFF Multi-stagefrequency 14ON ON ON ON Multi-stagefrequency 15OFF OFF OFF OFF Generaloperation

If one or more terminal(s) among the 4 terminals is (are) not set, the terminal(s) not set is (are) default as OFF. Allowduplicate definitions, among repeatedly defined terminals, when one terminal is active, this function is enabled. If you define both S1 ~ S7 and SS1 ~ SS4 at the same time, then terminals S1 ~ S7 take precedence.25: Command to switch to the terminal control 2, when this function is enabled, the command channel is switched toterminal control 2.79: Command to switch to the keypad control, when this function is enabled, the command channel is switched tokeypad control.30~35: Default acceleration and deceleration T1 ~ T4: individually specify the acceleration and deceleration time during running. If two or more

acceleration and deceleration times are active, the terminal of smaller number takes precedence. TT1 ~ TT2: Combination specifying the acceleration and deceleration time of the running time. As shown in

Table 5-3-3.

Table 5- 3- 3T2 TT1 The selected acceleration and deceleration time

OFF OFF Acceleration and deceleration time 1OFF ON Acceleration and deceleration time 2ON OFF Acceleration and deceleration time 3ON ON Acceleration and deceleration time 4

If simultaneity defined T1~T4 and TT1~TT2, T1~T4 is prior. 37~40: External fault signal / External interrupt signal (normally open / normally close EH0 - External fault signal normally open / EH1 - External fault signal normally close: External fault

command. If the setting is 37-40, the fault signal of external equipment can be input by the terminal. Once theinverter receives the fault signal, it stops output immediately, and displays last fault code. After the externalfault signal is removed, the inverter needs to be reset before restarting. Tips: Inverter can’t reset if externalfault signal isn’t released. EH0 and EH1 are not influenced by P3.00 (Terminal function mode), Shown inFigure.5-3-6.

Time

Operation Freq

Sparex India



117

EI0 - External interrupt signal normally open / EI1 - External interrupt signal normally close: Duringoperating, the inverter stops its output and runs at zero-speed when it receives external interrupt signal. Oncethe signal is removed, the inverter will start and resume normal operation. Please refer to note of EH0 andEH1 above. As shown in Figure. 5-3-6.

KM

Xj(External fault signal/External interrupt signalinput )

Xi(External fault signal/External interrupt signalinput)

Fault relay

COM

Figure. 5-3-6 Normally open / normally close

41: StoppingStopping plus DC brake

Use the terminal to DC brake on the system in the stoppingstopping state to prevent motor malfunction.42~44: Terminal PLC Control

PLC input: Program timing running. Replace the frequency setting 1 with PLC; wobble frequency input / PIDinput is the same. When using frequency setting source 2, PLC input is inactive.

PLC pause: Pause the program timing running. When the terminal is active, pause the program timingrunning, and the inverter runs at 0 frequency; it will continue running at the breakpoint after canceling thepause instruction. When pressing "STOP" key during effective period of the terminal, the program runningcounter is cleared, it needs to start in the start-up mode when starting up next time. If the inverter does notwork under program run mode, then the function is meaningless.

PLC stoppingstopping reset: stoppingstopping state under the PLC operating mode, when the functionterminal is active, the running phase, running time and other information remembered at the time ofstoppingstopping of PLC will be cleared.

45~46: Terminal wobble frequency running Wobble frequency input: Wobble frequency running, replace the frequency setting 1 with wobble frequency

running. When using frequency setting source 2, wobble frequency input is inactive. Reset the wobble frequency operating status: In stop state of wobble frequency operation, the valid terminal

can clear the wobble frequency operating information memorized in stop.47: Terminal PID operation PID input: PID running, replacing the frequency setting 1 with PID closed loop. When using frequency

setting source 2, PID input is inactive48: Speed/torque mode switch, In the vector control mode, set by P8.10 torque control mode. When the terminal is set and valid, torque mode

will automatically switch. For example: when P8.10 is set to 0 (according to the speed mode), when theterminal is set to 48 and valid, the operation mode is automatically switched to the torque mode.

49.53: Timing drive input If the 49 terminal is valid, start the timing, else zero-clear. If the timing arrives at preset setting of P3.33, stop timing. As shown in Figure.5-3-7: When the 53 terminal is valid, the unit of P3.33(preset of timing arriving) will be minutes, or it will be

second.

Sparex India



118

Fig. 5-3-7 Timing driving input50: Counter's trig signal input This terminal is used for pulse input to the internal counter of the inverter. The highest pulse frequency is 650

Hz. The present counting value can be saved when power off.51: Counter clear This terminal is used to clear the counter to zero. The terminal function is in conjunction with Counter's trig

signal input.52: Actual Length clearing When terminal 52 is enabled, the setting of P6.01 (actual length) will be cleared to zero.54~74:Reseved75: Anti-blocking action command (Reserve)76: Zero servo command(Reserve)77: PID output forced set to 0 During speed PID run time, when the terminal is active, the output is forced to set to the set speed;

during analog PID run time, when the terminal is active, the output is forced to set to zero frequency;78. PID integral time reset

In the PID operation mode, PI control generally. When the terminal is set and valid, there will be onlyproportional regulation and the integral regulation is 0.

80: PUL: Pulse input The input pulse frequency can be used as frequency reference. See Parameter Group P4 for the relationship

between input pulse frequency and the reference frequency.81: Single phase speed measurement pulse or double phases speed measurement A phase pulse input Built-in PG card single-phase tachometer pulse or two-way speed measurement pulse Phase A pulse input

terminal function; terminals specified by this function are connected to Phase A pulse of pulse generator orencoder (PG) to achieve single-phase pulse speed feedback.

82: Biphase speed measurement Phase B pulse input phase Built-in PG card biphasic speed measurement Phase B pulse input function, the terminals specified by this

function are connected to Phase B of pulse encoder (PG) to achieve diphasic pulse speed feedback togetherwith No. 81 function terminal.

Tips:

Built-in PG card only supports incremental collector output type photoelectric encoder with the voltage rangeof 12 ~ 30 VDC, and the connection mode is shown in Fig. 2-22 and Fig. 2-23.Other types of encoders require corresponding expanded PG cards.

P3.13 X terminal filter time Setting range : 0.002s~1.000 [0.010s]

Sparex India



119

Explanation: The filter time constant digital filtering process on the input signal, in order to prevent the influence of the

interference signal on the system stablility. If the filter time constant is too large, the control is stable, but control response is bad; if the filter time

constant is small, the response is fast, but the control may not be stable. If the best setting value is unknown,you can appropriately adjust the setting value according to the unstable or response delay.

P3.14Reserved Reserved

Terminal function mode setup Setting range : 0~3 [0]

0: Two-wire operation mode 1 1: Two-wire operation mode 2

2: Three-wire operation mode 1 - self hold function (attach any one of X1 ~ X10 (3004GB and below X1~ X5)terminals)

3: Three-wire operation mode 2 - self hold function (attach any one of X1 ~ X10(3004GB and below X1~ X5)terminals)

Notes: Only when the inverter operation command control mode (P0.07) is terminal control mode, two-wire 1 and 2,

three-wire 1 and 2 are meaningful. 2-wire control mode 1

FWD, REV: Running at preset direction. FWD means running forward, and REV means running reverse.You can control the motor’s running direction by switch terminal FWD and REV. If FWD is valid, runforward; if REV is valid and P2.38 is set to 1 (Prohibit reverse operation enabled), The inverter willstop. If P2.38 is 0 (Prohibit reverse operation disabled), the inverter will run reverse. If FWD and REV arevalid or invalid at the same time, the inverter will stop. Terminals wiring is shown in Figure.1

2-wire control mode 2In this mode, both function RUN (Run command) and F/R (Running direction) are used: If RUN is enabled,the inverter will startup. If F/R is selected but disabled, the inverter will run forward. If F/R is selected andenable, the inverter will run reverse. When F/R is not selected, the running direction is defined by functioncode. If RUN is disabled, the inverter will stop. Terminals wiring is show in Figure.2

3-wire control mode 1FWD, REV: Run at preset direction. FWD means running forward, and Rev means running reverse. You cancontrol the motor’s running direction by switch terminal FWD and REV. If FWD is enabled, the inverter willrun forward; If REV is enabled, the inverter will run reverse. If FWD and REV are enabled or disabled, theinverter will stop.If HLD is ON, FWD and REV signal will self-hold. If HLD is OFF, the inverter will release self-holding andstop. Terminals wiring is show in Figure.3

3-wire control mode 2In this mode, both function RUN (Run command) and F/R (Running direction) are used: If RUN is enabled,the inverter will startup. If F/R is selected but disabled, the inverter will run forward. If F/R is selected andenable, the inverter will run reverse. When F/R is not selected, the running direction is defined by functioncode. If RUN is disabled, the inverter will stop. If HLD is ON, RUN signal will self-hold. If HLD is OFF, theself-holding will be released. Terminals wiring is show in Figure.4.

In Figure. 3, SB1 is Stop button, SB2 is running forward button. Press SB2 or SB3 to startup the inverter, andswitch SB2, SB3 to change the running direction. Press SB1 to stop the inverter output.

In Figure.4, SB1 is Stop button, SB2 is running button, and K is running direction button. Press SB2 tostartup the inverter. Press switch K to change the running direction. Press SB1 to stop the inverter output.

Sparex India



120

图2F/R

RUN

COM

图 1REV

FWD

COM

图4F/R

HLD

COM

RUN

SB1 SB2

K图 3HLD

REV

COM

FWD

SB1SB2

SB3

P3.16 Terminal UP/DN rate Setting range: 0.01~99.99Hz/s [1.00Hz/s]

P3.17 UP/DN reference amplitude Setting range:0.00~Frequency upper limit [10.00Hz]

Notes: Terminal UP/DN rate is used to define the change rate of reference frequency that is changed by terminal

UP/DN. UP/DN reference amplitude used to define that the span of reference frequency is changed byterminal UP/DN.

3.18 Digital frequency UP/DOWN save selection Setting range: 0~2 [2]

0: Receive STOP, UP/DN reference is reset to zero;

1: Receive STOP, UP/DN reference is not reset to zero, and not saved when power loss;

2: UP / DOWN set point not is reset to 0 after receiving STOP, which will save to function code after power off;when P0.03 is set to 1, P0.02 adjusts power-off saving online.

Notes: UP / DOWN operation is shown in Fig. 5-3-3,5-3-4. When P0.03 is set to 1 during the keypad setting frequency: When P3.18 is set to 2, the digital set frequency

(P0.02) adjusts the power-off saving; when P3.18 is not set to 2, it will not be saved after power failure,please see P0. 02 description for details.

P3.19 D0 terminal function definitions Setting range: 0 ~ thirty-five [ 0]

P3.20 Y1 terminal function definition (reserve for 3004GB andbelow models) Setting range: 0 ~ thirty-five [ 1]



P3.23 Y4 terminal function definition (reserve) Setting range: 0 ~ thirty-five [ 0]

P3.24 relay 1 (TA / TB / TC) output function selection Setting range: 0 ~ thirty-five [ nineteen]

P3.25 relay 2 (BRA / BRB / BRC) output function selection(reserve for 3004GB and below models) Setting range: 0 ~ thirty-five [ 0]

Fig. 1

Fig. 3 Fig. 4

Fig. 2

Sparex India



121

Table 5-3-4 Multi-function Terminal Output Value

Corresponding function Functional description0 NULL NA1 RUN When the inverter is in operation mode, the terminal output is active2 FAR frequency arrival Refer to P3.26 frequency reaching detection width

3 FDT frequencydetection

See P3.27, P3.28 frequency detection value and frequency detection lagcorrelation description

4 FDTH upper limitfrequency arrival

Set frequency ≥ upper limit frequency and the running frequency reaches theupper limit frequency and has delayed, the terminal output is active.

5 FDTL lower limitfrequency arrival

Set frequency ≤ lower limit frequency and the running frequency reacheslower limit frequency, the terminal output is active

6 Upper and lower limitsof wobble frequency

After selecting the wobble frequency function, if the frequency fluctuationrange of the wobble frequency calculated based on the center frequencyexceeds upper limit frequency or is lower than the lower limit frequency, theterminal output is active.

7 Inverter is in zero speedoperation

When the output frequency of the inverter is 0, but the inverter is in operationmode, the terminal output is active

8Simple PLC stageoperation completionindication

When simple PLC completes the current phase operation, the terminal outputis active (single pulse signal with the width of 500ms)

9 PLC cycle completionindication

When simple PLC completes one operation cycle, the terminal output isactive (single pulse signal with the width of 500ms)

10Completion ofreadiness for operationof inverter (RDY)

When the inverter shuts down and can start up at any time, the terminaloutput is active (No fault, no running prohibition, no interruption, no reset,no free stoppingstopping, no Uu alarm, etc.)

11 Free stoppingstopping Terminal output is active during free stoppingstopping (single pulse signalwith the width of 500ms)

12 Auto restart Terminal output is active when the inverter restarts due to auto reset becauseof fault (single pulse signal with the width of 500ms)

13 Timing arrival See description in "timing driving input"14 Counting arrival output Terminal output active after the counting reaches the set point

15 Set running time arrival When the inverter's accumulated running time (PE.09) reaches the setrunning time (P3.34), the terminal output is active

16 Torque arrival detectionTorque reaches the set point, the terminal output is active, and when the it isless than 80% of the set point, terminal output is inactive

17 CL current-limit action

When the output current reaches the current amplitude limit level (Pd.09), theterminal output is activeWhen the current amplitude limit level is less than 90%, the terminal outputis inactive

18 Overvoltage stallWhen the DC bus voltage reaches the stall overvoltage point (Pd.11), theterminal outputs active signal; when it is less than 95% of the overvoltagestall point, the terminal output is inactive

19 Inverter failure When the inverter has a fault, the terminal output is active

20 External downtime(EXT)

When the inverter has an external fault tripping alarm, the terminal output isactive

21 Uu1 under-voltagestoppingstopping

When the DC bus voltage is below the under-voltage set point, the terminaloutput is active

22 CE communicationalarm When there is an external communication alarm, the terminal output is active

23 OLP2 overloadpre-alarm

When the output current exceeds the overload pre-alarm action value of theinverter, the terminal output is active

Sparex India



122

Corresponding function Functional description

24 Abnormality of analogsignal 1

When the signal level of the analog signal is less than the minimum value orhigher than the maximum value of the signal continuously for 500ms, theterminal output is active



26 STEP Steps of programrunning

It indicates the number of steps of program running. For output content andthe corresponding number of steps of program running, please see Table5-3-5 (reserves for 3004GB and below modes)

27 ERR fault alarm Output signal and the corresponding failure are shown in Table 5-3-528 Cut-to-length arrival Terminal output is active when the Cut-to-length reaches the set point29 Sleeping When the system is sleeping, the terminal output is active30 Zero speed When the output frequency is 0, the terminal output is active

31 Zero servo state(reserve) Reserve

32 Reverse control signal(reserve) Reserve

33 Actual direction ofrotation

When the inverter switches the direction, the output level signal is alsochanged accordingly



35 Underload detectionsignal (ULP) When the inverter is under load, the underload detection signal is active

Notes: This series of inverters have 7 ways of digital outputs, the output terminals D0, Y1, Y2, Y3, relay 1, relay 2

are programmable multi-function terminals (there are only two ways of digital outputs for 3004GB and belowmodels, and the output terminal are D0 and relay 1). Users may select some control and monitoring signals(shown in Table 5-3-3) based on their needs.

When selecting the collector output as the indication of number of steps of program running or faultindication, content of function definitions must be the same, is 26 or 27 to make combination of D0, Y1, Y2or combination of D0, Y1, Y2, Y3 active. (3004GB and below models have no such combination)

Indication of ERR fault types are shown in Table 5-3-5, STEP indication of number of steps of programrunning is shown in Table 5-3-6.

Table 5-3-5 Indication of ERR fault types

Y2 Y1 D0 Fault type MeaningOFF OFF ON OC Over-CurrentOFF ON OFF SC Short CircuitOFF ON ON OU Over VoltageON OFF OFF Uu1 Under VoltageON OFF ON OH1 OverheatON ON OFF OL2 Inverter OverloadON ON ON EH External Fails

Sparex India



123

Table 5-3-6 STEP Indication of number of steps of program running

Y3 Y2 Y1 DO Steps of programrunning

OFF OFF OFF ON T1OFF OFF ON OFF T2OFF OFF ON ON T3OFF ON OFF OFF T4OFF ON OFF ON T5OFF ON ON OFF T6OFF ON ON ON T7ON OFF OFF OFF T8ON OFF OFF ON T9ON OFF ON OFF T10ON OFF ON ON T11ON ON OFF OFF T12ON ON OFF ON T13ON ON ON OFF T14ON ON ON ON T15

P3.25 Cut-to-length reaching terminal output hold time(3004GB and below models) Setting range: 0.0 ~ 3.0s [1.0s]

Notes: 3004GB and below models: P3.25 is used to set this function, otherwise it is used for selection of output

function terminal of relay 2, please see the above description for details; In P3.19, P3.24, set DO, relay 1 output is active when it is "fixed length reaching". When P3.25 is set to 0: Cut-to-length reaching terminal output signal holds for a long term until the length is

cleared. When P3.25 is not set to 0: value of P3.25 represents the terminal output signal hold time after the fixed

length reaches the set point.

P3.26 frequency reaching detection width Setting range: 0.00 ~ 10.00 Hz [2.50 Hz]Notes: When the output frequency reaches the set frequency, the function adjusts its detection width. The adjustment

range is 0 ~ ± 10.00Hz of the set frequency. When the inverter's output frequency is within the positive andnegative detection width of the set frequency, specify terminal output active signal, as shown in Fig. 5-3-8.

Sparex India



124

Detection width

Time

Time

ReferenceFreq.

Operating Freq.(Hz)

FAR signal

Figure. 5-3-8 FAR detection diagram

P3.27 FDT level Setting range: 0.00~Maximum frequency [50.00Hz]

P3.28FDT lag Setting range: 0.00~10.00Hz [1.00Hz] Note

When the output frequency reaches a certain preset frequency (frequency detection threshold), Y terminaloutput will be valid. We called the preset frequency FDT level. In the dropping of output frequency, Yterminal output keep valid, until the output frequency drops below another certain frequency of FDT level,which is called release frequency (FDT1 level-FDT1 lag), as shown in Figure. 5-3-9.

FDT lag

Tim e

Tim e

FDT leve l

Output Freq.

FDT signal

Fig. 5-3-9 Frequency detection FDT

P3.29 Frequency upper limit arriving output delaytime

Setting range: 0.0~100.0s [0.0s]

P3.30 Frequency lower limit arriving output delaytime

Setting range: 0.0~100.0s [0.0s]

Notes: These two functions are enabled when setting D0, Y1, Y2, Y3, relay 1, relay 2 output (3004GB and below

models set DO, relay 1) in P3.19 ~ P3.25 option as ""FDTH upper limit frequency reaching" or "FDTL lowerlimit frequency reaching". Typically, these two functions are set to prevent load joggling and signal instability

Sparex India



125

when switching between power frequencies and frequency conversion of multiple motor, as shown in Fig.5-3-10.

Operating Freq.(Hz)

Frequencyupper limit

FDTH

Time

FDTL

Frequencylower limit

FDTH Delay time EDTL Delay time

Figure. 5-3-10 FDTH/FDTL

P3.31Torque detection reference Setting range: 0.0~200.0% [100.0%]

Notes: If motor torque is equal to or more than the range of torque detection reference, the output of terminal is

valid. If the motor torque is less than 80% of reference, the output of terminal is invalid, as shown in Figure.5-3-11

Output torque

Torque detection reference

Torque arrivingdetection signal

Time

Torque detection reference*80% Torque arriving

detection

Fig. 5-3-11 Torque reaching detection

P3.32 Preset Count value Setting range: 0~9999 [0]Notes:When the counter value is equal to this value, the terminal output is active, as shown in Fig. 5-3-12.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8Xi Input

Counting valuearriving output

Preset Counting value

Figure. 5-3-12 Count value arriving

Sparex India



126

P3.33 Preset timing arriving Setting range: 0.0~6553.0 [0.0]Notes: When the timing is equal to this value, the terminal output is active, as shown in Fig. 5-3-7. The unit of P3.33 timing is identified by function terminal 53; the cumulative time of timing is cleared only

when terminal 49 is inactive, otherwise it remains original.

P3.34 Preset operating time Setting range: 0~65530h [65530]

Notes:

When the total operating time reaches the preset operating time (P3.26), the output of terminal is valid.

P3.35 underload detection set value Setting range: 0 ~ 200.0 % [10.0 %]P3.36 underload detection terminal output delaytime Setting range: 0 ~ 100.0s [5.0s]

Notes: P3.35 Underload detection set point 0~200.0% corresponds to 0 ~ 2 times of the rated torque. When the

actual output torque is less than P3.35 set point, the terminal has output if the underload detection terminalsetting is active after P3.36 (underload detection terminal output delay time); when the torque increases and isgreater than the set point of P3.35, the terminal output is inactive.

5.5 Analog and pulse function (Group P4)P4.00 Analog Nonlinear Selection Setting range: 0~3 [0]0: Null 1: AI12: AI2 3: Pulse

Notes: If the setting is 0, P4.01~P4.05 are used to define AI1 inputs, P4.06~P4.10 are used to define AI2 inputs, and

P4.11~P4.15 are used to defined pulse inputs. They are independent and have no interference with each other.

If the setting is not 0, it will be nonlinear selection, all the parameters from P4.01 to P4.15 are setting pointsfor the selected channel by P4.00. The filter time according to the selected channel setting and the physicalvalue of the others are 0.

If the setting of P4.00 is 1 or 2, the selection will be analog input and the default values to each channelarranged from small to great are: 0.00V, 2.00V, 4.00V, 6.00V, 8.00V, 10.00V;

If the setting is 3, the selection will be pulse input. While the default input to the channel are: 0.00 kHz, 10.00kHz, 20.00 kHz, 30.00 kHz, 40.00 kHz, and 50.00 kHz. The default physical values are linear relation.

Tips: Only when the value of P4.00 is changed and saved by pressing the “ENTER” key, the input channel value canbe initialized to the default value.

P4.01 AI1 Minimum analog input value) Setting range: 0.0~P4.03 [0.00V]P4.02 Corresponding physical quantity of input value ofAI1 minimum analog Setting range: -100.0%~100.0% [0.0%]

P4.03 AI1 maximum analog input value Setting range: P4.01~10.00V [10.00V]P4.04 Corresponding physical quantity of input value ofAI1 maximum analog Setting range: -100.0%~100.0% [100.0%]

P4.05 AI1 Analog input filter time constant Setting range: 0.01~50.00s [0.05s]P4.06 AI2 Minimum analog input value Setting range: 0.00~P4.08 [0.00V]P4.07 Corresponding physical quantity of input value ofAI2 minimum analog Setting range: -100.0%~100.0% [0.0%]

P4.08 AI2 Maximum analog input value Setting range: P4.06~10.00V [10.00V]P4.09 Corresponding physical quantity of input value of Setting range: -100.0%~100.0% [100.0%]

Sparex India



127

AI2 maximum analogP4.10 AI2 Analog input filter time constant Setting range: 0.01~50.00s [0.05s]P4.11 Minimum pulse input value (pulse input terminal) Setting range: 0.00 kHz~P4.13 [0.00 kHz]P4.12 Corresponding physical quantity of input value ofminimum pulse quantity Setting range: -100.0%~100.0% [0.0%]

P4.13 Maximum pulse input value (pulse inputterminal) Setting range: P4.11~50.00kHz [50.00 kHz]

P4.14 Corresponding physical quantity of input value ofmaximum pulse quantity Setting range: 0.0~100.0% [100.0%]

P4.15 Pulse input filter time constant (pulse inputterminal) Setting range: 0.01~50.00s [0.05s]

P4.16 AI3 Minimum analog input value (reserve for3004GB and below models) Setting range: -10.00~P4.18 [0.00V]

P4.17 Corresponding physical quantity of input value ofAI3 minimum analog(Reserve for 3004GB and below models)

Setting range: -100.0%~100.0% [0.0%]

P4.18 AI3 Maximum analog input value (reserve for3004GB and below models) Setting range: P4.16~10.00V [10.00V]

P4.19 Corresponding physical quantity of input value ofAI3 maximum analog(Reserve for 3004GB and below models)

Setting range: -100.0%~100.0% [100.0%]

P4.20 AI3 Analog input filter time constant(Reserve for 3004GB and below models) Setting range: 0.01~50.00s [0.05s]

Note 1: Min/Max virtual value of analog input is the Min/Max virtual value of the input signals. If the actual value

input is smaller than min value, the min value will be treated as the Min virtual value of analog input. If theactual value input is greater than the max value, the max value will be treated as the Max virtual value ofanalog input. The max virtual value of analog input must be greater than the min.

Physical value corresponding to virtual value of analog input: The physical value can be reference frequency,rotate speed, or pressure, etc.

This series of 35R5GB and above models of inverters are provided with four groups of analog input signals:analog input terminals AI1, AI2, AI3, pulse; 3004GB and below models of inverters are provided with threegroups of analog input signals: analog input terminals AI1, AI2 and pulse. Users can define input / outputcurve for each channel, and can define a total of four groups.

AI1 and AI2 input signals can be 0 ~ 10V voltage signals, or 0 ~ 20mA current signals, are selected by theusers through toggle switch on the control board (SW1 toggle switch is at 1 position, which means when it isOFF, it corresponds to 0-10V, while when it is on, it corresponds to 0-20mA). The AI3 input signalcorresponds to-10V ~ 10V voltage signal.

Through setting P4.01~P4.04, P4.06~P4.09 and P4.11~P4.14, P4.16~P4.19 can defined two characteristiclinear curves. The positive and negative function is shown in Figure.5-4-1.

%

Min analogvalue (V)

Max analogvalue (V)

Physical valuecorresponding to Minanalog value Input％

Physical valuecorresponding to Maxanalog value Input％

Sparex India



128

%

Min analogvalue (V)

Max analogvalue (V)

Physical valuecorresponding to Minanalog value Input％

Physical valuecorresponding to Maxanalog value Input％

Figure. 5-4-1 Analog input linear curve

Note 2: When P4.00 is set to 1, 2, or 3, the function of P4.01~P4.04, P4.06~P4.09 and P4.11~P4.14 are combined for

one physical value, which is different to Note 1. User can define their own nonlinear curves by setting theseparameters. Six points can be set on the curve. As shown in Figure. 5-4-2. In addition, the setting value toP4.01, P4.03, P4.06, P4.08, P4.11, P4.13 must increase in order.

P hysical value corresponding toanalog value Input%

P4.08P4.03 P4.13P4.01 P4.11P4.06

Analoginput

P4.02 P4.04P4.07

P4.09P4.14P4.12

Figure. 5-4-2 Analog input non-linear curveNote 3: The input filter time constant is used for digital filter of the input signal, in order to avoid interference of the

system. The bigger the filter time constant, the higher the immunity level and the longer the response time is. On the

contrary, the smaller the time constant, the shorter the response time and the lower the immunity level is. Ifthe best setting is not clear, you can adjust setting value according to the status of control stability andresponse delay time.

P4.21 AO1 function definition Setting range: 0~14 [0]P4.22 AO2 function definition(reserve for 3004GB and below models) Setting range: 0~14 [0]

P4.23 AO3 function definition(reserve for 3004GB and below models) Setting range: 0~14 [0]

P4.24 DO function definition Setting range: 0~14 [0]0: NULL 1: Output current (0-2IN)2: Output voltage (0 (0 ~ 10V / 0 ~ 20mA) maximumvoltage) 3: PID setting (0 ~ 10V)

4: PID feedback (0 ~ 10V) 5: Calibration signal (5V )

Sparex India



129

6: Output torque (0 ~ 2 times of the rated motor torque) 7: Output power (0 ~ 2 times of the ratedpower)

8: Bus voltage (0 ~ 1000V) 9: AI1 (0 ~ 10V / 0 ~ 20mA)

10: AI2 (0 ~ 10V / 0 ~ 20mA)eleven: AI3 (0~10V corresponds to-10V~10V) (reserve for 3004GB and belowmodels)

12: Output frequency before compensation (0 ~ maximumfrequency)

13: Output frequency after compensation (0 ~maximum frequency)

14: Current speed (0 to 2 times of the rated speed)Notes: This series of inverters (3004GB and below models of inverters are provided with one way) are provided with

3 ways of analog signal output. The output signals are analog voltage and current signals with the full rangeof DC 10V or 20mA. The output content is selected by the users. The full-scale pointer can be adjusted basedon the actual needs.

P4.25 AO1 output range selection Setting range: 0.1 [0]P4.26 AO2 output range selection (reserve for 3004GB andbelow models) Setting range: 0.1 [0]

P4.27 AO3 output range selection (reserve for 3004GB andbelow models) Setting range: 0.1 [0]

0:0-10V / 0-20mA 1: 2-10V / 4-20mAP4.28 AO1 gain Setting range: -10.00~10.00 [1.00]P4.29 AO2 gain (reserve for 3004GB and below models) Setting range: -10.00~10.00 [1.00]P4.30 AO3 gain (reserve for 3004GB and below models) Setting range: -10.00~10.00 [1.00]

Notes: Inverter output signals and user instrumentation system may produce errors, if the user needs to calibrate the

instrument display error or change the instrument display range, AO1, AO2 or A03 gains can be defined foradjustment.

In order to avoid fluctuations in the output data during adjustment, the system can be set to output standardcalibrated signals (set values of P4.21 ~ P4.23 to 5, DC5V output (50% of the full scale) is obtained) to adjust

AO* gain. When adjusting AO1, enter function code P4.28, rotate the knob + or - to make the

output signal be 5V, it will takes effect immediately after modifying the value of function code P4.28, thensave by pressing Enter key. The same steps when calibrating AO2 and AO3.

If the peripheral instruments have large errors, then it is necessary to connect instrumentation for actualcalibration.

P4.31 AO1 offset Setting range: -100%~100% [0.0%]P4.32 AO2 offset (reserve for 3004GB and belowmodels) Setting range: -100%~100% [0.0%]

P4.33 AO3 offset (reserve for 3004GB and belowmodels) Setting range: -100%~100% [0.0%]

Notes: If the offset is represented by "b", the gain is represented by "k", the actual output is represented by "y", the

standard output is represented by "x", the actual output is y = kx +10 b; AO1, AO2, AO3 offset 100 %corresponds to 10V (20mA). Standard output means 0 to maximum value of the corresponding analog outputwhen the output is 0 ~ 10V (20mA). It is generally used to correct null shift of analog output and derivationof the output amplitude. It can also be customized to any desired output curve. For example: If the analogoutput is running frequency, and it is desired to output 8V (16mA) when the frequency is 0 and to output 3V(6mA) when the frequency is maximum, then the gain should be set to "-0.50", the offset should be set to"80%".

P4.34 Max output frequency of DO Setting range: Min Pulse value output of DO~50.00kHz[10.00kHz]

P4.35 Min output frequency of DO Setting range: 0.00~Max Pulse value output of DO [0.00kHz]

Sparex India



130

5.6 PLC Operating (Group P5)P5.00 PLC Operating mode Setting range: 0~2 [2]

0: Single cycle 1 1: Single cycle 2 (holding the final value)

2: Continuous operationNotes: Single cycle 1

The inverter stops automatically after one cycle of operation and will start when receiving RUN commandagain. As shown in Figure. 5-5-1.

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7

运行命令

f1

f2

f3

f4

f5f6

f7

运行频率(Hz)

时间

Figure. 5-5-1 Stop mode after single cycle of PLC

Single cycle 2 (holding the final value)The inverter will hold the operating frequency and direction of last step after completing one cycle ofoperation. As shown in Figure. 5-5-2

Running frequency (Hz)

Time

Run command

Sparex India



131

Figure. 5-5-2 Holding the frequency after single cycle Continuous operation

The inverter will start next cycle of operation automatically after completing one cycle of PLC operation untilreceiving stop command. As shown in Figure. 5-5-3.

Run command

Time


Sparex India



132

T1 T2 T3-T12 T13 T14 T15

运行命令

f1

f2

f3-f12

f13f14

f15

运行频率(Hz)

时间

T1 T2 T13 T14 T15

f1

f2

f13f14

f15

T1 T2

f1

f2

第一次循环第二次循环

停机命令

T3-T12

f3-f12

Figure. 5-5-3 Continuous operation of PLC

P5.01 PLC restarting mode selection Setting range: 0~2 [0]

0: Restart from first step 1: Continue from the step where the inverter stops2: Continue to operate at the frequency when theinverter stops

Notes: Restart from first stage

If the inverter stops during PLC operation because of receiving stop command or fault, or power loss, it willrestart from the first step after restarting.

Continue from the step where the inverter stopsWhen the inverter stops during PLC operation because of receiving stop command or fault, it will record theoperating time and will continue from the step where the inverter stops, and restart at the frequency defined forthis step, as shown in Figure.5-5-4

T1 T2 T3 T4 T6 T7

运行命令

f1

f2

f3

f4

f5f6

f7

运行频率(Hz)

时间

中断时刻

从中断时刻的阶段频率继续运行

a1

a2d3

a3a4 d5

a5a6

a7

阶段5已运行时间阶段5剩余时间

Figure. 5-5-4 PLC start mode 1


Time

First cycle Second cycle

Run command

Stop command

Continue to run at the stage frequency atthe moment of interrupt


The remaining timeof Phase 5The run time of Phase 5

Run command

Interruptiontime

Time

Sparex India



133

Continue to run at the operation frequency at the moment of interruptStoppingStopping during running (caused by stop command or failure), the inverter not only automaticallyrecords the run time of the current phase, but also records the running frequency at the time ofstoppingstopping. The inverter will restore to the running frequency at the time of stoppingstopping whenrestarting, and then continue to the operation in the remaining phases, as shown in Fig. 5-5-5.

Tips:

The difference between way 1 and 2 lies in that way 2 remembers one more running frequency at the time ofstoppingstopping than way 1, and the inverter continues to run from the frequency.

T1 T2 T4 T5

Run command

f1

f2

f3f4

f5

Operation Freq. (Hz)

Time

Stopping signal

Continue to operate at the frequency when the inverter stops

a1

a2

a3

a4a5

Remnant time of stage 3

d3

Operating time of stage 3

Figure. 5-5-5 PLC start mode 2

P5.02 Saving PLC status when power off Setting range: 0.1 [0]

0: Not save 1: SaveNotes: Not save

The inverter does not save the PLC operating state when the power is off and restart from the first stage afterthe power is on.

Storage: Memory PLC running state at the time of power failure, including power failure time phases,operating frequency, the run time. Run in PLC interruption running restart mode defined in P5.01.

P5.03 Unit of step time Setting range: 0.1 [0]

0: Second 1: MinuteNotes: This unit is only valid for defining the PLC operating time. The unit of Acc/Dec time in PLC operation is

still second.

P5.04 Operating Timing T1 Setting range: 0.0~3600 [10.0]






Sparex India



134









P5.18 Operating Timing T15 Setting range: 0.0~3600 [10.0]Notes: Define each stage of time during the programmable multi-stage speed operation, the run time varies from 0.0

to 3600 s (for example, if P5.03 is set to min, the unit is min), it is continuous and adjustable. When runningtime is set to 0, the speed of this stage is skipped, the inverter will run at the speed of next stage.

P5.19 Step T1 program operating setting Setting range: 1 F~4 r [1F]














P5.33 Step T15 program operating setting Setting range: 1 F~4 r [1F]Notes: Specify the acceleration and deceleration time and the running direction of the inverter at each stage. There

are eight combinations with the meanings shown in Table 5-5-1.

Table 5-5-1 PLC program run setup descriptionSymbol Acc/Dec time Direction

1F Acc/Dec time 1 P0.18.P0.19 F: Forward

1r r: Reverse

2F Acc/Dec time 2 P2.28, P2.29 F: Forward

2r r: Reverse


3r r: Reverse


4r r: Reverse

Sparex India



135

P5.34 PLC record clear Setting range: 0.1 [0]

P5.35 Record of PLC steps Setting range: 0~15 [0]

P5.36Operating time of this step Setting range: 0.0~3600 [0.0]Notes: Record of PLC steps (P5.35) records the steps that the PLC currently operating at. Operating time of this step (P5.36) records the operating time of the step that the PLC currently operating at. When P5.34 is set to 1, clear stages of program running record P5.35, time when program runs through the

stage P5.36, the function code restores to 0 after clearing.

Tips:

You can start, pause, and reset of PLC operating by setting external terminal function, which is defined inGroup 3.

5.7 Cut-to-length Function and Wobble Frequency Operating (Group P6)P6.00 Set length Setting range: Max (0.000, -P6.06) ~65.53 m [0.000m]P6.01 Actual length Setting range: 0.000~65.53 m [0.000 m]P6.02 Length multiplying factor Setting range: 0.001~30.00 [1.000]P6.03 Length correction factor Setting range: 0.001~1.000 [1.000]P6.04 Circumference of gauging spindle Setting range: 0.01~100.0 cm [10.00 cm]P6.05 Deceleration point Setting range: 50~100 % [90%]P6.06 Amount of deviation Setting range: Max (-200.0, -P6.00) ~200.0 mm [0 mm]Notes: These function codes are used to implement Cut-to-length stop function. The inverter inputs count pulse from terminals (35R5GB and above models: X5 or X6 is defined as function

81, or X5 is defined as 81, X6 is defined as 82; 3004GB and below models: X4 or X5 is defined as function81, or X4 is defined as 81, X5 is defined as 82 ), the calculated length is obtained by measuring pulse numberper revolution (built-in PG: P2.44 / expanded PG: P2.42) and circumference (P6.04).

Calculated length = number of pulses counted ÷ number of pulses per revolution × circumference of gaugingspindle. The calculated length is corrected through length multiplying factor (P6. 02) and length correctionfactor (P6.03), and then the actual length is obtained.

Actual length = calculated length × length multiplying factor ÷ length correction factor The running frequency in Cut-to-length operation mode is set by P0.02, when the actual length (P6.01) is less

than and close to the set length (P6.00), the inverter will slow down automatically and run at the lower limitfrequency. When the actual length (P6.01) ≥ the set length (P6.00), the running frequency of the inverter is 0,the inverter stops after the stop command is given (stop at stop mode). Before running again, the actual length(P6.01) should be cleared, or the set length should be modified so that it is greater than the actual length,otherwise the inverter cannot be started, as shown in Fig. 5-6-1.

Sparex India



136

Time(S)

Operation Freq.(Hz)

Run command

Time(S)

Actual Length

Preset length

Actual Lengthclearing Command

Operation according to inverter's preset

Dec time

Figure. 5-6-1 Fixed length control diagram 1

The time when the inverter slows down can be adjusted by setting the deceleration point. When the motorinertia is greater, the deceleration point can be appropriately reduced to make the motor run slowly inadvance;

While it can also be adjusted by setting the sliding frequency (P0.15 lower limit frequency) and the amount ofdeviation (P6.06). When the motor has overshoot, set P6.06 to a negative value; when a negative value isunreachable, set it to a positive value. Suppose that a motor has overshoot, the run procedure is as shown inFig. 5-6-2 after setting relevant parameters:

Figure. 5-6-2 Fixed length control diagram 2

Tips:

The actual length can be cleared by multi-function input terminal (Define terminal Xi as No.52 function). The actuallength will be calculated only after this terminal is disconnected.Actual length (setting of P6.01) will be saved automatically when the power is off. If the operation frequency isgreater than frequency upper limit and no pulse is input after the running time is longer than 30 seconds, the inverterreports pulse coder fault (dE) when actual length is 0.

Sparex India



137

If P6.00 is set to 0, function of stop at fixed length is disabled, but the calculated length is still effective.The setting value must increase 200.0mm when P6.06 is modified by MODBUS communication. The correspondingrelation between communication value and actual used value (which can be displayed on the keypad) is as follows:Reality used value (displayed on the keypad)) = Communication setting – 200.0mm

P6.07 Wobble frequency operation restart mode Setting range: 0.1 [0]0: Start according to the state beforestoppingstopping 1: Re-start

Time(S)

Operation Freq.(Hz)

Central Freq.

Preset Freq.

Run command

Stop command

Fig. 5-6-3 Wobble frequency startup: Run in the state prior to stoppingstopping

Time(S)

Operation Freq.(Hz)

Central Freq.

Preset Freq.

Run command

Stop command

Fig. 5-6-4 Wobble frequency startup: Restart

P6.08 Save wobble frequency operatingparameters

Setting range: 0.1 [0]

0: not save 1: saveNotes: Not save: The inverter does not save the wobble frequency operating parameters when power is off and

restart when power is on. Save: The inverter will save the wobble-frequency operation parameters such as the operating frequency, and

operating direction (UP/DOWN) when power is off. The inverter will restart as the mode defined by P6.07when power is on.

P6.09 Preset of wobble frequencySetting range:35R5GB and above: 0.00~400.0Hz [0.00 Hz]3004GBand below: 0.00~650.0Hz [0.00 Hz]

P6.10 Holding time before wobble frequency Setting range: 0.0~3600s [0.0s]

Sparex India



138

operatingP6.11 amplitude of oscillation Setting range: 0.0 ~ 50 % (relative to P 0.02) [0.0 %]P6.12 step frequency Setting range: 0.0 ~ fifty % (relative to P6.11) [0.0 %]P6.13 step time Setting range: 5~50ms [5ms]P6.14 Wobble frequency cycle Setting range: 0.1~999.9s [10.0s]P6.15 Swing ratio Setting range: 0.1~10.0 [1.0]

Notes: P6.09 is used to define the operating frequency before entering wobble frequency operation mode. P6.10 is used to define the time when the inverter operates at wobble-preset frequency. P6.11 is used to define the range of wobble operating frequency. The actual value is P0.02×P6.11.

P6.14 is used to define a cycle of wobble frequency operation including rising and falling processes. P6.15.is used to define the swing ratio = rise time / fall time.

P6.16 Random wobble selection Setting range: 0.1 [0]

P6.17 MAX ratio of random wobble Setting range: 0.1~10 [10]

P6.18 MIN ratio of random wobble Setting range: 0.1~10 [0.1]Notes: P6.16 is used to select a fixed wobble ratio value defined by P6.15 or a random value between P6.18~P6.17. Wobble frequency inputs have 2 ways:

Automatic input: If P0.03 is set to 12, and then the frequency will be automatically input during running.Manual input: If P0.03 is not set to 12, the inverter runs in other ways first, when wobble frequency terminalinputs, perform wobble frequency in manual input mode. Difference: Compared with automatic input, manualinput eliminates the process of running at preset frequency.

General conditions of wobble frequency operation: step up to preset wobble frequency (P6.09) according tothe default acceleration time, wait for a period of time (P6.10), and run to center frequency of wobblefrequency according to the default acceleration and deceleration time, run in circles according to the presetwobble frequency amplitude value (P6.11), step frequency (P6.12), step time (P6.13), wobble frequency cycle(P6.14) and swing ratio (P6.15), then slow down according to the default deceleration time after receiving thestop command.

When the set frequency is the combination of frequency setting source 1 + frequency setting source 2 , thecenter frequency is P0.02 + frequency setting source 2; when the set frequency is not the above combinations,the center frequency is the value of P0.02. General run procedure at wobble frequency is shown in Fig. 5-6-5.

Figure. 5-6-5 Wobble frequency start: Restart

Sparex India



139

5.8 PID Control (Group P7)P7.00 Source given 1 Setting range: 0~6 [0]P7.01 Source given 2 Setting range: 0~6 [0]0: PID digital given 1: Terminal AI12: Terminal AI2 3: Terminal AI3 (Reserved for 3004GB and the below)4: Pluse input 5: Serial communication6: Line speed(reserve)P7.02 Setting Quantity Combination Setting range: 0~7 [0]0: PID given source 1 1: PID given source 22: Min (PID given source 1, PID given source 2) 3: Max (PID given source 1,PID given source 2)4: PID given source 1+PID given source 2 5: PID given source 1-PID given source 26: PID given source 1*PID given source 2 7: PID given source 1/PID given source 2

Notes: It is used to determine the PID giving quantity input manner and passage. It can either be the digital quantity

setting (0 or 5), or the Analog setting (1, 2, 3, 4). The digital quantity setting is more precise and stable. TheAnalog can set the input curve via P4 group.

Notes: when the digital giving 0: PID is selected as the given source, there can be two sources, i.e. the analogPID digital givingP7.06 and the speed PID giving P7.08. When the feedback quantity is the speed signal, it isthe speed PID mode and P7.08 is the PID digital giving. When the feedback quantity is other signals, it is theanalog PID mode and P7.06 is the PID digital giving.

When the given source is AI1, AI2 and AI3, dialing is required to set the voltage or current signal to be input,which is illustrated in the basic operation wiring connection of Figure 2-41, 2-42, 2-43 and 2-44.

When the given source is the serial communications setting, setting is carried out by the upper computerthrough RS485 serial communications. If it is the analog PID, setting should be carried out according to therange percentage. If it is rotating speed PID, setting should be carried out based on the percentagecorresponding to the maximum rotating speed.

P7.03 PID feedback source 1 Setting range: 0~5 [0]

P7.04 PID feedback source 2 Setting range: 0~5 [0]0: Built-in PG or single phase speed measurement input ( P7.03 ) extended PG card speed input (P7.04)


3: Terminal AI3 (Reserved for 3004GB andthe below)

4: Pulse input

5: Serial communication

P7.05 Feedback quantity combination Setting range: 0~5 [0]

0: PID feedback source 1 1: PID feedback source 2

2: Min (PID feedback source 1, PID feedbacksource 2)

3: Max (PID feedback source 1, PID feedback source 2)

4: PID feedback source 1+PID feedbacksource 2

5: PID feedback source 1-PID feedback source 2

Explanation: It is used to determine the PID feedback input mode and channel. 0: represents to choose the rotation speed

PID. When the given is the Analog, the given speed is converted according to maximum rotation speed (therotational speed corresponding to maximum frequency) corresponding to the full scale. Others: represent toselect the analog PID.

AI1, AI2, AI3 terminal, serial communication: note the same to the quantitative selection. PG or single phase speed input: use speed PID control of pulse encoder PG. X5 or X6 must be configured as

speed measurement

Sparex India



140

P7.06 Analog PID Digital Giving Setting Range: -P7.07~P7.07 [0.0]P7.07 Analog PID Given Range Setting Range: MAX (1.0, |P7.06|) ~1000.0 [100.0]

Notes: When analog feedback is adopted, digital setting of the keypad giving quantity can be realized. The value is

the actual physical quantity and should match with the range. Setting and feedback quantity of the analog PID should take this as the benchmark and should be consistent

with the actual quantity.

P7.08 Speed PID Digital Setting Setting range: 0~24000rpm [0rpm]

Notes: When PG impulse feedback is adopted, the given value of rotating speed will be set via the keypad. When the

speed PID given range is over 10000, it will be indicated by “1000.”.P7.09 PID Proportional Gain1 Setting Range:0.1~30 [12]P7.10 PID Integration Time 1 Setting Range:0.00~100.0s [0.60s]P7.11 PID Differential Time1 Setting Range:0.00~1.00s [0.00s]P7.12 Switching Frequency1 Setting Range:0.00~switching frequency 2 [5.00Hz]P7.13 PID Proportional Gain2 Setting Range:0.1~30 [6]P7.14 PID Integration Time 2 Setting Range:0.00~100.0s [1.00s]P7.15 PID Differential Time2 Setting Range:0.00~1.00s [0.00s]

P7.16 Switching Frequency 2 Setting Range: switching frequency1~max. frequency[20.00Hz]

Notes: Proportional gain is the parameter determining the response degree of proportional action to deviation. When

a large value is taken for the proportional gain, the system will act sensitively and the response will beaccelerated. However, if the value is a little larger, the oscillation times will be increased and the adjustmenttime will be extended; if it is too large, the system will tend to be unstable; when it is too small, the systemwill act slowly and the response will be delayed.

The integration time is used to determine the integration action effect. When the integration time is long, theresponse will be slow. In addition, the control ability for the external disturbance will be weaker. When theintegration time is short, the integration action will be strong, the steady-errors will be eliminated, the systemcontrol precision will be promoted, and the response speed will be quick. If the integration time is too short,oscillation will occur and the system stability will be reduced.

The differential time determines the differential action effect. When the differential time is long, oscillationcaused by the P action in the case of deviation will be attenuated quickly and the adjustment time will beshort. However, if the differential time is too long, oscillation will be caused on the contrary. When thedifferential time is short, the attenuation action will be small and the adjustment time will be longer in thecase of deviation. The adjustment time can only be reduced when the differential time is appropriate.

P7.17 Selection of Differential Target Setting Range: 0, 1 [0]1: Feedback Differentiation 2: Deviation DifferentiationP7.18 PID Integral Limit Setting Range: 0.0~100.0% [20.0%]P7.19 PID Differential Limit Setting Range:0.0~100.0% [5.0%]P7.20 PID Output Limit Setting Range: 0.0~100.0% [100.0%]

Notes: The above limits are all based on the 100% maximum output frequency.

P7.21 Dormancy delay time Setting range: 0.00~25.00s [0.00s]Notes: PID-controlled Frequency Command Output Delay Time Setting

Sparex India



141

P7.22 Dormancy threshold Setting range: 0.0~999.9 [0.0]

Explanation: If the residual between feed and feedback value is smaller than residual margin, PID regulation will stop and

the PID output maintain constant. As shown in Figure. 5-7-1. Setting this parameter correctly is helpful to balance the system output accuracy and stability. The residual

margin reduces the regulation accuracy of the system, but improves the system stability, to avoid unnecessaryfluctuations of output.

In the case of analog PID, the error margin sets P7.22 as the absolute value of physical quantity, which shouldmatch with the range. In the case of PID, the error margin sets P7.22 as the rotating speed. It is showed inFigure 5-7-1:

Time

Time

Reference

Feedback Residual margin

Opereation Freq.

Figure. 5-7-1 Residual margin diagram

P7.23 PID Adjustment Characteristic Setting range: 0.1 [0]0: Positive Action 1: Negative Action

Explanation: Positive: When the PID output increases, the output frequency will increase and the controlled physical value

will increase, such as waterworks. Negative: When the PID output increases, the output frequency will increase, but the controlled physical

value will decrease, such as refrigeration system.

P7.24 Integral Adjustment Selection Setting range: 0.1 [0]0: When the frequency reaches the upper or lower limit, the integral adjustment will be stopped.1: When the frequency reaches the upper or lower limit, the integral adjustment will be continued.

Tips:

0 is suggested for the system requiring the rapid response. When the frequency reaches the upper or lower limit, theintegral adjustment will be stopped.

P7.25 Sleep Initiation Setting range: 0.1 [0]0: Non-initiation 1: Initiation

Tips:

In the case of rotating speed PID, there is not the function of sleep.

Sparex India



142

P7.26 Sleep Delay Setting range: 0~999s [120s]P7.27 Sleep Threshold Setting range: 0~Frequency upper limit [20.00Hz]P7.28 Wakeup Threshold Setting range: 0.0~999.9 [3.0]

Notes: The function is used to stop the variable pump (all auxiliary pumps are stopped) when the flow is zero. In this

case, if the frequency of the variable pump is lower than the “sleep threshold parameter”, delay will beinitiated.

If the frequency is still lower than the threshold after the delay, the variable pump will stop. Thus, the wholeequipment will be in the state of “sleep”.

The pressure feedback should be reduced to the “wakeup” threshold to switch to the “wakeup” state. Then,the variable pump will be started (as showed in Figure 5-7-3). The wakeup threshold setting rangecorresponds to the analog PID feedback percentage.

t

t

休眠阀值

PI反馈

唤醒阀值

电机频率

延时时间

Figure 5-7-3 Sleep & Wakeup

5.9 Vector control mode(Group P8)P8.00 Pre-excitation current compensationquantity Setting range: 0.0~500.0% [100.0%]

Explanation:The 100.0% is corresponding to motor no-load current. The action time is set in the P1.04. The upper limit is 80% ofthe rated current or small value of the motor rated current.

P8.01 Speed loop proportional gain 1 Setting range: 0.1~30.0 [10.0]P8.02 Speed loop integral time 1 Setting range: 0.001~10.000s [0.200s]P8.03 Switching frequency 1 Setting range: 0.00Hz~Switching frequency 2 [5.00HZ]P8.04 Speed loop proportional gain 2 Setting range: 0.1~30.0 [10.0]P8.05 Speed loop integral time 2 Setting range: 0.001~10.000s [0.600s]

P8.06 Switching frequency 2 Setting range: Switching frequency 1~Maximum frequency[10.00Hz]

Explanation: The P8.01 and P8.02 is PI adjustment parameters when the operation frequency is less than the switching

frequency 1 (P8.03). P8.04 and P8.05 is PI adjustment parameters when the operation frequency is greaterthan the switching frequency 2 (P8.06). PI parameter at the switching frequency 1 and the switchingfrequency 2 frequency segment is linear with switching of the two group of PI parameters, as shown inFigure 5-8-1.

Delay Time

Sleep Threshold

Motor Frequency

Wakeup Threshold

PI Feedback

Sparex India



143

频率Hz

PI参数

P8.01、P8.02

P8.04、P8.05

P8.03 P8.06

Figure 5-8-1 PI parameters schematic diagram

You can adjust the speed dynamic response characteristics of vector control by setting the speed regulatorproportional coefficient and integral time. Increase the proportion gain, reduce the integration time canaccelerate loop dynamic response of the speed. If proportional gain is too large or integral time is too small,it may make the system oscillation.

The proposed regulation method: If the factory parameters cannot meet the requirements, then adjust basedon the factory value parameters: first increase the proportion gain, guarantee system not oscillation; thenreduce integration time, let the system has fast response, small overshoot.

Tips:

If the PI parameter is not set appropriately, it may lead to speed overshoot too big. Even it producesovervoltage failure when the overshoot falls.

P8.07 Speed loop filtering time Setting range: 0.000s~0.100s [0.030s]Explanation: In the vector control mode, the output of the speed loop regulator is torque current command. The

parameters are used for the torque command filter. The parameters require no adjustment in general. Whenthe speed fluctuation is big, it may appropriately increase the filtering time. If the motor oscillation, itshould appropriately reduce the parameter.

If the speed loop filter time constant is small, the frequency inverter output torque may change greatly, butthe response is fast.

P8.08 Current loop proportional gain Setting range: 0.1~9.9[1.0]P8.09 Current loop integral time Setting range: 0.001~1.000s [0.100]

Explanation: The vector control will control the motor output current and track the current command value. Here, set

current control proportional and integral gain. Usually, you do not need change the factory value. When thecoil inductance is large, you can increase the P gain. When the coil inductance is small, you can reduce the Pgain. If I gain is set too large, it will cause current oscillation.

P8.10 Torque control mode Setting range: 0~2 [0]0: Operation according to the speed controlmode 1: Operation according to the torque control mode

2: Operation according to the torque motormode

Explanation: When the setting is 0, the frequency inverter outputs according to the setting frequency. The output torque

matches with the load torque automatically, but the output torque is limited by the torque upper limit. Whenthe load torque is larger than the setting torque upper limit, the frequency inverter output torque is limited.The output frequency is different from the setting frequency.

PI parameter

Frequency HZ

Sparex India



144

When the setting is 1, frequency inverter outputs according to the setting torque. At this time, the outputfrequency automatically matches with the load speed, but limited by the Upper limit frequency limit. Whenthe load speed is greater than the upper limit frequency, the frequency inverter output frequency is limited.The output torque is different from the setting torque.

When in torque control, torque command is the torque limit, which is set by the torque upper limit source.You can switch through multi function input terminal torque and speed mode. When in torque control, thefrequency inverter output automatic tracking load speed changes, but the output frequency change speed isinfluenced by the setting acceleration and deceleration time. If it needs accelerate tracking speed, youshould shorten deceleration time. When the setting torque of the frequency inverter is greater than the loadtorque, the frequency inverter output frequency will rise. When the frequency inverter output frequencyreaches the upper limit frequency, frequency inverter will be operated at upper limit frequency. When thesetting torque of the frequency inverter is less than the load torque, the frequency inverter output frequencywill decrease, but not limited by the lower limiting frequency limit.

When the setting is 2, operates according to the torque motor mode. The main feature of the torque motor issoft mechanical property. It can be rotor-blocking. When the load torque increases, it can automaticallyreduce the speed.

P8.11 Torque upper limit source Setting range: 0~5 [0]0: Digital setting 1: AI12: AI2 3: AI3 (Reserved for 3004GB and the below)4: Pulse input 5: Serial communicationP8.12 Upper Limit of Driving Torque Setting range: 0.0%~200.0% [160%]P8.13 Upper Limit of Brake Torque Setting range: 0.0%~200.0% [160%]

Explanation: If the driving torque source is digitally set, what P8.12 AND p8.13 set will be the actual torque values.

P8.14 Command Slip Compensation Factor Setting range: 0.0%~200.0% [102.4%]Notes: With the vector control manner, the parameter makes compensation for the torque command. The output

current can be changed by revising the parameter. Generally, revision is not suggested.

P8.15 Torque acceleration time Setting range: 0.00~120.0s [0.5s]P8.16 Torque deceleration time Setting range: 0.00~120.0s [0.5s]

Explanation: Set the torque acceleration and deceleration time in torque mode. This function is invalid in the speed mode. The time that torque from 0 to rated torque is torque acceleration time. The time from rated torque to 0 is

torque deceleration time

P8.17 Driving slip compensation gain Setting range: : 50.0%~200.0% [130.0%]Notes:

For the speed-sensor-free vector control, if the load operation is unstable at the low speed, the parameter canbe increased appropriately.

P8.18 Brake slip compensation gain Setting range: : 50.0%~200.0% [117.0%]Notes:

For the speed-sensor-free vector control, the parameter is used to adjust the stable-speed precision of motor: ifthe speed is low when the motor is loaded, the parameter should be increased; if the speed is high, theparameter should be reduced.

P8.19 Zero servo function enable(reserve) Setting range:

0: Zero servo function prohibited 1: Zero servo function permitted [0]

Sparex India



145

P8.20 Zero servo initial frequency(reserve) Setting range: 0.00~10.00Hz [0.30Hz]

P8.21 Zero servo gain (reserve) Setting range:1. 0~99.99(G5) [1.00]P8.22Zero servo tolerance (reserve) Setting range: 0~16383 [10]

Notes:Parameters related to zero-servo are reserved temporarily.

P8.23 Zero-speed Torque Boosting Setting range: 0.0~50.0% [0.0%]P8.24 Zero-speed Threshold Setting range: 0~20% [5%]

Notes: P8.23 zero-speed torque boosting is to provide the additional output torque at the startup, so the motor can

overcome the static friction and start smoothly when the set torque is small. The zero-speed threshold setting range corresponds to the 0~20% maximum output frequency.

P8.25 Brake Torque Setting Source Setting Range: 0~5 [0]0: consistent with the final setting value of

driving torque calculated with P8.11 1: AI1

2: AI2 3: AI3 (3004GB and the below are reserved)4: Impulse Input 5: Serial Communications

P8.26 High-speed Torque Make-up Gain Setting range: 40.0~160.0% [0.0%]P8.27 High-speed Torque Make-up Base Setting range: 0~1 [0]0: Make-up based on the operation frequency 1: Make-up based on the linear speed (Reserved)

Notes: As the operation speed increases, the mechanical system will consume more and more torque, and the

high-speed torque is to make up for the torque consumed by the mechanical system to keep basicallyunchanged the torque gained by the effective load.

What P8.26 sets is the maximum make-up and 100.0% corresponds to the rating output torque of motor.When the make-up base is “make-up based on the operation frequency”, the relationship between the torquemake-up and the present operation frequency is showed in Figure 5-8-2:

转矩补偿量

最大补偿量（P8.26）

运行频率(Hz)最大输出频率0

Figure 5-8-2 Relationship between the High-speed Torque Make-up and the Output Frequency

P8.28 Pre-excitation Time Setting Range: 0.00~120.0s [0.5s]Notes: The function of pre-excitation is used to establish the magnetic field before the asynchronous motor starts.

The parameter sets the duration time of this process.

Maximum OutputFrequency

Operation Frequency (Hz)

MaximumMake-up(P8.26)

Torque Make-up

Sparex India



146

5.10 V/F Control (Group P9)P9.00 V/F curves setting Setting range: 0~4 [0]

0: Constant Torque Characteristic Curve 0 1: Reduction Torque Characteristic Curve 1 (2.0)

2: Reduction Torque Characteristic Curve 2(1.5) 3: Reduction Torque Characteristic Curve 1 3 (1.2)

P9.01 V/F frequency value F1 Setting range: 0.0~P9.03 [10.00Hz]

P9.02 V/F voltage value V1 Setting range: 0~100.0% [20.0%]

P9.03V/F frequency value F2 Setting range: P9.01~P9.05 [25.00Hz]


P9.05 V/F frequency value F3 Setting range: P9.03~P0.09 [40.00Hz]


Notes: This group of function codes define the flexible V/F setting manner of the series frequency inverter to satisfy

the different load characteristic needs.

Figure 5-9-1 Torque-reducing curve

When 4 is selected for P9.00, the user can self-define the V/F curve through P9.01~P9.06. As showed inFigure 5-9-2, the V/F curve is defined with the four-point broken line to be adapted for the special loadcharacteristics. Notes: V1<V2<V3. In the case of low frequency, if the voltage is set to be too high, themotor may be overheated and even burned, and the frequency inverter may stall over current or beover-current protected.

Sparex India



147

Figure. 5-9-2 V/F-curve defined by user

P9.07Torque boost mode Setting range: 0.0~30.0% [0.0%]

Notes: To make up for the low-frequency torque characteristic, certain boost compensation can be made for the

output voltage. When the function code is set as 0.0%, it is at the V/F control mode; when it is not set as 0,it is at the manual torque boost mode, as showed in Figure 5-9-3.

Output voltage

Output Freq.Basic operation frequencyCut-off Freq. for torque boost

Manualtorque boost

Max output voltage

Figure 5-9-3 Manual Torque Boost

Tips:

1. Wrong parameter setting can cause overheat or over-current protection of the motor.2. When the inverter drives synchronous motor, torque boost function is recommended to be used and V/F curveshould be adjusted according to the motor parameters.

P9.08 Cut-off point used for manual torqueboost Setting range: 0.00~50.00Hz [16.67 Hz]

Notes: This function defines the cutoff frequency for manual torque boost as showed in Figure 5-9-3. The cutoff

frequency is applicable to any V/F curve determined by P9.00.

P9.09 Gain of slip frequency compensation Setting range: 0.0~250.0% [0.0%]P9.10 Slip compensation time const Setting range: 0.01~2.55S [0.20S]

Sparex India



148

Notes: The motor’s slip changes with the load torque, which results in the variance of motor speed. The inverter

output frequency can be adjusted automatically through slip compensation according to the load torque.Therefore, the electrical characteristics of the mechanical hardness are improved. As shown in Figure. 5-9-4.

Synchronous speed

n

T

Freq. aftercompensation Compensation Freq. f

Load torqueFigure. 5-9-4 Auto slip compensation diagram

In the case of rating torque, the slip compensation value is equal to compensation gain (P9.09) × rating slip(synchronous rotating speed – rating rotating speed);Motor-driving state: when the actual rotating speed is lower than the given speed, the compensation gain(P9.09) should be increased gradually;Power-generation state: when the actual rotating speed is higher than the given speed, the compensationgain (P9.09) should be increased gradually.

Tips:

The automatic slip compensation is related to the rating slip of motor. When the slip compensation function is used,the rating rotating speed of motor should be set correctly (PA.03 and PA.17).When the compensation gain is 0, the slip compensation will be ineffective.

P9.11 Energy saving control selection Setting range: 0.1 [0]

0: Effective Energy Conservation 1: Ineffective Energy ConservationNotes: The energy saving control parameters have been preset at the factory to the optimum values. It is not necessary

to adjust them under normal operation. If your motor characteristic has great difference from those ofstandard induction motors, refer to the following description to adjust the parameters.

P9.12 Energy saving gain coefficient Setting range: 0.00~655.3 [This value depends on the invertermodel]

Notes: In the energy conservation control mode, the energy conservation gain factor is used to calculate the voltage of

motor at its highest efficiency, which is used as the output voltage. The energy conservation factor P9.12 ispreset according to the value of standard motor before it leaves the factory. When the energy conservationgain factor increases, the output voltage will increase as well.

P9.13 Energy saving voltage lowerlimit(50Hz)

Setting range: 0~120% [50%]

P9.14 Energy saving voltage lowerlimit(5Hz)

Setting range: 0~25% [12%]

Notes: These parameters are used to set the lower limit of output voltage. If the voltage reference value calculated in

the energy saving mode is smaller than the energy saving voltage lower limit, the energy saving voltagelimit will be treated as the output voltage reference. To prevent the motor stalling at light loads, the energysaving voltage lower limit must be set. Set voltage limits at 5Hz and 50Hz; the setting value is obtained by

Sparex India



149

linear interpolation if the frequency is out range of 5Hz to 50Hz. The setting value is made by thepercentage of motor rated voltage.

Figure. 5-9-5 Energy saving voltage lower limit

In the energy saving control mode, the optimum voltage is calculated according to load power, and the voltageis supplied to the load. However, the set parameter may vary because of temperature variations or usingvarious manufacturers’ motors; therefore, the optimum voltage may not be supplied in some cases.Automatic fine-tuning control voltage maintains highly efficient operation.

P9.15 Time of average power Setting range: 1~200×(25ms) [5]

Notes: Preset the time of average power calculating in energy-saving control mode. The setting range of P9.15 is

25ms×(1~200).

P9.16 AVR function Setting range: 0~2 [2]0: Disabled 1: Enabled always2: Disabled in decelerating process

Notes: AVR means automatic output voltage regulation. When AVR function is invalid, the output voltage will

fluctuate when the power supply voltage fluctuates. When it is valid, the output voltage would not fluctuateas the input voltage. The output voltage will keep constant within the inverter output capacity.

P9.17 Over modulation enable Setting range: 0.1 [0]

0: ineffective; the overmodulation function isnot started 1: effective; the overmodulation function is started

Notes: When the over modulation function is enabled, the inverter voltage output capacity can be improved. However,

if the output voltage is too high, the output current harmonics will increase.

P9.18 Drop control (load distribution) Setting range: 0.00~10.00Hz [0.00Hz]Notes: The function is applicable on the occasion where many frequency inverters drive the same load. By setting the

function, power can be distributed evenly when many frequency inverters drive the same load. When the load current of a frequency inverter is >50%, the inverter will reduce the output frequency

appropriately automatically according to parameters set with the function to discharge certain load. Once theload current <=50%, stop reducing the frequency. If the load current is larger than 50% all the time, theoutput frequency should be reduced to the setting value of –P9.18.

Sparex India



150

Tips:

When the slip compensation and the droop control cannot be effective concurrently, the slip compensation willenjoy the higher priority.

M M

Load

Inverter 1 Inverter 2

Belt

Figure 5-9-6 Droop Control Motor Characteristic

P9.19 Output voltage offset source Setting range: 0~5 [0]0: Digital setting 1: Terminal AI12: Terminal AI2 3: Terminal AI34: Pluse input 5: communication givenP9.20 Output voltage offset Setting range: 0.0%~100.0% [0.0%]

Notes: In the V/F separation mode, the actual output voltage is the set output voltage bias. (100% corresponding to

the maximum output voltage)

Tips:

The function is valid only in the V/F separate mode

P9.21 Oscillation Inhibition Factor Setting range:0~100 [0]Notes: In the case of no oscillation with the motor, please select the factor as 0. The factor will be increased

appropriately only when the motor oscillates obviously and cannot operate normally. The larger the factor is,the more obviously oscillation is inhibited. The method for the factor selection is to select the smallestfactor as possible in the premise that oscillation is inhibited effectively in case that no great effect is causedon the control performance.

5.11 Motor Parameters (Group PA)PA.00 Motor selection Setting range :0.1 [0]0: Use motor 1 1: Use motor 2

Explanation:

You can select to set the two motor parameters in this function code to switch motor 1 and motor 2.

Tips

After select the motor model, if the motor overload protection is externally-connected sensor, you must setPd.01 ~ Pd.04 correspondingly.

PA.01 Number of Poles for Motor 1 Setting range :2~56 [4]PA.02 Rating Power of Motor 1 Setting range : 0.4～999.9kW [Based on Motor Type]PA.03 Rating Rotating Speed of Motor 1 Setting range : 0～24000r/min [Based on Motor Type]

Sparex India



151

PA.04 Rating Current of Motor 1 Setting range : 0.1～999.9A [Based on Motor Type]Notes: PA.01~PA.04 are used to set the parameters of the controlled motor 1. To ensure the control performance,

please do set relevant values correctly according to parameters on the motor nameplate. The motor power should match that of the inverter. Generally, the motor power is allowed to be 20% lower

than that of the inverter or 10% higher; otherwise, the control performance would not be ensured.

PA.05 No-load Current I0 of Motor 1 Setting range: 0.1~999.9A [Depending on model]PA.06 Stator Resistance R1of Motor 1 Setting range:0.001~65.000Ω [Depending on model]PA.07 Stator Leakage Inductance L1 of Motor1 Setting range:0.1~2000.0mH [Depending on model]

PA.08 Rotor Resistance R2 of Motor 1 Setting range:0.001~65.000Ω [Depending on model]PA.09 Mutual Inductive Impedance Lm ofMotor 1 Setting range:0.1~2000.0mH [Depending on model]

PA.10 Magnetic Saturation Coefficient 1ofMotor 1 Setting range:0.0%~100.0% [Depending on model]

PA.11 Magnetic Saturation Coefficient 2 ofMotor 1 Setting range:0.0%~100.0% [Depending on model]

PA.12 Magnetic Saturation Coefficient3 ofMotor 1 Setting range:0.0%~100.0% [Depending on model]



Notes:If the motor parameters are unknown, please refer to the PA.29 motor parameters setting instruction. If they areknown, please write them down for PA.05~PA.09 correspondingly.The motor magnetic saturation coefficients will be set automatically in the time of self-setting and doesn’t have to beset by users.

PA.15Motor 2 pole number Setting range:2~56 [4]PA.16Motor 2 rated power Setting range:0.4~999.9kW [Depending on model]PA.17Motor 2 rated speed Setting range:0~24000r/min [Depending on model]PA.18Motor 2 rated current Setting range:0.1~999.9A [Depending on model]PA.19Motor 2 no-load current I0 Setting range:0.1~999.9A [Depending on model]PA.20Motor 2 stator resistance R1 Setting range:0.001~65.000Ω [Depending on model]PA.21Motor 2 stator leakage inductance L1 Setting range:0.1~2000.0mH [Depending on model]PA.22Motor 2 rotor resistance R2 Setting range:0.001~65.000Ω [Depending on model]PA.23Motor 2 mutual inductive reactanceLm Setting range:0.1~2000.0mH [Depending on model]

PA.24 Motor 2 magnetic saturationcoefficient 1 Setting range:0.0%~100.0% [Depending on model]





Notes:

Sparex India



152

The parameters setting of motor 2. The detailer settings are the same as motor 1. The settings are valid after thePA.00 is set to 2.

PA.29 Motor parameter setting Setting range: 0~2 [0]0: No operation 1: Static parameter setting2: Rotation parameter setting

Notes No operation 1: static parameter setting; it is applicable on occasions where a motor and load cannot be disconnected easily

and rotary setting is disabled. When the function code is set and able to RUN, the frequency converter will setthe function form PA.06~PA.08 / PA.20~PA.22 automatically.PA.05, PA.09 / PA.19 and PA.23 should be set manually according to the standard motor parameters.

2: Rotary parameter setting; to ensure the dynamic control performance of frequency converter, please selectthe rotary parameter setting. At setting, the motor should be disconnected from the load (no load). When thefunction code is set and is able to RUN, it means that automatic setting is enabled.

Tips:

1. Before the parameters setting, please enter the correct nameplate parameter of the controlled motor(PA.01 ~ PA.04 PA.15 ~ PA.18).

2. When rotation setting, you should let the motor off from the load. It is banned that setting with the load.3. Before parameter setting, please confirm the motor is in stoppingstopping state. Otherwise, it cannot be

normal.4. After the parameter setting process is completed (including abnormal end) , it is automatically set to 0.5. During the process of parameter setting, the operation panel will display “- At-”. If the parameter setting isunsuccessful, the operation panel will display “AtE”.

Notes:At the time of static setting, the motor no-load current calculation method and the motor mutual inductance

calculation method are showed in the following formulae. Among them, L is the motor leakage inductance, 0I is

the no-load current, mL is the mutual inductance, is the motor efficiency, I is the rating current of motor, U is

the rating voltage of motor, and f is the fundamental frequency of motor.

No load current: 20 1I I

Mutual inductance calculations m02 3 f

UL LI

The specific meanings of the above motor parameters are showed in Figure 5-10-1.

1U

1R 1jX

mR

mX

2jX

sR2

0I1I

2I

Figure 5-10-1 Stable-state Equivalent Circuit Diagram of the Asynchronous Motor

In Figure 5-10-1, R1, Xl, R2, X2, Xm and I0 represent the stator resistance, stator leakage inductive impedance,rotor resistance, rotor leakage inductive impedance, mutual inductive impedance and no-load current.

Sparex India



153

5.12 MODBUS Communication (Group Pb)The series of frequency inverters can conduct the serial communication via the MODBUS communication protocoland the programmable logic controller (PLC). MODBUS consists of a controlling PLC and 1-31 frequency invertersof this series. The signal transmission between the controlling and the controlled is always started and done by thecontrolling, while the controlled responds to the signal.The controlling frequency inverter conducts the signal transmission with one controlled frequency inverter once. Thecontrolled frequency inverter will perform its function and respond to the controlling inverter after receiving thecommand sent by the controlling inverter. Communication Specification

Interface: RS-485 Synchronization Manner: half-duplex asynchronous Transmission Parameters:

Baud rate: Selectable from 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 BPS (parameter Pb.00)Data length: fixed at 8 bitsParity: even parity/no parity/odd parity selectable (parameter Pb.02)Stop bit: fixed at 1 bitProtocol: In accordance with MODBUSMaximum number of units to be connected: 31 units

Data sent/received through communication: data sent/received through communication include the operationcommand, frequency giving, fault content, invert state and setting & reading of function parameters. Themonitoring content and the reading &writing function parameters can be read through starting up by default;

Pb.00 Baud rate selection Setting range:0~5 [3]0: 1200 bps 1: 2400 bps2: 4800 bps 3: 9600 bps4: 19200 bps 5: 38400 bps

Pb.01 Address of the Inverter Setting Range: 0~31 [1]Notes: The address of the inverter set cannot be the same with the addresses of other controlled devices connected to

the same transmission line.

Pb.02 Even-odd Check Selection Setting Range: 0~2 [0]0: Even Check2: No Check 1:Odd Check

Pb.03 Communication Timeout Check Time Setting Range: 0~100.0s [0.0s]

Notes: 0:there is no timeout check Non-0: there is the timeout check. The system will check the communication state at the interval of the Pb.03

setting value. If there is no normal data receive or sent, the system will report the external communicationfault (EF0) and stop the machine; the fault should be cleared manually;

Tips:

If only abnormal data are received during the timeout check, they will not be used as the base for being incommunication and fault will be reported;

Pb.04 Response delay time Setting range: 0~500ms [5ms]Notes: It refers to the time from inverter receiving the host PC command to returning response frame to it.

Sparex India



154

Pb.05 MODBUS frequency reference unit Setting range: 0.1 [0]0: 0.01Hz 1: 0.1Hz

Notes: The frequency unit can be selected for the PLC frequency command. The output frequency resolution rate for this series of frequency inverters is 0.01Hz. When the frequency

command unit of the function code Pb.05 is selected as 0, i.e. 0.01Hz, the given frequency value it receiveswill be treated as 0.01Hz directly. If the unit is selected as 1:0.1Hz, it will be converted into 0.10Hz internallyautomatically. If the frequency command received is 01F4 (16 hexadecimal of 500), when Pb.05 selects 0, itwill be treated as 5.00Hz by the system; when Pb.05 selects 1, it will be converted into 50.0 (0) Hz by thesystem automatically.

Pb.06 Selection of MODBUS data storage Setting range: 0.1 [0]0: Not save to EEPROM 1: Directly save to EEPROM

Notes: This function code is used to select whether to save the MODBUS data to EEPROM or not. If pb.06 is set as 1,

parameters that modified by MODBUS communication will be saved to EEPROM directly. However, if Pb.06is set as 0, the modified parameters will not be saved to EEPROM, but stored in RAM and they will be lostwhen power is off. The other method to save the data to EEPROM is that write the MODBUS addresscorresponding to the modified parameter to 0x00FF, then the data will be saved to EEPROM which acts as the“ENTER “key to save the data.

Write or erase EEPROM frequently will reduce the life of EEPROM. Write parameter data and save the datato EEPROM frequently in communication mode is not allowed; for writing data frequently, you must modifyPb.06 as 0.

Pb.07 CCF6 Fault Handling Setting range:0.1 [0]0: Not generate fault and keep on running 1: Generate fault and stop

Notes:This function code is used to decide whether to generate communication fault or not. When the value is 1, ifcommunication fault occurs, the keypad will display CCF6 and the inverter stop as fault occurs; when thevalue is 0, it doesn't generate the fault and the inverter will keep on running.

5.13 Display Control (Group PC)PC.00 LCD Language selection Setting range: 0.1 [0]0: Chinese, display Chinese prompt in LCD screen; 1: English, display English prompt in LCD screen.

Notes:This function is only effective for the keypad equipped with LCD. The LED keypad only displays the segment codecharacters or figures.

PC.01 Output frequency (Hz) (Beforecompensation) Setting range: 0.1 [1]

PC.02 Output frequency (Hz) (Actual) Setting range: 0.1 [0]0: No display 1: Display

Notes: When PC.01 is set as 1, the output frequency before compensation will be displayed in the monitoring state,

and the indicator light will indicate the unit Hz; if it is set as 0, the output frequency before compensation andthe unit will not be displayed.

When PC.02 is set as 1, the actual output frequency will be displayed in the monitoring state, and the unit isHz; if it is set as 0, the target will not be displayed.

PC.03 Output current (A) Setting range: 0.1 [1]0: No display 1: Display

Sparex India



155

Notes: When PC.03 is set as 1, the output current will be displayed in the monitoring state and the unit is A. If it is

set as 0, the target will not be displayed.

PC.04 Frequency Setting (Hz Flickering) Setting Range: 0, 1 [1]0: non-displayed 1: displayed

Notes: PC.04 can be set as 1. The monitoring target can be selected by pressing the button. When the target is

selected, the unit is indicated as Hz and is flickering. If P0.03 is set as 1, it can be set via the numbers on thekeypad and can be adjusted with the number knob. The user can adjust the set frequency with the numberknob. If P0.17 is set as 0, the adjustment rate can be adjusted from 0.01Hz to 0.1Hz, even to the maximum of1Hz to realize the rapid increase or decrease of frequency by turning the knob continuously. Please refer toP0.17 for details.

PC.05 Rotate speed (r/min) Setting range: 0.1 [1]PC.06Reference speed (r/min flashes) Setting range: 0.1 [0]0: : No display 1: display

Notes: When PC.05 is set as 1, the operating rotating speed will be displayed in the monitoring state and the unit is

r/min. If it is set as 0, the target will not be displayed. When PC.06 is set as 1, the set rotating speed will be displayed in the monitoring state and the unit is r/min

and is flickering. If PC.06=1, when the user switches to PC.05 or PC.06 by pressing >>, the following will be displayed: if it is

the ordinary operation and P0.03 is set as 1 (set with the numbers on the keypad), the set rotating speed canbe adjusted on line and the corresponding frequency value will be saved to P0.02 after pressing ENTER; if itis the PID operation, and P7.00 is set as 0, P7.03 is set as 0:PG or single-phase speed-measuring input, thespeed PID giving can be adjusted on line and be saved in P7.08 after pressing ENTER; if P7.03 is not 0:PG orthe single-phase speed-measuring input, it cannot be adjusted. PC.06 will be displayed during the on-lineadjustment. After adjustment is over, the target before adjustment will be displayed.

PC.07 Linear speed (m/s) Setting range:: 0.1 [0]PC.08 Reference linear speed (m/s flashes) Setting range:: 0.1 [0]0: No display 1: Display

Notes: When PC.07 is set as 1, the operation linear speed will be displayed in the monitoring state and the unit is m/s

(the indicator light m/s is on). If it is set as 0, the target will not be displayed. When PC.08 is set as 1, the set linear speed will be displayed in the monitoring state and the unit is m/s (the

indicator light m/s is on and flickering) (the target cannot be adjusted on line).

PC.09 Output power Setting range: 0.1 [0]0: No display 1: Display

Notes: When PC.09 is set as 1, the output power (no unit is displayed) will be displayed in the monitoring state. If it

is set as 0, the target will not be displayed.

PC.10 Output torque (％) Setting range: 0.1 [0]0: No display 1: Display

Notes: If PC.10 is set to 1, output torque will be displayed with unit “%” in monitoring state. If PC.10 is set to 0,

output torque will not be displayed.

PC.11 Output voltage (V) Setting range: 0.1 [0]PC.12 Bus voltage (V) Setting range: 0.1 [0]

Sparex India



156

0: No display 1: DisplayNotes: If PC.11 is set to 1, output voltage will be displayed in monitoring state, and the unit indicator “V” will be

lit up. If it is set to 0, output voltage will not be displayed. If PC.12 is set to 1, bus voltage will be displayed in monitoring state, and the unit indicator “V” will be lit

up. If it is set to 0, bus voltage will not be displayed.

PC.13 AI1 (V) Setting range: 0.1 [0]PC.14 AI2 (V) Setting range: 0.1 [0]PC.15 AI3 (V) (Reserved for 3004GB and thebelow) Setting range: 0.1 [0]

0: No display 1: DisplayNotes: If PC.13 is set to 1, analog input voltage AI1 will be displayed in monitoring state, and the unit indicator “V”

will be lit up . If it is set to 0, analog input voltage AI1 will not be displayed. If PC.14 is set to 1, analog input voltage AI2 will be displayed in monitoring state, and the unit indicator “V”

will be lit up. If it is set to 0, analog input voltage AI2 will not be displayed. If PC.15 is set to 1, analog input voltage AI3 will be displayed in monitoring state, and the unit indicator “V”

will be lit up . If it is set to 0, analog input voltage AI1 will not be displayed.

PC.16 Analog PID feedback (no unit) Setting range: 0.1 [0]PC.17 Analog PID feed (no unit) Setting range: 0.1 [0]0: No display 1: Display

Notes: Analog PID setting/feedback: the physical quantity percentage corresponding to the Analog × analog closed

loop range When PC.16 is set as 1, the analog PID feedback will be displayed in the monitoring state without the

indication unit. If it is set as 0, the target will not be displayed. When PC.17 is set as 1, the analog PID setting can be displayed in the monitoring state. When P7.00 is set as

0 and P7.08 is not as 0, the analog PID setting can be adjusted on lone by switching to PC.16 or PC.17 withthe shift key >> and will be saved in P7.06 after pressing ENTER. During the on-line adjustment, PC.17 willbe displayed. The target before adjustment will be displayed after adjustment is over.

PC.18 External counting value (no unit) Setting range: 0.1 [0]0: No display 1: Display

Notes: If PC.18 is set to 1, external count value will be displayed in monitoring state, and all unit indicators will be

off. If it is set to 0, external count value will not be displayed.

PC.19 Terminal status (no unit) Setting range: 0.1 [0]0: No display 1: Display

Notes: When PC.19 is set as 1, the terminal state will be displayed. If it is set as 0, the target will not be displayed. The terminal state information includes the state of the multifunctional terminals X1~X11, two-way open

collector output terminals D0, Y1, Y2, Y3, output relay 1 and output relay 2. The state of the functionterminals is indicated by ON/OFF of the specified segment of an LED digital tube. If the digital tube segmentis on, it indicates that the state of the corresponding terminal is the effective state; if it is off, it indicates thestate is the ineffective state. There are four constantly-on stroke segments with the digital tube to facilitateobservation. It is showed as in Figure 5-12-1:

Sparex India



157

Figure 5-12-1 Terminal State Indication

PC.20 Actual length (m) Setting range: 0.1 [0]0: No display 1: Display

Notes: If PC.20 is set to 1, the actual length will be displayed in monitoring state, and all unit indicators will be off.

If it is set to 0, actual length will not be displayed.

PC.21 Power on display Setting range: 1~20 [1]Notes: PC.21 startup display selection: the function code is used to set the priority display parameters at startup. The

setting values 1~20 correspond to PC.01~PC.20 respectively. When the display control of the displayparameter set is 0 and not displayed, search backwards from the current value set (from the smallest numberto the largest and return to 1 when reaching 20) until the display control of non-0 appears and is displayed.

The priority display parameters at startup are only limited to the parameters of PC.01~PC.20 and are onlyvalid at startup. When there is a fault, warning or communication CALL displayed, the parameters will bedisplayed according to the original priority order and the current priority display will not act.

PC.22 Rotating speed display coefficient Setting range: 0.1~999.9% [100.0%]Notes: PC.22 (Rotating Speed display coefficient) is used to correct the bias of displayed rotating speed and it has no

influence on actual speed. Rotating Speed Set=Actual Rotating Speed Set ×PC.22 (PG) Rotating Speed Set=120×Running Frequency ÷ Motor Pole Number×PC.22 (Non-PG) Reference Rotating Speed=PID Reference Rotating Speed×PC.22 (PG)Reference Rotating Speed=120×Set

Frequency ÷ Motor Pole Number×PC.22 (Non-PG)PC.23 Linear Speed Coefficient Setting Range: 0.1~999.9% [100.0%]

Notes: PC.23 linear speed coefficient: It is used to revise the linear speed scale display error and has not effect on the

actual rotating speed. Linear speed = Running frequency × PC.23 (non PG) Linear speed = rotate speed × PC.23 (PG) Reference linear speed= reference frequency* PC.23 (non PG) Reference linear speed= reference speed × PC.23 (PG)

Tips:

Display Scope:Linear speed and Reference: 0.000~65.53m/s Output power 0~999.9kWOutput torque 0~300.0% Output voltage 0~999.9VBus voltage 0~1000V AI1/AI2 0.00~10.00VAI3 -10V~10V External counting value 0~65530

Sparex India



158

Actual length/Preset length 0.001~65.53m

5.14 Protection and Fault Parameters (Group Pd)Pd.00 Motor overload protection mode selection Setting range: 0~3 [1]0: Disabled1: Common motor (with low speed compensation)2: Variable frequency motor (without low speed compensation)

3: Sensor Protection (Immediate Over-threshold Protection)Notes: No Action

When 0 is selected, the frequency inverter has not overload protection of the lad motor, so it should beselected and used prudently;

Common Motor (Compensation at the Low Speed)As the fan of common motor is installed on the rotor shaft of motor and the fan rotates slowly in the case oflow speed, the heat radiation will get poor and the corresponding electronic thermal protection value will beadjusted appropriately, i.e. the overload protection threshold value of motor whose operation frequency islower than 30Hz is reduced.

Variable-frequency Motor (No Compensation at the Low Speed)As the fan of the special variable-frequency motor is not installed on the rotor shaft, the fan heat radiationwill not be affected by the rotating speed and the protection value in the case of low-speed operation shouldnot be adjusted.

Sensor Protection (Immediate Over-threshold Protection)The protection function of the external thermal relay of motor is realized.The protection threshold values of motor 1 and motor 2 are set through Pd.01 and Pd.03;The sensor passage is set through Pd.02 and Pd.04.

Pd.01 Motor 1 protection threshold value Setting range: 0.0~10.0V [10.0V]Pd.02 Motor 1 protection sensor input channel Setting range: ０~４ [０]Pd.03 Motor 2 protection threshold value Setting range:0.0~10.0V [10.0V]Pd.04 Motor 2 protection sensor input channel Setting range: ０~４ [０]

0: Terminal AI1 1: Terminal AI22: Terminal AI3 (Reserved for 3004GB and the below) 3: Pluse input4: communication setting

Pd.05 Electro-thermal protective value Setting range: 20~110% [100%]Notes: In order to apply effective overload protection to different kinds of motors, the Max output current of the

inverter should be adjusted as shown in Figure.5-13-1.

Sparex India



159

1 min

Time

Output current100% 200%

50% 100%

Motor overloadprotectivecoefficient

Figure. 5-13-1 Motor overload protection curve

Adjustment can be determined according to the following formula:

Rating Output Current of Frequency Inverter×100%

Allowed Max. Load Current

Among it, “Allowed Max. Load Current” is the rating current of motor generally.For the motor with the better heat resistance, the value can be increased by a little (e.g. 10%); for the motor with theweaker heat resistance, the value can be decreased by a little.

Tips:

When the rating current of motor doesn’t match with that of frequency inverter, the motor can be protectedeffectively by setting the value of Pd.05. When protection acts, PWM will be blocked and OL1 fault will bereported.

Pd.06 Pre-overload detection level Setting range: 20.0~200.0% [160.0%]Pd.07 Pd.07 Pre-overload detection time Setting range: 0.0~60.0s [60.0s]

Notes: The overload pre-alarm detection level (Pd.06) defines the current threshold of overload pre-alarm action. Its

set value corresponds to the percentage of the rating current of frequency inverter. The overload pre-alarm detection time (Pd.07) defines that the overload pre-alarm signal OLP2 will be given

out after the output current of frequency inverter keeps larger than the overload detection level (Pd.06) forcertain time continuously.

Overload pre-alarm state effective means that the working current of frequency inverter is over the overloaddetection level and its duration time is over the overload detection time.

ActionDetect time Detect time

Detect thresholdOutput current

EnabledTime

Time

Figure. 5-13-2 Overload pre-alarm function

Motor Overload Protective Coefficient Value =

Sparex India



160

Tips:

1. For setting of the overload pre-alarm detection level\detection time, it should be generally ensured that thepre-alarm occurs earlier than the overload protection action of frequency inverter.

2. Within the overload pre-alarm detection time, if the working current is less than the overload pre-alarmdetection level, the overload pre-alarm detection time inside the inverter will be reset.

Pd.08 Current amplitude limit Setting range:0~3 [1]

0: Invalid 1: Valid during Acceleration and deceleration, invalid inconstant speed Operation

2: Valid 3: Reduce the operation speed in the case of overloadPd.09 Current amplitude limiting level Setting range:80~180% [160%]

Notes: When the inverter is running at Acc/Dec or constant speed, there may be a sharp increase in the current,

because of the unmatched of acc time and motor inertia, or the mutation of load torque. In order to control theoutput current, when Pd.08 is set to 1 and 2 or 3, the inverter’s output frequency may be adjustedautomatically.

When it is set as 1 or 2 for acceleration or deceleration, if the output current value reaches the current limitaction level Pd.09, the output frequency of frequency inverter will not change until the current is restored tothe normal and the final control current will not be higher than the PD.09 value.

In the case of stable-speed operation, if Pd.08 is selected as 2, the current value will reach the current limitaction level Pd.09, the frequency inverter will reduce the output frequency according to the deceleration time4 and restore to the original working state after the current is reduced. If Pd.08 is selected as 1, the outputfrequency of frequency inverter will not change.

If Pd.08 is selected as 3, the current value will reach the current limit action level Pd.09 and last for the timeset by Pd.20, then the frequency inverter will reduce the output frequency according to the deceleration time 4and restore to the original working state after the current is reduced.

During the process of deceleration, if the frequency inverter is at the state of current limit for over 1min, theOL2 overload alarm of frequency inverter will be given out and the motor will stop freely; or by pressing thebutton of STOP/RESET twice (at the interval not less than 2s), the OL2 overload alarm of frequency inverterwill be given out and the motor will stop freely.

Output Freq.(Hz)

0

Time(s)Output current ％

0

Time(s)AccelerationFigure. 5-13-3 Acceleration

Sparex India



161

Output Freq.(Hz)

0

Time(s)Output Current(%)

0Time(s)

Acc/Dec 4

Figure. 5-13-4 constant speed Operation

Pd.10 Over-voltage at stallfunction selection Setting range: 0.1 [1]

0: Disabled (The proposed option, when braking resistor is mounted) 1: EnabledPd.11 Over-voltage point atstall Setting Range: 120.0~150.0% busbar voltage

Notes: The busbar voltage is approximately equal to the input voltage×1.414. For the motor type with the input

voltage of 220V, the default value of Pd.11 is 120% (about 373V); for the motor type with the input voltageof 380V, the default value of Pd.11 is 140% (about 752V).

The dynamic braking action voltage point is also related to the parameter. For the motor type with the inputvoltage of 380V, the dynamic braking action voltage is 52V lower than the overvoltage stalling point (i.e. thedefault action point is 700V). For the motor type with the input voltage of 220V, it is 23V lower (i.e. thedefault action point is 350V).

During the decelerating operation of frequency inverter, the actual decrease rate of the motor rotating speedmay be lower than that of the output frequency for frequency inverter. In this case, the motor is at the state ofpower generation and will feed energy to the frequency inverter, which will cause the DC busbar voltage offrequency inverter to rise. If corresponding measures are not taken, the overvoltage fault will occur.

If Pd.10=1 is effective, when the DC busbar voltage rises to a certain value (≥Pd.11) during deceleration,deceleration will be paused and the frequency inverter will keep the output frequency unchanged.Deceleration will not be started again until the DC busbar voltage is reduced.

When the frequency inverter is at the overvoltage stalling state for over 1min continuously, the Ouovervoltage alarm will be reported and the motor will stop freely; or by pressing the button STOP/RESETand then pressing the button STOP/RESET twice (at the interval not less than 2s), the frequency inverter willreport the overvoltage and the motor will stop freely.

Sparex India



162

Output Freq.(Hz)

0Time(s)

Bus voltage(%)

0Time(s)Deceleration

Figure. 5-13-5 Deceleration

Pd.12 Input Phase Loss Detection Benchmark Setting range:1~100% [100%]Pd.13 Input Phase Detection Time Setting range:2~255s [10s]

Notes: With this function, the input phase loss or the serious imbalance of the input three phases can be detected to

protect the frequency inverter. If the input phase loss protection is too sensitive, the detection benchmarkPd.12 and the detection time Pd.13can be increased appropriately. If it is not so sensitive, the detectionbenchmark Pd.12 and the detection timePd.13 can be reduced.

Pd.14 Output Phase Loss Detection Benchmark Setting Range: 0~100% [0%]Pd.15 Output Phase Detection Time Setting Range: 0.0~2.0s [0.2s]

Notes: With this function, the output phase loss or the serious imbalance of the output three phases can be detected to

protect the frequency inverter and motor. If the output phase loss protection is too sensitive, the detectionbenchmark and the detection time can be increased appropriately. If it is not so sensitive, the detectionbenchmark and the detection time can be reduced.

Pd.16 Enabling keypad keys UP/DN Setting range: 0.1 [0]0: Invalid 1: Enabled

Notes: In the case the digital encoder is damaged, the function can be set as 1 to enable the keypad key UP/DN

manner. The keypad key JOG acts as the UP key and the direction key acts as the DN key or via the combination key: the function can be enable by pressing the keys Shift +JOG for 5s (this manner

can only be set and effective when the function group is displayed, and will not be saved after power down)

Pd.16 Enabling keypad keys UP/DN Setting range: 0.1 [0]0: Invalid 1: Enabled

Notes: With this function, it can be set whether the alarm will be displayed in the case of abnormal analog signal;

when it is set as 1, if the analog signal 1/2/3 is abnormal, the alarm AE1/AE2/AE3 will be displayed; when itis set as 0, the alarm will not be displayed.

Pd.18 Automatic Resetting Times Setting Range: 0~10 [0]Pd.19 Resetting Interval Setting Range: 2.0~20.0s [5.0s]Pd.20 Confirmation Time before OvercurrentDeceleration Setting Range: 0~200ms [50ms]

Sparex India



163

Notes: Only three faults including OC, Ou and GF can be reset automatically. The three faults in operation can be reset automatically according to the set times Pd.18 and interval Pd.19.

During the resetting interval, output is blocked and the inverter operates with zero frequency. The inverterwill operate with the startup manner after automatic resetting is finished. When Pd.18 is set as 0, it means thatthere is not the function of automatic resetting, and protection should be done immediately.

Tips:

Be careful in using auto-reset function, otherwise human injury or material loss may occur.SC fault need 10 seconds waiting time for manual reset.

Pd.21Operation protection when power on Setting range: 0.1 [0]

0: No protection 1: ProtectionPd.22Operation protection after operation commandgiven mode switching Setting range: 0.1 [0]

0: Continuous operation 1: Stopping, restart to operate when receive newoperation command

Explanation: When Pd.21 is set to 1, it is the power-on operation protection, namely direct power when the operation

commands are valid. Frequency inverter will be powered on protection, until receive operation commandagain, the frequency inverter will work.

When the Pd.22 command switches the operation protection setting to 1, when the frequency inverter is in astopping state, after run command given mode switching, frequency inverter will not immediately run untilreceive operation command again. When the frequency inverter is in an operation state, command switch, thefrequency inverter will slow down, until receive operation command.

Pd.23 Action selection when rotor blocked (reserve) Setting range: 0.1 [0]

0: No execute anti-blocking rotation action serials 1: Execute anti-blocking rotation action serialsPd.24 Rotor-blocking action trigger condition(reserve) Setting range: 0~3 [2]

0: Output current over triggering level 1: Control terminal close2: Output current over setting or control terminal close 3: Timing execute periodicallyPd.25 Stalling Action Triggering Level (Reserved) Setting range:100.0%~300.0% [200%]Pd.26 Stalling Action Triggering Period (Reserved) Setting range:0.00h~200.0h [0.00h]

Pd.27 Positive Step Frequency (Reserved) Setting range:0.00Hz~Frequency upper limit[0.00Hz]

Pd.28 Positive Step Duration (Reserved) Setting range:0.0s~1000s [0.0s]

Pd.29 Negative Step Frequency (Reserved) Setting range:0.00Hz~Frequency upper limit[0.00Hz]

Pd.30 Negative Step Duration (Reserved) Setting range:0.0s~1000s [0.0s]Pd.31 Interval between Positive Step and Negative

Step (Reserved) Setting range:0.0s~1000s [0.0s]

Pd.32 Step Action Repetition Times (Reserved) Setting range:0~100 [0]

Pd.33 Software Current-limiting Point Setting Range:100.0%~250.0%Pd.34 Hardware Current-limiting Enabled Setting Ranged:0,1 [1]0: Prohibited 1: Allowed

Notes: The software current-limiting point 100.0% corresponds to the rating current of frequency inverter. The hardware current-limiting point is fixed as 160.0% of the rating current of frequency inverter. The

specific value is related to the inverter type.

Sparex India



164

Compared with the software current-limiting function, hardware current-limiting responds more quickly.Thus, it is suggested that hardware current-limiting function not be cancelled.

5.15 Running History Record (Group PE)

PE.00 Type of latest fault Setting range: Table 5-14-1 [NULL]PE.01 Output frequency at last fault Setting range: 0~Frequency upper limit [0.00Hz]PE.02 Reference frequency at last fault Setting range: 0~Frequency upper limit [0.00Hz]PE.03 Output current at last fault Setting range: 0~2 times of (rated current) [0.0A]PE.04 DC bus voltage at last fault Setting range: 0~1000V [0V]

Notes: If the frequency inverter fails during operation, the PWM output will be blocked immediately to enter the

fault protection state and the fault indicator light TRIP will be flickering. For working conditions during thetime of fault (e.g. output frequency, set frequency, output current, and DC busbar voltage, etc) and the faultcontent of recent three times can be found in the function code PE.01~PE.08. Instruction of fault types isshowed in Table 5-14-1:

Table 5-14-1 Instruction of Fault TypesFaultcode Description

Faultcode Fault categories

NULL No fault Uu1 Bus Under voltage

Uu2 Control circuit Under voltage Uu3 MC fault

OC1 Over current in Acc process OC2 Over current in Dec process

OC3 Over current in constant speed Operation Ou1 Over Voltage in Acc process

Ou2 Over Voltage in Dec process Ou3 Over voltage in constant speed operation

GF Ground Fault OH1 Heat-sink Overheat

OL1 Motor Overload OL2 Inverter Overload

SC Load Short-Circuit EFO External Fault of serial communication

EF1 External Fault of terminal SP1 Input phase failure or Unbalance

SPO Output phase failure or Unbalance CCF1

Control Circuit Fault 1: Transmissionbetween the inverter and keypad cannotbe established 5 seconds after supplyingpower.

CCF2

Control circuit fault 2: Transmission betweenthe inverter and keypad is established onceafter supplying power, but later transmissionfault continues for more than 2 seconds.

CCF3 EEPROM Fault

CCF4 AD Conversion Fault CCF5 RAM Fault

CCF6 CPU disturbance PCE Parameters copy Error

HE Hall current detection fault DE Fault categories

CUE Fault categories

PE.05 Running status at last fault Setting range: 0~3 [StP]0: StP Stop 1: Acc Accelerate

Sparex India



165

2: dEc Decelerate 3: con constant

PE.06 Fault History 1 (Last One) Setting range: Table 5-14-1 [NULL]PE.07 Fault History 2 Setting range: Table 5-14-1 [NULL]PE.08 Fault History 3 Setting range: Table 5-14-1 [NULL]

Notes: Memorize the types of the last 3 faults. See Table 5-14-1 for the details of faults.

PE.09 Total Operating time(h) Setting range: 0~65530h [0]PE.10 Total Power On time(h) Setting range: 0~65530h [0]PE.11 Total electric-consumption (MWh) Setting range: 0~9999MWh [0]PE.12 Total electric-consumption (KWh) Setting range: 0~999KWh [0]

Notes: Accumulated Operation Time (h): total time of the frequency inverter in the operation state Accumulated Startup Time (h): accumulated time of the frequency inverter in the startup state Accumulated Power Consumed (MWh): the highest level of accumulated power consumed by the frequency

inverter Accumulated Power Consumed (KWh): the lowest level of accumulated power consumed by the frequency

inverter

5.16 Protection of parameters (Group PF)

PF.00 User password Setting range: 0~9999 [0]Notes: User password setting: The initial value of user password is 0, which means the password protection function

is invalid. At this state, user can access all parameters and parameters content of Group PF. User Password Unlocking: after the user password is set and becomes effective, the password should be input

for unlocking to enter Group PF again. Otherwise, not all parameters in Group PF can be accessed. Changing the user password: If password protection function is effective, right password must be input first to

unlock. After unlocking, select PF.00, re-change this parameter value, and press “ENTER” to save the value.Now, the password changing is completed. Before changing the user password, remember to set PF.01 to 0, sothat all parameters are allowed to be changed.

Tips:

The password will become effective when you press “PRG/ESC” to exit from Group PF if you set userpassword.Please remember the password, otherwise, you will have no access to all parameters of Group PF.If you forget user password, please contact with manufacturer,Example: Set the password to 1234, then exit from Group PF and unlock the user password. The process isshown in Figure. 5-15-1 and Figure. 5-15-2.

Sparex India



166

PF.00

Menulevel 3displayFunc.codePF.00

Go intouser

passwordsetting,initialvalue is

0

Shiftcursorto

right

Shiftcursorto

right

Enter tosaveuser

password.

Shiftcursorto

right

0000 1000 1000 1200 1200 1230 1230 1234 PF.00

Turnright 1timesto setthevalueto 1

＞＞＞＞＞＞ENTER ENTER+ + + +

-PF-

Menulevel 2displaygroupPF

LEDDisplay

Keyoperation

ENTER

Turnright 2times,to setthevalueto 2.



Figure. 5-16-1Flow chart of user password setting

-PF-

Menulevel 2,displayPF group

Go into userpassword

verification

Shiftcursorto

right

Shiftcursorto

right

LEDDisplay

KeyOperation

Enter to passpassword

verification,go into edit

state

Shiftcursorto

right

Turnright3

times

0000 1000 1000 1200 1200 1230 1230 1234 PF.00

Turnright4

times

turnright2

times

High bitbliniking

turnright 1times

＞＞＞＞＞＞ENTERENTER+ + + +

Figure. 5-152 Flow chart of user password unlocking

PF. 01 Parameter write-in protection Setting range: 0~2 [0]0: All parameters are allowed changing;1: Except the set frequency (P0.02) and this function code, other function codes are not allowed to be revised.2: Except the function code, the rest are not allowed to be revised.

Notes: PF.01 is set to 0: All parameters are allowed to be changed But only the parameters, which are marked “○” in

function table, can be changed no matter what the inverter is running or not. The parameters, which aremarked “×”can be only changed when the inverter is in stop state. Other parameters cannot be changed.About the changeable of parameters, refer to Chapter 4 for details. In addition, you can examine theparameters display on keypad. If any digit of the parameter is flashing, the parameter is allowed to change. Ifnone digit of the parameter is flashing, it cannot be changed.

PF.01set as 1: except the set frequency (P0.02) and this function code, other function codes are not allowed tobe revised.

PF.01set as 2: except the function code, the rest are not allowed to be revised.

Tips:

In the state of startup parameter monitoring, when PF.01 is set as 0, all parameters are allowed to be revised,and the set frequency, speed PID giving and analog PID digital giving can be adjusted and saved on line.When PF.01 is set as 1, only the set frequency can be adjusted and saved. When PF.01 is set as 2, all on-lineadjustments are invalid.

PF.02 Parameter initialization Setting range: 0~3 [0]0: No operation 1: Clear fault history2: reset the ex-factory value(except therecord\password\motor parameters)

3: reset the ex-factory value(except therecord\password)

Notes: When PF.02 is set as 0, there is no operation.

Sparex India



167

When PF.02 is set as 1, all fault records of PE.00~PE.08 in Group PE will be cleared to facilitate debuggingand fault analysis by the user.

When PF.02 is set as 2, the ex-factory values will be reset (except the operation history records, userpassword setting and motor parameters).

When PF.02 is set as 3, the ex-factory values will be reset (except the operation history records and userpassword setting).

Tips:

If user forget the setting value of parameters, and do not want to set them one by one, setting PF.02 to 2 can beused to rapidly restored to defaults, in favor of parameters resetting.After the historical fault records are cleared or the ex-factory values are reset, PF.02 will be restored to 0automatically, which means that the corresponding operation has been finished.

PF.03 Parameter copy Setting range: 0~3 [0]0: No action 1: Parameters download2: Parameters upload 3: Download parameters except motor’s

Notes: When PF.03 is set as 0, there is no action. When PF.03 is set as 1 and all parameters are downloaded, the user-set parameters saved on the keypad will

be copied to the frequency inverter. When PF.03 is set as 2 and parameters are uploaded, all parameters set by the user will be copied to

EEPROM of the keypad from the frequency inverter. When PF.03 is set as 3 and non-motor parameters are downloaded, the user-set parameters saved on the

keypad, except the motor parameters, will be copied to the frequency inverter.

Tips:

In the same working conditions, if the function of frequency inverter is applied, parameters set by the user canbe copied quickly to reduce the debugging and maintenance time.The function of parameter copying is only effective for the keypad with LCD. It will be restored to 0automatically after copying is finished.

PF.05 Product ID 1 Setting range: 0~9999 [Depending on model]PF.06 Product ID 2 Setting range: 0~9999 [Depending on model]

PF.07 Product ID 3 Setting range: 0~9999 [Depending on model]

PF.08 Product ID 4 Setting range: 0~9999 [Depending on model]

PF.09 Product series number Setting range: 0~9999 [Depending on model]

PF.10 Software version number Setting range: 0.00~99.99 [Depending on model]PF.11 Non-standard version and serial number Setting range: 0.000~9.999 [Depending on model]PF.12 Software identification code Setting range: 0~9999 [Depending on model]

Sparex India


Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

168


6.1 TroubleshootingWhen the inverter has detected a fault, the keypad will display the fault code, and the inverter will stop PWM outputand come into fault state. In the fault indicator TRIP will flicker, the fault relay will output the programmingfunction and the motor will coast to stop. At this time, you should find the reason of fault and apply correctiveactions. If the listed troubleshooting cannot solve the problem, please contact our company directly. After debugging,

you can press STOPRESET or replace external terminals to restart the inverter. Notes: the inverter can’t startup even

through debugging has been finished if operating signal isn’t removed, you should cut operating signal first and thenclose again or remove main circuit power supply once to make the fault reset. If the SC fault appeared, thereplacement is only permitted after 10 seconds. If you want to see the work condition (such as output frequency,

reference frequency, output current, bus voltage., etc) or contents of the latest three fault, please press PRGESC

to

enter into program state and then dial - + to see parameter value of function code PE.00~PE.08.

Table 6-1 Troubleshooting

FaultDisplay Name of Protection Possible Cause to Fault Countermeasure

Uu1 Busbar undervoltage The input voltage isabnormal

Check the voltage ofpower supply

Check and test theelectrical level settingUu2

The Undervoltage with the controlcircuit①

The control circuit is undervoltage

Uu3 The charging circuit is poor ① The contactor doesn’t pullin.

Check the chargingcircuit

OC1 Overcurrent with the acceleratedoperation

The acceleration time is tooshort

The V/F curve is notappropriate

The power voltage is low The frequency inverter

power is too small The frequency inverter

output load isshort-circuited.

Increase the accelerationtime

Adjust the V/F curvesetting and have theappropriate torque boostsetting

Check the input powersupply

Select the frequencyinverter with the largepower

Check the motor coilresistance and the motorinsulation

OC2 Overcurrent with the deceleratedoperation

The deceleration time is tooshort

The load inertia torque islarge

The frequency inverterpower is too small

The frequency inverteroutput load isshort-circuited

Increase the decelerationtime

Add the appropriatebrake componentsadditionally

Select the frequencyinverter with the largepower

Check the motor coilresistance and the motor

Sparex India



169


insulation

OC3 Overcurrent with theconstant-speed operation

Abnormal load The acceleration or

deceleration time is set tobe too short

The power voltage is low The frequency inverter

power is too small The frequency inverter

output load isshort-circuited

Check the load Increase the acceleration

or deceleration timeappropriately

Check the input powersupply

Select thefrequency-inverter withthe larger power

Check the motor coilresistance and the motorinsulation

Ou1 Overvoltage with the acceleratedoperation

The input voltage isabnormal

The acceleration time set istoo short

The stalling overvoltagepoint is too low

Check the input powersupply; check & test theelectrical level setting

Increase the accelerationtime appropriately

Raise the stallingovervoltage point

Ou2 Overvoltage with the deceleratedoperation


The deceleration time is tooshort




Increase the decelerationtime appropriately



Ou3 Overvoltage with theconstant-speed operation


The acceleration ordeceleration time is tooshort




Increase the decelerationtime appropriately



GF Output earthing The output earthing currentexceeds the specified value

Check whether the motorinsulation has becomepoor

Check whether theconnection line betweenthe frequency inverterand the motor is damaged

OH1 Heat radiator overheating

The environmenttemperature is too high

The air duct is blocked The fan works abnormally/

is damaged

Reduce the environmenttemperature

Clear the air duct Replace the fan

Sparex India



170


OL1 Motor overloaded

The frequency inverteroutput exceeds the motoroverload value

The V/F curve isinappropriate

The power grid voltage istoo low

The ordinary motoroperates at the low speedand with the large load fora long time

The motor stalls or the loadbecomes too large suddenly

Reduce the load Adjust the V/F curve and

the torque boost Check the power grid

voltage Select the special motor Check the load

OL2 Frequency inverteroverloaded

The frequency inverteroutput exceeds its overloadvalue

The DC brake quantity istoo large

The V/F curve is notappropriate

The power grid voltage istoo low

The load is too large The acceleration time is too

short The current limit level is

too low

Reduce the load andincrease the accelerationtime

Reduce the DC brakecurrent and increase thebrake time

Adjust the V/F curve andtorque boost

Check the power gridvoltage

Select the frequencyinverter with the largerpower

Increase the accelerationtime

Raise the current limitlevel

SCLoad short-circuit/outputearthing short-circuit③

The frequency inverteroutput load isshort-circuited

The output side earthing isshort-circuited

Check whether theconnection time betweenthe frequency inverterand the motor is damaged

Check the motor coilresistance

Check the motorinsulation

EF0 External fault with the RS485serial communication

3） The serial (MODBUS)transmission is wrong

4） Fault caused by the externalcontrol circuit

Set the correct timeoutdetection time or set thePb.03 timeout detectiontime as 0.0s

Check the externalcontrol circuit

Check the input terminalconditions. If terminalsare not used but the faultis still displayed, pleaseseek the technicalsupport for settlement.

EF1

External fault with terminalsX1~X10 (for the type of3004GBand the below, thereare only terminals X1~X5)

SP1 Input phase loss or imbalance Input R,S & T phase loss orimbalance

Check the input voltage Check the input

connection line

Sparex India



171


SP0 Output phase loss orimbalance

Output R,S & T phase lossor imbalance

Check the outputconnection line

Check the motor andcable insulation

CCF1 Control circuit fault 0

Transmission between thefrequency and the keypadcannot be establishedwithin 5s after power issupplied (when power isjust supplied)

Re-pull out and re-insertthe keypad

Check the connectionline

Replace the keypad Replace the control panelCCF2 Control circuit fault 1

The frequency and thekeypad communicate onceafter power is supplied, butthe transmission faultafterwards last for at least2s (in operation)

CCF3 EEPROM fault EEPROM fault with the

control panel of frequencyinverter

Replace the control panel

CCF4 AD conversion fault AD conversion fault with

the control panel offrequency inverter

Replace the control panel

CCF5 RAM fault RAM fault with the controlpanel of frequency inverter Replace the control panel

CCF6 CPU disturbance

Serious disturbance MCU reading & writing

error with the control panel The communication line is

connected reversely or thedialing switch dialsincorrectly

Reset via the

buttonSTOPRESET

Add the power filter atthe power sideadditionally

Seek the technicalsupport

PCE Parameter copying error②

Error with the parametercopying between thekeypad and EEPROM ofthe control panel

EEPROM of the controlpanel is damaged

Repeat the copyingoperation

Replace the control panel Seek the technical

support

HE Current detection fault

Fault with the frequencyinverter current detectioncircuit

The Hall elements aredamaged

Replace the frequencyinverter

Seek the technicalsupport

Notes:①The small/medium-power inverters (Type 3022G/3030P and the below) have not the Uu2 fault(undervoltage with the control circuit) and the Uu3 fault (poor charging circuit).②Only the selectively-configured LCD keypads have the function of parameter copying, while the standardLED keypads have not the function.

Sparex India



172

6.2 Warning display and explanationAfter action of warning function, warning code is flickered display, but the inverter is not in fault-protecting state:PWM output will not be closed off, fault relay will not act. In addition, the inverter would automatically return toprevenient operation state after the warning signal disappeared.

The following table lists different kinds of Warnings.

Table 6-2 Warning display and description

AlarmDisplay Display Content Description

Uu Undervoltage detection Undervoltage is detected. The frequency inverter can still work inthis case.

OLP2 Frequency inverteroverload pre-alarm

The frequency inverter working current is over the overloaddetection level and the duration is over the overload detection time.In this case, the frequency inverter can still work.

OH2 Heat radiator too high The heat radiator temperature is larger than the OH2 detectionbenchmark. In this case, the inverter can still work.

AE1 Analog signal 1 isabnormal

The input analog signal in the analog input signal passage AI1exceeds the allowed maximum range of -0.2~+10.2V.





SF1 Function code setting isinappropriate

For example, for the I/O terminal, SS0-2 and TT0-1setting is notincomplete

SF2The manner selection isinconsistent with theterminal setting

The operation manner set is inconsistent with the setting of terminalX1~X10.

SF3

Wrong output terminalsare selected (only forinverters of 35R5GB andthe above)

There are totally three open collector output circuits with thefrequency inverter. The output terminals D0, Y1, Y2 and Y3areprogrammable multifunctional terminals. The user can output somecontrol and monitoring signals selectively based on the need. Whenthe collector output is selected as the program operation stepindication or fault indication, the function-defined content shouldbe the same, all 26 or 27, to make the combination of D0, Y1, Y2and Y3 effective.

AtE Parameter setting isabnormal

The parameter setting is abnormal. The inverter will escape fromthe parameter setting automatically.

6.3 Motor’s faults and corrective measure

If the motor has one of the following faults, please find the reason and take corresponding corrective measure. Seekfor tech support if the measure does not work

Sparex India



173

Table 6-3 Motor fault and corrective measure

Fault Check Content Corrective Measures

The motorfails to run

Check whether the power is supplied to thepower terminals R, S and T and whetherthe CHARGE LED indicator light is on.

Be connected to the power supply Disconnect the power supply and then be

connected to it again. Check the power voltage Check whether the terminal screws have

been tightened

The motorfails to run

Test whether the voltage of terminals U,V and W is correct with the rectifiervoltmeter

Disconnect the power supply and then beconnected to it again.

Check whether the motor has been lockeddue to overload Reduce the load and remove the lockout

Check whether there is fault display on thekeypad and whether the TRIP light isflickering

Search Table 6-1 according to the faultcodes

Check whether there is the operationcommand

Check whether the operating terminalconnection lines and the connection linesbetween 24V & PLC are connectedreliably

Check whether the anti-reverse selectionsetting conflicts with the directioncommand

Set the reverse allowing or directionchanging command

Check whether the terminal operationsignal is disconnected first and thenconnected after the fault occurs

The terminal operation signal isdisconnected first and then connected

Check whether the given frequency voltageis input Check the given frequency voltage

Check whether the operation manner is setcorrectly Input the correct setting

The motorrotatesreversely

Check whether the connection lines ofterminals U, V and W are correct

Adjust the corresponding connection linesof terminals U, V and W

Adjust the function code P2.45The motorrotates butcannotchange thespeed

Check whether the connection lines ofgiven frequency circuit are correct Correct the connection lines

Check whether the load is too large Reduce the load or increase theacceleration or deceleration time

The motorrotatingspeed is toohigh or toolow

Check whether the maximum outputfrequency setting value is correct

Check the maximum output frequencysetting value

Check whether the voltage drop betweenthe motor terminals is too large with therectifier voltmeter

Check the V/F characteristic value

The motorrotatingspeed isunstableduringoperation

Check whether the load is too large Reduce the loadCheck whether the load variation is toolarge Reduce the load variation

Check whether there is phase loss with thethree-phase power

Check whether there is phase loss with theconnection lines of the three-phase power

For the single-phase power, connect theAC reactor to the power supply

The frequency giving source is unstable Check the frequency giving sourceThere is toomuch noisewith themotor

The bearing is worn, lubrication is poor ,and the rotor is eccentric Repair the motor

The carrier frequency is too low Increase the carrier frequency

Sparex India



174

Fault Check Content Corrective MeasuresThere is toolargevibrationwith themotor

Mechanical resonance Adjust the leaping frequency

The machine legs are not even Adjust the machine legs

The three-phase outputs are imbalanced Check the frequency inverter output

Sparex India


Chapter 7 Peripheral Equipments

175

Chapter 7 Peripheral Equipment

7.1 Peripheral Equipment Connection Diagrams

RST

隔离开关

断路器或熔断器

交流输入电抗器

接触器

输入EMI滤波器

R S T

WVU

ALPHA5000

PE

M

制动电阻

输出EMI滤波器

交流输出电抗器

PB

+

-

电动机

Figure 7-1 S2R4GB~3015GB Peripheral Equipment Connection Diagram

Motor

AC Output Reactor

Output EMI Filter

Braking resistor

Input EMI Filter

AC Input Reactor

Contactor

Breaker or fuse

Isolating switch

Sparex India



176

Figure 7-2 3018GB~3500G Peripheral Equipment Connection Diagram

Motor

AC Output Reactor

Output EMI Filter

Braking resistor

Braking Unit

DC Reactor

Input EMI Filter

AC Input Reactor

Contactor

Breaker or fuse

Isolating switch

Sparex India



177

7.2 Function of Peripheral EquipmentTable 7-1 Function of Peripheral Equipment

PeripheralEquipment& OptionalElements

Breaker Contactor * ACReactor *EMI Filter

* Braking Unitand Brakingresistor

Description

It is used to cutoff the faultcurrent of thefrequencyinverter rapidlyand prevent thepower faultcaused by faultwith theinverter and itscircuits.

It is used to cutoff the mainpower supplyat the time offrequencyinverter faultand preventpower failure& restartingafter the fault.

It is used toimprove theinput powerfactor,reduce thehigherharmonicand inhibitthe powersurge.

It is used reduce theradio disturbancecaused by thefrequency inverter.When the wiringdistance between themotor and thefrequency inverter isless than 20m, it issuggested to beconnected to the powersupply side; when thedistance is over 20m,is suggested to beconnected at the outputside.

They are selectedand used when thebraking torquecannot meet therequirements, andare applicable onoccasions ofhigh-inertia load &frequent braking orrapid stop.

Remarks: *-marked items are optional elements.

7.2.1 AC Input Reactor

Using AC reactor can restrain higher harmonic wave and improve power factor obviously. In thefollowing situation, users are advised to use ac reactor.

●Ratio of capacity: power supply source: Inverter>10:1●Silicon controlled load and switching controlled power factor compensator in a same place.●Degree of three-phase voltage unbalance is more than 3%

Table 7-2 List of Common AC Input Reactors

Voltage (V) Power(kW)

Current(A)

Inductance(mH) Voltage (V) Power

(kW)Current

(A)Inductance

(mH)

Single-Phase220

0.4 5.1 10

Three-Phase380

45 96 0.21

0.75 9.2 7.6 55 128 0.18

1.5 13 4.8 75 165 0.13

2.2 25 3.2 93 195 0.11

Three-Phase380

0.75 3.7 7.6 110 22 0.09

1.5 5.4 4.8 132 262 0.08

2.2 7 3.2 160 302 0.06

4 11 2.0 185 364 0.05

5.5 14 1.5 200 385 0.05

7.5 18 1.2 220 420 0.05

11 27 0.8 250 480 0.04

15 34 0.6 280 530 0.04

18.5 41 0.5 315 605 0.04

Sparex India



178

Voltage (V) Power(kW)

Current(A)

Inductance(mH) Voltage (V) Power

(kW)Current

(A)Inductance

(mH)

22 52 0.42 355 660 0.03

30 65 0.32 400 750 0.03

37 80 0.26 500 900 0.025

7.2.2 EMI Filter

EMI filter is used to restrain transmit of Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and external radio interference;including instant impulsion and surge

Table 7-3 Three-phase three-wire EMI filter selection

Voltage(V)

MotorPower(kW)

Filter Type

Major Parameters of FilterCommon-model Input Loss

dBDifferential Model Input Loss

dB0.1

MHz1

MHz30

MHz0.1

MHz1

MHz30

MHz

Single-phase 220

0.4 DL-5EBT1 75 85 55 55 80 60

0.75 DL-10EBT1 70 85 55 45 80 60

1.5DL-20EBT1 70 85 55 45 80 60

2.2

Three-phase 380

0.75DL-5EBT1 75 85 55 55 80 60

1.5

2.2DL-10EBT1 70 85 55 45 80 60

4

5.5~7.5 DL-20EBT1 70 85 55 45 80 60

11~15 DL-35EBT1 70 85 50 40 80 60

18.5~22 DL-50EBT1 65 85 50 40 80 50

30~37 DL-80EBT1 50 75 45 60 80 50

45 DL-100EBK1 50 70 50 60 80 50

55~75 DL-150EBK1 50 70 50 60 70 50

On occasions that have high requirements on the radio disturbance prevention and that are consistent with the CE,UL and CSA standards, or in the case that there is the equipment without the adequate anti-disturbance ability aroundthe frequency inverter, etc, the filter should be used. When the filter is installed, the connection lines should be asshort as possible, and the filter should approach the frequency inverter as possible. The filter earthing cannot beconnected with the thin long wire. Instead, the external shell of filter should be fixed directly on the back plate of themetal case, where the surface coating has been removed. The surface-contacting earthing manner can reduce thehigh-frequency earthing impedance, so the filter can play its due role to the largest extent.

7.2.3 Braking Unit and Braking resistor

Brake units are installed inside this series of frequency inverters (Type 3015GB and the below). When dynamicbraking is required, the user just has to connect the braking resistor. There are not brake units with the inverters of3018G and the above. When the dynamic braking is required, the additional braking unit should be connected. Thebraking unit consists of the control part, the driving part and the discharging resistance. The control part should beadjusted according to the overvoltage protection action values for this series of frequency inverters. If thedischarging resistance part is provided with the overheating protection, it is suggested that the controlling connection

Sparex India



179

point be connected to the main control circuit.In Table 7-4 are the guiding data. The user can select the different resistance values and power according to theactual conditions (however, the resistance value cannot be less than the recommended value in the table, while thepower can be determined by referring to the calculation result). The braking resistor should be selected anddetermined according to the generator power in the actual application system. It is related to the system inertia,deceleration time, and potential energy load, etc, and should be selected according to the actual conditions. Thelarger the system inertia is, the shorter the deceleration time required is, and the more frequent braking is, thebraking resistor with the larger power and the smaller resistance value should be selected.

Table 7-4 Motor power and brake resistor selection

Voltage (V) Motor Power (kW) Resistance Value (Ω) Resistance Power (kW)

Single-phase 220

0.4 100 0.10

0.75 100 0.10

1.5 100 0.10

2.2 70 0.15

Three-phase 380

0.75 150 0.25

1.5 150 0.25

2.2 100 0.40

4 75 0.80

5.5 75 0.80

7.5 75 0.80

11 50 1.00

15 40 1.50Notes: in this table, suggestions are only given for selection of the brake units installed inside the series offrequency inverters (Type 3015GB and the below) with the same power grade. For Type 3018G and the above,brake units should be installed additionally. The braking resistor should be selected by referring to the technicalspecifications of braking unit and the following calculation method.

At braking, the regenerated energy of motor is almost consumed on the braking resistor. The braking power can becalculated according to the following formula:U×U÷R = PbIn the formula, R is the value of selected braking resistor, U is the braking voltage at stable braking of the system (itvaries with different systems; for the 380VAC system, it is generally taken as 700V), and Pb is the braking power.Theoretically, the power of braking resistor is the same with the braking power, but generally 70% of it will be used.Power required by the braking resistor can be calculated according to the following formula:0.7×Pr = Pb×DIn the formula, Pr is power of the braking resistor, and D is the braking frequency (proportion of the regenerationprocess in the whole working process), which can be selected according to the following table:

Table 7-5 Reference for Braking Frequency

ApplicationOccasion

Elevator Uncoiling &Coil Taking

Centrifuge AccidentalBraking Load

GeneralApplication

BrakingFrequency

20%~30% 20~30% 50%~60% 5% 10%

7.2.4 Leakage Protector

As there is direct earth safety capacitor or distributed capacitor inside the frequency inverter, the motor and with theinput & output lead wires, and the series of frequency inverters of the low-noise type, the higher carrier wave is used.Thus, the earth leakage current of the frequency inverter is large, which is more obvious for the large-capacitor

Sparex India



180

inverters. Sometimes, it may cause malfunction of the leakage protection circuit.In the above cases, not only the carrier frequency should be reduced appropriately, the lead wire should be shortenedand the output reactor should be installed, but also the leakage protector should be installed. When the protector isinstalled, attention should be paid to the following points:The leakage protector should be installed at the input side of frequency inverter and had better behind the breaker.The leakage protector functioning current should be 10 times larger than the leakage current of this circuit underthe fundamental frequency power supply and with the frequency inverter unused (total leakage current of circuits,EMI filter and motor, etc).

7.2.5 Capacitor Box

The optional element is applied specially on occasions where continuous operation is required as there is a largemoment (over 20ms) of power off. It can be ordered in our company. In the order, please specify the actual loadand the continuous operation time required after power off, so we can manufacture the appropriate.As the capacitance box may influence some parameters in your machine after it is assembled, thepreparation by the user is not recommended.

Sparex India


Chapter 8 Maintenance

181


Danger

1. Please do not touch the terminals of frequency inverter, which are provided with the high voltage.There is the danger of electric shock.

2. Before power is supplied, please do install the terminal casing well. When the casing is dismantled, pleasedo cut off the power supply.There is the danger of electric shock.

3. Maintenance and inspection cannot be started until the main circuit power supply is cut off and theCHARGE LED indicator light is confirmed to go out.There is the danger of residual voltage on the electrolytic capacitor.

4. Non-professionals are not allowed to do the job of maintenance and inspection.There is the danger of electric shock.

Caution

1. As the CMOS integrated circuit is installed on the keypad panel, the control circuit board and the drivingcircuit board, please pay special attention when they are used. If the circuit boards are touched with thefinger directly, the integrated chips on them will be damaged by the electrostatic induction.

2. Please do not change the connection lines or dismantle the terminal lines when power is supplied.There is the danger of electric shock.

3. Please do not check the signal during operation. Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged.

8.1 Inspection and MaintenanceInverter is a typical product, which combines the power electronics technology with the microelectronics technology.Therefore, it double features with industrial Equipment and microelectronics Equipment. The change of environmentsuch as temperature. Humidity, smog and internal components aging factor will cause kinds of faults to the inverter.For long time secure operation, daily inspection and regular maintenance (at least 3 or 6 months interval) is needed.

8.1.1 Daily Inspection

Before inverter running, please check below: Whether there is abnormal sound or vibration with the motor; whether the frequency inverter and the motor heat up abnormally; whether the environment temperature is too high; whether the load ammeter indicates the same value as usual: whether the cooling fan of frequency inverter operates normally; Whether the braking resistor has the good earthing insulation.

The daily maintenance and inspection content is showed in Table 8-1.

Sparex India



182

Table 8-1 Content and Notice for Daily Maintenance & Inspection

No. InspectionItem Inspection Part Inspection Content Judgment Standard

1 Display LED Monitor Whether the display isabnormal.

Determine according to theuse state (e.g. when nothing isdisplayed after power issupplied, the braking resistorand the earthing insulationcan be checked )

2 CoolingSystem Fan

Check whether it rotatesflexibly, whether there isabnormal sound, andwhether it is jammed bydust.

No abnormality

3FrequencyInverterBody

Inside the MachineCase

Temperature rising,abnormal sound, peculiarsmell and accumulateddust

No abnormality

4 UseEnvironment

SurroundingEnvironment

Temperature, humidity,dust and harmful gas, etc According to Clause 2.2

5 Voltage Input & OutputTerminals Input and output voltage According to the technical

specifications in Appendix 2

6 Load MotorTemperature rising,abnormal sound andvibration

No abnormality

8.1.2 Regular Maintenance

The power supply must be cut off before regular maintenance. Only after the monitor has no display and chargeLED has lit off 5-10 minutes can the maintenance begin. On the other hand, you will risk electric shock becausethere are storage capacitors within the inverter that will hold charge even after the input power is disconnected.The regular maintenance contents and cautions are listed in Table 8-2.

Table 8-2 Content of Regular Maintenance & Inspection

Inspection Item Inspection Content Countermeasure

Screws of main circuitterminals and controlcircuit terminals

whether the screws areloosened Tighten them with the screwdrivers

Heat Radiation Fin whether there is dust Purge it with the 4~6kg/cm2 dry compressed airPCB (Printed CircuitBoard) whether there is dust Purge it with the 4~6kg/cm2 dry compressed air

Cooling Fan

whether it rotates flexibly,whether there is abnormalsound or vibration, andwhether is accumulated dustor blocking object

Replace the cooling fan and clear the dust & foreignobjects

Power Element whether there is dust Purge it with the 4~6kg/cm2 dry compressed air

Electrolytic Capacitor

Check whether there iscolor variation, peculiarsmell, bubbles and liquidleaked, etc

Replace the electrolytic capacitor

Braking Capacitor whether the earthinginsulation is good

Put the braking resistor at the dry and insulatedplace

Sparex India



183

During the inspection, elements cannot be dismantled or shaken freely. Moreover, connectors cannot be pulled outfreely. Otherwise, the frequency inverter may not be able to run normally or may enter the fault display state. Even,element faults may be caused or the main switch element IGBT module or other elements may be damaged.When measurement is required, it should be noted that results with great difference may be got with differentinstruments. It is recommended that the moving-coil voltmeter be used to measure the input voltage, the bridgevoltmeter be used to measure the output voltage, clamp-on ammeter be used to measure the input & output current,and the electric wattmeter be used to measure the power. If conditions are inadequate, the same meter can be used formeasurement and record should be reserved to facilitate comparison.If the waveform test is required, it is suggested the oscilloscope with the scanning frequency larger than 40MHz beused. When the instantaneous waveform is tested, the oscilloscope with the frequency over 100MHz should beused. Before the test, electric isolation should be done for the oscilloscope.The recommended connection method for electric measurement of the main circuit is showed in Figure 8-1 belowand the instruction is showed in Table 8-3:

Sparex India



184

DO GND

F

(-)(+) U

V

WT

S

R A

A

A

V

V

V

W

W

V

V

V

A

A

A

W

W

V

输

入

电

源

M

Figure 8-1 Recommended Connection Method for Main Circuit Electric Measurement

Table 8-3 Instruction on Main Circuit Electric Measurement

Item Input(Power supply)

DCIntermediate

Link

Output(Motor)

D0terminals

Wav

efo

rm Volta

ge

Cur

rent

Measuringinstrument Voltmeter Current

meterPowermeter

DCvoltmeter

Voltmeter

Currentmeter

Powermeter

Voltmeter

InstrumentType Moving-coil Electro-

MagneticElectro-dynamic

Magneto-Electric

Rectifier-type

Electro-Magnetic

Electro-dynamic

Magneto-Electric

Parameter

Virtualvalue of

Firstharmonic

Totalvirtualvalue

Totalvirtualpower

DCvoltage

Virtualvalue of

Firstharmonic

Totalvirtualvalue

Totalvirtual

value ofpower

DCvoltage

In the case of serious power supply asymmetry or three-phase current imbalance, it is suggested the three-wattmetermethod be used to measure the power.As the electric insulation test and the dielectric strength test have been done for the product before it leaves thefactory, the users don’t have to do such tests again. Moreover, such tests will reduce the insulation and voltagewithstand performance of the product. If such tests are conducted inappropriately, product elements may even bedamaged. If such tests have to be done really, it is suggested they be conducted by the skilled technicians.If the main circuit voltage withstand test is done, the withstand voltage tester with the time & leakage current settableand the similar capacity should be used. The test may reduce the life of product. If the main circuit insulation test isdone, the main circuit terminals R, S, T, U, V, W, PB(P1), + and – etc should be short-circuited reliably and then themeg-ohmmeter with the near voltage grade (250V for 220V, 500V for 380V, and 1000V for 660V) should be usedfor measurement. The control circuit should be measured with the resistance shift of the universal meter instead ofthe meg-ohmmeter.For the 380V main circuit, the ground insulation resistance should not be less than 5 MΩ; for the control circuit,the ground insulation resistance should not be less than 3 MΩ.

8.1.3 Regularly-replaced Elements

To ensure the long-term and reliable operation of frequency inverter, regular care and maintenance should be

Inputpowersupply

Sparex India



185

carried out for internal electronic elements of the frequency inverter. The life of these electronic elements varieswith the environment and conditions where the inverters are used. Generally, if the inverter is used continuously,the elements can be replaced according to the following table, which also depends on the use environment, loadconditions and inverter state, and other specific conditions.As showed in Table 8-4, the maintenance term is just for reference by the user when it is used.

Table 8-4 Replacement Time for Wearing Elements of Frequency Inverter

Name of Element Standard Years for Replacement

Cooling Fan 2~3 years

Electrolytic Capacitor 4~5 years

Printed Circuit Board 5~8 years

Fuse 10 years

8.2 Storage and ProtectionIf the frequency inverter is not used immediately after purchased and has to be stored temporarily or permanently,the following should be done: It should be put in the place within the specified temperature & humidity scope, without damp, dust and metal

dust, and with good ventilation. If it is unused for over one year, the charging test should be conducted to restore the characteristics of

electrolytic capacitor of the main circuit. During charging, the input voltage of the frequency inverter shouldbe increased to the rating value slowly with the voltage regulator. The energizing time should be at least 1~2hours.

The above test should be conducted at least once a year .The voltage withstand test cannot be conducted freely, as it will reduce the life of frequency inverter and evendamage the elements. For the insulation test, the 500V mega-ohmmeter whose insulation resistance is not lessthan 4 MΩ can be used.

Sparex India


Chapter IX Quality Assurance

186

Chapter 9 Quality GuaranteesThe quality guarantees of this product follows the regulations below:The guarantee scope involves only the frequency inverter body. The guarantee period, starting from the date when itis delivered from the company, is 12 months after the product is purchased but is not beyond 24 months after themanufacture date on the nameplate.For faults caused by the following reasons, the product will be repaired with charge even if it is still within theguarantee period: problems caused by incorrect operation or unauthorized repair or alteration; problems caused as the frequency inverter is used beyond the standard requirements; damage caused as it falls down or is carried violently after purchased; element aging or fault caused as it is used in the environment inconsistent with the requirements of the user

manual ; damage caused by foreign objects (e.g. insects, etc) into the inverter; damage of inverter caused by the wrong wire connection; Faults caused by the earthquake, fire, storm & flood disaster, lightning strike, abnormal voltage or other

natural disasters and reasons accompanying the disasters.For the product with faults, our company is entitled to entrust other agencies to do the job of guaranteemaintenance.If the fault is surely included in the quality guarantees content of our company and the product is useddomestically:

guaranteed replacement, return and repair within one month after the product is delivered; guaranteed replacement and repair within three months after the product is delivered; guaranteed repair within 12 months after the product is delivered

If the product is delivered overseas, guaranteed repair will be applied within 3 months after it is delivered.Relevant service expense will be calculated according to actual conditions. If there is an agreement, theexpense will be settled according to the agreement in priority.All our sales departments and agencies over China can provide the after-sale service for the product.

Additional Remarks:About liability exemption Our company shall not be liable for results caused or induced by violation of the user manual when the

product is used; Our company shall not be liable for compensation for the loss or involving and ongoing damage caused to the

user by the product faults.

About User Instruction Manual:The user instruction manual is applicable to the series of products.Our company has the lifelong liability for the product and provides all services related to use of this product.Although the product is designed and manufactured with the strict quality control system, our company should beconsulted first if it serves the following purposes that may endanger the human body or the life as a result of faults oroperation mistakes. Used for the transport equipment; Medical device; Nuclear and power equipment; Aviation and aerospace device; Various safety devices; Other special purposes

About hope for the User:

We hope vast users can propose suggestions on our product design, performance, quality and service, which will begreatly appreciated.

Sparex India


Appendix 1 External Dimension and Installation Dimension(Unit: mm)

187


Specifications H H1 W W1 D D1 D2 D3 d

S2R4GB/S2R75GB 141.5 130.5 85 74 113 123 63 88 4.5

S21R5GB/S22R2GB 180 169 115 105 150 158 85 120 4.5

3R75GB/31R5GB/32R2GB 180 169 115 105 150 158 85 120 4.53004GB 195 179.5 130 114.5 157 167 100 130 5.5

Sparex India



188

Specification H H1 W W1 D D1 D2 d

35R5GB, 37R5GB 270 255 190 175 176 186 122 7

Sparex India



189

Specifications H H1 W W1 D D1 D2 d d 1

3011GB, 3015GB 373 360 235 180 176 188 125 7 12

3018G, 3022G 420 405 270 200 218 230 175 7 14

3030G, 3037G 503 488 311 200 230 242 185 8 14

3045G, 3055G 590 570 351 200 254 266 208 10 18

3075G, 3093G 698 672 400 280 260 272 213 12 22

3110G, 3132G 850 823 505 420 280 292 199 12 22

Sparex India



190

Installation dimension for three-phase 380V 160-355KW standard inverter (with the base):

Specifications W1 W2 W3 H1 H2 D1 D2 D3 d1 d23160G-X, 3185G-X, 3200G-X,

3220G-X 600 200 530 1380 1360 400 280 60 3-φ14

4-φ14

3250G-X, 3280G, -X3315G-X, 3355G-X 800 300 730 1535 1515 410 288 60 3-φ1

44-φ1

4

Sparex India



191

Installation dimension for three-phase 380V 160-355KW standard inverter (wall type):

Specification W1 W2 H1 H2 D1 D2 D3 d1

3160G-V, 3185G-V, 3200G-V, 3220G-V 600 200 1056 1026 400 245 77 6-φ143250G-V, 3280G-V,3315G-V, 3355G-V 800 300 1210 1180 410 250 88 6-φ14

Sparex India



192

Installation dimension for three-phase 380V 400-500KW standard inverter:

Specifications W1 W2 W3 H1 D1 D2 D3 d1

3400G-X, 3500G-X 1000 700 900 1800 480 300 80 4-φ22

Installation dimension for three-phase 380V 160-500KW slim-shape inverter:

Sparex India



193

Specifications W W1 D H a b c d3160G, 3185G3200G, 3220G 450 514 400 1600 400 315 30 13

3250G, 3280G3315G, 3355G 450 514 400 1800 400 315 30 13

Installation dimension for three-phase 380V 400-500KW slim-shape inverter:

Hanging plugs areoptional accordingthe installation need

Sparex India



194

W D H a b c d

3400G, 3500G 800 550 2000 700 300 125 18

Sparex India


Appendix 2 Technical Specifications

195


Item Specifications

Rating Input Voltage &Frequency

Single-Phase: 200~240V 50/60HzThree-Phase: 380~440V 50/60Hz

Allowed Input VoltageWorking Range

Single-Phase 220V: 176~264V, frequency＜±5%Three-phase 380V: 304~456V, voltage imbalance rate ＜ 3%, frequency＜±5%

Type S2R4GB S2R75GB S21R5GB S22R2GB

Matching Motor Power (kW) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2

Rating Output Current (A) 2.4 4.5 7.0 11.0

Type 3R75GB 31R5GB 32R2GB 3004GB 35R5GB

Matching Motor Power (kW) 0.75 1.5 2.2 4.0 5.5

Rating Output Current (A) 2.5 4.0 6.0 9.0 13.0

Type 37R5GB 3011GB 3015GB 3018G 3022G

Matching Motor Power (kW) 7.5 11 15 18.5 22


Type 3030G 3037G 3045G 3055G 3075G

Matching Motor Power (kW) 30 37 45 55 75


Type 3093G 3110G 3132G 3160G 3185G



Type 3200G 3220G 3250G 3280G 3315G



Type 3355G 3400G 3500G

Matching Motor Power (kW) 355 400 500

Rating Output Current (A) 680.0 750.0 900.0

Rating Output Voltage 0~rating input voltage

Maximum Overload Current 150% 1minute, 180% 20s

Control Manner V/F control/current vector control

Frequency Control Scope 0.00~650.0Hz(S2R4GB~3004GB)/0.00~400.00Hz(35R5GB and the above)

Frequency Precision digital command ±0.01％ (-10℃~+40℃)analog command ±0.01％ (25℃±10℃)

Set Frequency Resolution digital command 0.01Hz；analog command 1/1000 maximum frequency

Output Frequency Resolution 0.01Hz

Frequency Setting Signal 0~10V, 0~20mAAcceleration & DecelerationTime 0.1~3600 s (acceleration and deceleration time are set independently)

Sparex India



196

Item Specifications

Braking Torque the additional braking resistor can reach 125%Voltage/FrequencyCharacteristic

4 types of fixed V/F characteristics are optional; any V/F characteristic can beset; with the PG V/F control

Protection Function

overvoltage, undervoltage, current limit, overcurrent, overload, electronicthermal relay, overheat, overvoltage stalling, load short circuit, earthing,undervoltage protection, input phase loss, output phase loss, earthing andinterphase short circuit, and motor overload protection, etc

Application EnvironmentTemperature -10℃~+40℃

Humidity 5~95% RH (without condensation)

Storage Temperature -40℃~+70℃

Application Site indoors (without corrosive gas)

Installation Site With the altitude not more than 1000m, and free of dust, corrosive gas and directsun shining

Vibration ＜5.9m/s2(0.6g)

Protection Class IP20

Cooling Manner natural cooling or forced air cooling

Sparex India


Appendix 3 Recommendation for Selection of the Main Circuit Output Cable

197

Appendix 3 Recommendation for Selection of the Main Circuit Output Cable

Voltage(V)

PowerGrade(kW)

CableSpecification

(mm2)

Maximum Distance of Output Line (m)

Without the Output Reactor With the Output ReactorNon-shielded

Cable (m)Shielded

Cable (m)Non-shielded

Cable (m)Shielded

Cable (m)

220

0.4 kW 2.5 110 80 150 105

0.75kW 2.5 110 80 150 105

1.5kW 4 180 150 230 175

2.2kW 4 180 150 230 175

380

0.75kW 2.5 110 80 150 105

1.5kW 2.5 110 80 150 105

2.2kW 4 180 150 230 175

4kW 4 180 150 230 175

5.5kW 4 200 160 250 185

7.5kW 6 200 160 250 185

11kW 6 200 160 250 185

15kW 6 200 160 250 185

18.5kW 10 200 160 250 185

22kW 16 200 160 250 185

30kW 25 220 180 280 210

37kW 25 220 180 280 210

45kW 35 240 200 320 250

55kW 35 240 200 320 250

75kW 70 260 220 380 260

93kW 70 260 220 380 260

110kW 95 260 220 380 260

132kW 150 260 220 380 260

160kW 185 280 240 440 340

185kW 185 280 240 440 340

200kW 240 280 240 440 340

220kW 150×2 300 260 500 400

250kW 185×2 320 280 550 430

280kW 185×2 320 280 550 430

315kW 250×2 320 280 550 430

355kW 325×2 320 280 550 430

400kW 325×2 320 280 550 430

500kW 325×2 320 280 550 430

Sparex India


Appendix 4 Use of MODBUS Communication

198

Appendix 4 Use of MODBUS CommunicationALPHA6000S/ ALPHA6000Vcan use the programmable logic controller (PLC) and other upper devices to conductthe data exchange through MODBUS-RTU communication protocol.

Constitution of MODBUS CommunicationThe communication data busbar is a main controller (PLC) and 1~31 frequency inverters. The signal istransmitted from the main controller and the frequency inverter responds to it.The main controller conducts the signal transmission with 1 frequency inverter. All frequency invertersshould have their own address codes. The main controller transmits signals according to the specified codes.The frequency inverters will function after receiving the commands from the main controller and feed backthe response to the main controller.

Communication StandardInterface RS-485

SynchronizationManner

Asynchronous and half-duplex

CommunicationParameters

Speed: selected from 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400bpsData length: fixed 8 bitsParity Check Selection: even / odd/ noneStop Byte: 1 bit fixed

CommunicationProtocol

MODBUS RTU Mode

Number ofConnectableFrequency Inverters

31 sets

Description of the communication connecting terminalMODBUS communications adopts the terminals 485+ and 485-. In addition, the terminal resistors areswitched as follows. In the case of RS-RS-485 communication, please put the ON/OFF switch 1 and 2 ofSW6 at the side of ON when the terminal frequency inverter is viewed from PLC.

Notice for Wring(1) The communication cables should be separated from the main circuit cables and other power cables & electric

cables.(2) Shielded cables should be used as the communication cables. The shielding layer should be connected to the

earthing terminal of frequency inverter, while the other end will not be connected. (To prevent malfunctioncaused by disturbance)

The sequence to have communication with PLC is as follows:1. When the power supply is cut off, connect the communication cable between PLC andALPHA6000S/ALPHA6000V.2. Supply the power.3. Set the parameters required by communication on the keypad (P0.03, P0.04, P0.07, P0.11, P7.00, P7.01,P7.03, P7.04, P8.11, P9.19, Pd.02, Pd.04 and Pb.00~Pb.06).

Terminal Resistor Switch

Sparex India



199

4. Cut off the power supply and wait until keypad display disappears completely.5. Switch on the power supply again.6. Conduct the communication with PLC.

Setting of Communication ParametersTo communicate with PLC, communication-related parameters should be set. In the following table, only Pb.01 (IDNumber) and Pb.04 (response delay time) can be revised during operation to facilitate debugging, which becomeseffective immediately, while the rest parameters cannot be revised during operation. Then can only be set during thestop time, and the reset parameters will not become effective until the inverter is powered off and then restarted.“○” revisable during operation；“×” non-revisable during operation

FunctionCode

Name ofParameter Setting Range Ex-factory

Setting Revision

After thecommunication functionis selected, MODBUScan be written into the

register

P0.03FrequencySettingSource 1

0: NULL1: Frequency number setting,number knob adjustment2: Terminal AI13: Terminal AI24: Terminal AI3 (Reserved for3004GB and the below)5: Impulse input6: Communication giving7: Linear speed (Reserved)8: Multi-segment speed9: Terminal UP/DOWN10: (PLC)Program-timingoperation (PLC)11: PID12: Pendulum frequencyoperation (and other specialoperation modes)When the frequency source is0~7, if the multi-segment speedterminal is effective, treat it as“multi-segment speed”

1 × 0002H

P0.04FrequencySettingSource 2

0~8: the same as above9: torque differencecompensation

0 × 0005H

P0.07

OperationCommandGivingMannerSetting

0: Keypad control1: Terminal control 1(Key STOPineffective)2: Terminal control 2(Key STOPeffective )3: Serial communication 1(KeySTOP ineffective)4: Serial communication 2(KeySTOP effective)5: Terminal control 3(Key STOP& JOG ineffective)

0 ○ 0001H

P0.11Upper limitof frequencysource

0: Digital setting1: Terminal AI12: Terminal AI23: Terminal AI3 (Reserved for3004GB and the below)4: Impulse input5: Communication setting

0 × 0008H

Sparex India



200

FunctionCode


Setting Revision


register

P1.13

Stop DCBrakingCurrentSettingSource

0: Digital setting1: Terminal AI12: Terminal AI23: Terminal AI3 (Reserved for3004GB and the below)4: Impulse input5: Communication settingTake the rating current of thefrequency inverter as 100%Only effective with the V/Fcontrol manner

0 ○ 0009H

P7.00 PID givensource 1

0: PID digital setting1: Terminal AI12: Terminal AI23: Terminal AI3 (Reserved for

3004GB and the below)4: Impulse input5: Serial communication6: Linear speed (Reserved)

0 × 0004H

P7.01 PID givensource 2 0~6: the same as above 0 × 0007H

P7.03PID

feedbacksource 1

0: Internal PG or single-phasespeed-measuring input1: Terminal AI12: Terminal AI23: Terminal AI3 (Reserved for3004GB and the below)4: Impulse input5: Serial communication

0 × 0003H

P7.04PID

feedbacksource 2

0: expand PG cardspeed-measurement input

1~5: the same as above0 × 0006H

P8.11

Drivingtorquesettingsource

0: Digital setting1: AI12: AI23: AI3 (Reserved for 3004GBand the below)4: PULSE setting5: Communication setting

0 × 000AH

P9.19Outputvoltage biassource

0: Digital setting1: Terminal AI12: Terminal AI23: Terminal AI3 (Reserved for3004GB and the below)4: Impulse input5: Communication settingTake the maximum outputvoltage as 100%Only effective with the V.Fseparation mode

0 × 000BH

Sparex India



201

FunctionCode


Setting Revision


register

Pd.02

MotorprotectionsensorInputPassage

0: Terminal AI11: Terminal AI22: Terminal AI3 (Reserved for3004GB and the below)3: Impulse input4: Communication setting

0 × 000CH

P8.25

Brakingtorquesettingsource

0: consistent with the finaldriving torque setting valuecalculated for P8.111: AI12: AI23: AI3 (Reserved for 3004GBand the below)4: PULSE setting5: Communication setting

0 × 0012H

*Note 1: Only when the “Communication setting” passage is selected, can the command be written into thecorresponding register in the above table. Otherwise, 02h will be reported.

*Note 2: If the Baud rate selection and the parity check selection are revised, new setting will not become effectiveuntil the inverter is stopped first and then restarted. Setting of these two items for the upper and lower computersshould be the same. Otherwise, communication cannot be established or there will be errors with communication.

*Note 3: When the frequency inverter address is set as 0, the inverter will not receive the communication command,including the broadcast command. When the frequency inverter address is larger than 0, the new address willbecome effective once it is revised.

*Note 4: To be compatible with other communication frequency commands of other series of frequency inverters byour company, please set the communication frequency command unit, e.g. set the frequency as 50Hz. If thefrequency command sent by PLC is 01F4H, 1 should be selected. After the frequency inverter receives the frequencycommand, it will be converted to 50.00Hz automatically. If 1388H is sent, 0 should be selected. The system will treatit as 50.00Hz.

Transmission Period LimitIn order to reduce the packet loss ratio caused by the communication disturbance and get the bestcommunication effect, please limit the data transmission period in the host station to ensure both datatransmission and receiving are normal.

Pb.00 Baud RateSelection

Minimum TransmissionPeriod ms

(Parity Check)

Suggested Transmission Period ms(Applicable to various check manners)

0: 1200 220ms 250ms

1: 2400 110ms 150ms

2: 4800 65ms 100ms

3: 9600 50ms 90ms

4: 19200 35ms 80ms

5: 38400 17ms 50ms

*Notes: With the parity check manner selected, the user can obtain the quickest communication response.The minimum transmission period includes the time from data transmission to receiving of correct data.If the transmission period is lower than the minimum transmission period, the data received by the host station maybe garbled.

Sparex India



202

Command FormattingDuring communication, the main controller (PLC, etc) gives commands to ALPHA6000S/ALPHA6000V,and the frequency inverters respond to them. The process constitutes the information transmission &receiving as showed in the right figure. As the command function content varies, the length of data will varyas well. The interval between two commands should maintain the time recorded below.

PLC 变频器 PLC变频器变频器

t(ms)

3.5char Pb.04设定 3.5char 5ms以上

指令响应指令

PLC

Frequency inverter address: Frequency inverter address (0 ~ 31)When it is set as 0, commands are transmitted together with the broadcast manner. Even if the broadcast command isreceived, the frequency inverter will not give response. Command Code

There are four types of MODBUS command codes supported by the series of frequency inverters, which areshowed as follows:

CommandCode

(16 bits )Function

Command Length Normal Response Length Abnormal Response Length

MinimumByte

Number

MaximumByte

Number

MinimumByte

Number

MaximumByte

Number

MinimumByte

Number

MaximumByte

Number

03H Reading Record 8 8 7 7 5 5

06H Single CharacterWriting 8 8 8 8 5 5

08H Loopback Test 8 8 8 8 5 5

10H Writing Record 11 11 8 8 5 5 CRC CheckThe calculation method for CRC-16 used by MODBUS communication is as follows:1. Generally, when CRC-16 is calculated, its initial value is 0, and the initial value of the communication terminal

series is set as 1. (1 for 16 bits)2. LSB according to the frequency inverter address is MSB, and the final data MSB uses LSB to calculate CRC-16.3. The response command of frequency inverter also has to calculate CRC-16 to be compared with CRC-16 in the

response command.Unsigned int CRC16(unsigned char*uptr, unsigned int ulenth){

unsigned int crc=0xffff ;unsigned char uindex ;if(ulenth>=9){

ulenth=9;}while(ulenth!=0){

crc^=*uptr ;for(uindex=0;uindex<8;uindex++){

if((crc&0x0001)==0){

crc=crc>>1 ;

FrequencyInverter

FrequencyInverter

FrequencyInverter

Command Response Command

Pb.04 Setting Over 5ms

Sparex India



203

}else{

crc=crc>>1 ;crc^=0xa001 ;

}}ulenth-=1 ;uptr++;

}return(((crc&0x00FF)<<8)|((crc&0xFF00)>>8));

} Example of Command Application[03H]

Reading of Single-character Command: read the single-character record content from the specified code. The recordcontent is divided into high 8 bits and low 8 bits and becomes part of the response content in order.Example: read the state of frequency inverter 1

Command ContentFrequency Inverter

Address 01

Command Code 03Start

AddressHigh Bit 00Low Bit 20

Number ofAddresses

High Bit 00Low Bit 01

CRCHigh Bit 85Low Bit C0

Normal Response ContentFrequency Inverter

Address 01

Command Code 03Number of Data 02

Contentof Data

High Bit 00Low Bit C1

CRCHigh Bit 79Low Bit D4

Abnormal Response ContentFrequency Inverter

Address 01

Command Code 83Abnormality Code 03

CRCHigh Bit 01Low Bit 31

Notes: The number of data doubles that of address.

[06H]Single-character Writing Command: write a single character into the specified register, and save the specified data inthe specified register. The data saved should be among the order of record codes. The command content should bearrayed in the sequence of high 8 bits and low 8 bits.Example: start the operation of frequency inverter 1


Address 01



Content ofData


CRCHigh Bit 19Low Bit CA


Address 01



Contentof Data


CRCHigh Bit 19Low Bit CA

Abnormal Response ContentFrequency Inverter

Address 01

Command Code 86Abnormality Code 00


Sparex India



204

[08H]Loop Test Command: the command content is fed back originally in the form of response and is used for test ofsignal transmission and returning between the main controller and the frequency inverter. Arbitrary values can beused as the test code and data.Example: loop feedback test


Address 01

Command Code 08

Test CodeHigh Bit 00Low Bit 00

Test DataHigh Bit 12Low Bit 34

CRCHigh Bit EDLow Bit 7C


Address 01

Command Code 08

TestCode


TestData


CRCHigh Bit EDLow Bit 7C

Abnormal Response ContentFrequency

Inverter Address 01

Command Code 88Abnormality

Code 03


[10H]Single-character Writing Command: write the content into the specified register, and write the specified data in thespecified register. The data saved should be among the order of record codes. The command content should bearrayed in the sequence of high 8 bits and low 8 bits.Example: set the frequency as 50.0Hz


Address 01

Command Code 10

StartAddress


Number ofAddresses


Number of Data 02

Content ofData


CRCHigh Bit AALow Bit E4


Address 01

Command Code 10

StartAddress


Numberof

Addresses

High Bit 00

Low Bit 01

CRCHigh Bit A0Low Bit 90


Inverter Address 01


Code 03

CRCHigh Bit 0CLow Bit 01


[10H]Data Saving Command: write the MODBUS register address corresponding to the function parameters into thespecial saving address of 0xFF, and save the parameter content into EEPROM. It is equivalent to ENTER of thekeypad to save the data without being lost. The command content is arrayed in the order of high 8 bits and low 8 bits.00FFH is specially used for data saving and is effective when Pb.06=0.Example: set the frequency as 30.0Hz and save it in EEPROM.

Sparex India



205


Address 01

Command Code 10

StartAddress


Number ofAddresses


Number of Data 02

Content ofData

High Bit 0BLow Bit B8

CRCHigh Bit B1Low Bit D2


Address 01

Command Code 10

StartAddress

High Bit 00Low Bit FF

Numberof

Addresses

High Bit 00

Low Bit 01

Number of Data 02

Contentof Data


CRCHigh Bit B3Low Bit CF


Inverter Address 01


Code 23

CRCHigh Bit 0DLow Bit D9

[10H]Two Commands Writing: it can operate the two registers of 0001 action command and 0002 frequency setting 1. Itshould be noted that the operation command giving manner setting (P0.07) should be “serial communication” andthat the frequency setting source 1 (P0.03) should be “communication setting”.Example: set the frequency as 50.0Hz.


Address 01

Command Code 10

StartAddress


Number ofAddresses


Number of Data 04

Content ofData

High Bit 00Low Bit 01High Bit 13Low Bit 88

CRCHigh Bit 6ELow Bit F5


Address 01

Command Code 10

StartAddress


Numberof

Addresses

High Bit 00

Low Bit 02



Inverter Address 01


Code 03

CRCHigh Bit 0CLow Bit 01


Sparex India



206

List of Data:Command Data (writable)

MODBUSAddress Name bit Content

0000H ( Reserved)

0001H OperationSignal

0 Operation Command 1: Operation 0: Stop

1 Reverse Command 1: Reverse 0: Forward

2 External Fault 1: External Fault (EFO)

3 Fault Resetting 1: Fault Resetting Command

4 Multi-functional Input Command 1 (P3.01 X1Terminal Function)





9 Multi-functional Input Command 6 (P3.06 X6Terminal Function, Reserved for3004GBand the below)

A Multi-functional Input Command 7 (P3.07 X7Terminal Function, Reserved for3004GBand the below)

B Multi-functional Input Command 8 (P3.08 X8Terminal Function, Reserved for3004GBand the below)

C Multi-functional Input Command 9 (P3.09X9Terminal Function, Reserved for3004GBand the below)

D Multi-functional Input Command10 (P3.10 X10Terminal Function, Reserved for3004GBand the below)

E (Reserved) Note 1

F (Reserved) Note 1

0002H Frequency Setting 1 Note 2

0003H Communication PID feedback 1, data scope0-2000 corresponding to -100.0%~100.0%

0004H Communication PID setting 1, data scope 0-2000 corresponding to -100.0%~100.0%

0005H Frequency Setting 2 Note 2

0006H PID feedback 2, data scope 0-2000corresponding to -100.0%~100.0%

0007H PID setting 2, data scope 0-2000 corresponding to -100.0%~100.0%

0008H Upper limiting frequency, data scope 0-1000corresponding to 0.0~100.0%, 100.0% corresponding to theupper limiting frequency

0009H Stop DC braking current, data scope 0-1000 corresponding to 0.0~100.0%

000AH Driving torque setting, data scope 0-1000 corresponding to 0.0~100.0%, 100.0% corresponding to twice ofthe rating motor torque

Sparex India



207


000BH Output voltage bias, data scope 0-1000 corresponding to 0.0~100.0%, 100.0% corresponding to themaximum output voltage

000CH Motor protection sensor input passage

0012H Braking torque setting, data scope 0-1000 corresponding to 0.0~100.0%, 100.0% corresponding twice ofthe rating motor torque

0013-001FH Reserved

Note 1: write “0” in the reserved BIT.

Note 2: when the communication frequency command is > the largest frequency, the abnormality code 21H“Beyond the Upper & Lower Limit” will be reported and the operation frequency will be reserved unchanged.

Note 3: addresses of 000DH~0011H and 0013H~001FH are reserved in the general frequency inverter.

Note 4: when the above reserved register addresses are read, address error will be fed back.

Parameters Saving [Input Command]( Writable)

Record Code Name Content Setting Range Initial Value

00FFH Input Command MODBUS address in the functionlist 0100H ~ 0FFFH —

Notes:

For the data writing command 06 and 10, only the data are written into RAM for operation and are effective forthis operation. After the inverter is powered off and restarted, the data written last time will become ineffective.If the data written by communication has to be effective after the inverter is powered off and restarted, the datashould be written and saved in EEPROM. Function 10 can be used to write the parameters of MODBUS addressto be saved into 0x00F.By writing the MODBUS address corresponding to the parameters to be saved into 0x00FFH, the parameter datain RAM will be written and saved in EEPROM. As the maximum writing times of EEPROM is 100,000, theinput command had better not be used frequently. The command is similar to ENTER in the keypad, by pressingwhich the set parameters will be written into EEPROM. The record code 00FFH is special for writing. When therecord is read, record code errors may happen (abnormality code 02H).

Monitoring Content (Read-only)


0020H StateSignal

0 Operation 1: Operation 0: Stop

1 Reverse 1: Reverse 0: Forward

2 Fault Resetting 1: Fault Resetting 0: No Fault Resetting

3 Fault 1: Fault

4 Alarm 1: Alarm

5 Multi-functional Output Command 1 (1: DO ON 0: OFF)

6 Multi-functional Output Command 2 (1: Y1 ON 0: OFF) Reserved for 3004GBand thebelow

Sparex India



208


7 Multi-functional Output Command 3 (1: Y2 ON 0: OFF) Reserved for 3004GBand thebelow

8 Multi-functional Output Command 4 (1: TA ON 0: OFF)

9 Multi-functional Output Command 5 (1: BR ON 0: OFF) Reserved for 3004GBandthe below

A Multi-functional Output Command 6 (1: Y3 ON 0: OFF) Reserved for 3004GBandthe below

B (Reserved)

C-F (Reserved)

0021H FaultContent

0 Overcurrent (OC)

1 Accelerating Overvoltage (Ou1)

2 Frequency Inverter Overload (OL2)

3 Frequency Inverter Overheat (OH1)

4 Decelerating Overvoltage (Ou2)

5 Constant-speed Overvoltage (Ou3)

6 HE Hall Current Detection Fault

7 External Abnormality (EFO~EF1)

8 Hardware Abnormality (CCF3~CCF6)

9 Motor Overload (OL1)

A Input/ Output Phase Loss or Imbalance (SP1~SP2)

B Busbar Undervoltage (Uu1)

C Control Circuit Undervoltage (Uu2)

D Charging Circuit Undervoltage (Uu3)

E Grounding GF or Load Short Circuit SC

F (Reserved, even if fault is reported, it will be displayed by the keypad) Keypad ConnectionAbnormality (CCF1~CCF2)

0022H AlarmContent

0 Busbar Undervoltage Alarm Uu

1 Frequency Inverter Overload Pre-alarm OLP2-

2 Analog Signal 1 Abnormality AE1

3 Analog Signal 2 Abnormality AE2

4 Overhigh TemperatureOH2

5 The serial communication doesn’t receive the normal control signal CE

6 The function code setting is inappropriate SF1(e.g. setting of SS0-2 and TT0-1isincomplete)

7 The operation mode is inconsistent with the terminal setting SF2

8 The output terminal selection 26 doesn’t reach 4 (SF3) and 27 doesn’t reach 3 (SF3).

9 Motor Parameters Setting Abnormality

A Analog Signal 3 Abnormality

B-F (Reserved)

Sparex India



209


0023H Before the frequency command compensation

0024H After the frequency command compensation

0025H AI1 Analog Input (V), 0~10.00V corresponding to 0~1000

0026H AI2 Analog Input (V) , 0~10.00V corresponding to 0~1000

0027H Output Current (A)

0028H Output Voltage (V)

0029H Set Frequency Hz

002AH AI3 Analog Input (V) , -10.00~10.00Vcorresponding to 0~2000

002BH

Mul

ti-fu

nctio

nalI

nput

Term

inal

Stat

e

0 Terminal X1 1: Close 0: Open





5 Terminal X6 (Reserved for 3004GBand the below) 1: Close 0: Open





A (Reserved)

B-F (Reserved)

002CH (Reserved)

002DH

Mul

ti-fu

nctio

nalO

utpu

tTer

min

alSt

ate

0 DO 1: “ON” 0: “OFF”

1 BRA-BRB-BRC Relay (3004GBand the below)1: “ON” 0: “OFF”

2 TA-TB-TC Relay 1: “ON” 0: “OFF”

3 RelayY1 (Reserved for 3004GBand the below) 1: “ON” 0: “OFF”

4 RelayY2 (Reserved for 3004GBand the below) 1: “ON” 0: “OFF”

5 RelayY3 (Reserved for 3004GBand the below)

6 (Reserved)

7-F (Reserved)

002EH AO1 Analog Output (V) 0~10.00V corresponding to 0~1000

002FH AO2 Analog Output (V) 0~10.00V corresponding to 0~1000 (Reserved for 3004GB and the below)

Sparex India



210


0030H AO3 Analog Output (V) 0~10.00V corresponding to 0~1000 (Reserved for 3004GB and the below)

0031H DC Main Bus Voltage

0032H Output Torque

0033H Current Rotating Speed

0034H Set Rotating Speed

0035H Operating Linear Speed

0036H Set Linear Speed

0037H Output Power

0038H PID Feedback Quantity (% )

0039H PID Input Quantity (% )

003AH Set Length

003BH Actual Length

003CH External Count Value

003D-003FH (Reserved)

0040-004AH Terminal State, 0040H－004AH corresponding to BIT0-BITA bit of 002BH in order

004B-00FEH (Reserved)

List of Modbus Register Addresses:

Function Code Form ParameterCode(DEC) Modbus Register Address(HEX)

(Saving Confirmed) (00FFH)

(Command Data) (0001H~001FH)

(Monitoring Content) (0020H~004FH)

P0.00~P0.19 0100H~ 0113H*

P1.00~P1.23 0200H~ 0217H

P2.00~P2.50 0300H~ 0332H

P3.00~P3.36 0400H~ 0424H

P4.00~P4.35 0500H~ 0523H

P5.00~P5.36 0600H~ 0624H

P6.00~P6.18 0700H~ 0712H

P7.00~P7.28 0800H~ 081CH

P8.00~P8.28 0900H~ 091CH

P9.00~P9.21 0A00H~ 0A15H

PA00~PA.30 0B00H~ 0B1EH

Sparex India



211

Function Code Form ParameterCode(DEC) Modbus Register Address(HEX)

Pb.00~Pb.08 0C00H~ 0C08H

PC.00~PC.23 0D00H~ 0D17H

Pd.00~Pd.34 0E00H~ 0E22H

PE.00~PE.12 0F00H~ 0F0CH

PF.00~PF.12 1000H~ 100CH

(For parameter extending) (1100H~FFFFH)

Modbus Address Encoding Method:Refer to the function codes in the function code form. High 8 bit HI= function group number + 1; low 8 bitLO= function code. Keep other register addresses that are not listed.

List of Abnormality Codes

AbnormalityCode Content

01H Command code errorCommand codes other than 03H, 08H and10H

02H

Register address errorNone of the register addresses is registeredRead the ENTER-confirmed special register[0X00FFH]The communication function of the address is not initiated in the function code setting. (Note1)

03HNumber errorNumber of data read or written is not between 1 and 16In the writing manner, the command data is not the bit number *2

21H Data setting errorUpper and lower limit error during the control data & parameters input·

22H

Writing manner errorWrite the non-revisable parameters or read-only parameters in operation (Note 2)Parameters write-protected (Note 3)Write data into the special read registerWrite in the case of CCF3, i.e. EEPROM fault

23H Write in the case of undervoltageWrite parameters in the case of Uu

24H Write parameters from communication during the parameter processingAt the time of fault resetting, system power supply cutoff or data saving

25H CRC check fault (Note 4)Note 1: Set the P0.03 and P0.04 frequency setting as serial communication (when writing address 0002) or set P0.07operation command control manner as serial communication (when writing address 0001).Note 2: For parameters that can be set in operation, please refer to the function parameter list. If a parameter thatcannot be revised in operation but can be revised at the time of stop is to be revised, please stop the inverter and thenrevise it.Note 3: When parameters are write-protected and PF.01 is set as 1 or 2, please revise it as 0. Then all parameters canbe revised.Note 4: In case of CRC 16 check fault, response will be given even if the system receiving is over, and 25H faultwill be reported to facilitate customer debugging.

Sparex India


Appendix 5 Keyboard Installation Dimension (Unit: mm)

212

Appendix 5 Keypad Installation Dimension (Unit: mm)

Figure A5-1 S2R4GB~3004GB Keypad Installation Dimension

Sparex India


Appendix 5 Keyboard Installation Dimension (Unit: mm)

213

Figure A5-1 Keypad Installation Dimension for 35R5GB and the Above

Sparex India


Appendix 6 LCD Keyboard Use Instruction

214

Appendix 6 LCD Keypad Use Instruction

A6.1 LCD Keypad Instruction

A6.1.1 View of LCD Keypad

LCD液晶显示中文: 2行，每行最

多7个汉字英文：2行，每行最

多14个字母

编程键

移位键

运行状态指示灯

运行键

数字编码器上升

点动键

停止键故障复位键

数字编码器下降

确定键

正反转切换键

RUN

PRGESC

＞＞ ENTERJOG

STOPRESET

补偿前频率 50. 00 Hz


- +

Figure A6-1 LCD Keypad Arrangement and Name of Different Parts

For the LCD keypad and the LED keypad, display and arrangement of the operation keys and state indicator lightare the same, and the operation method & relevant functions are also the same. They only differ in that the LCDkeypad replaces the function of four-bit seven-segment LED digital tubes and three unit indicator lights of the LEDkeypad with the liquid crystal display.

A6.1.2 Instruction of Key FunctionLike the LED keypad, the LCD keypad is also provided with 9 keys, and the function definition of each key is thesame as that of the LED keypad. Details are showed in “Table 3-2 Keypad Key Functions” of Chapter III.

A6.1.3. LCD and Indicator Light InstructionThe LCD keypad is provided with an LCD area and 5 state indicator lights.The LCD area can display the state parameters, function code parameters and fault alarm codes etc of the frequencyinverter. When parameters are displayed, parameter names and parameter units are also displayed, i.e. functions of 3unit indicator lights in the keypad are included. Moreover, from the parameter name, a parameter can be judged asthe set parameter or the actual value, so they don’t have to be distinguished through unit flickering indication. Inaddition, for the LCD keypad, units are displayed in letters, so all unit indications can be displayed. For the specificdisplay content and manners in different states, please refer to the keypad display diagram below.Meaning of 5 state indicator lights for the LCD keypad is the same as that for the LED keypad. Please refer to“Table 3-3 State Indicator Light Instruction” in Chapter III LED Keypad Function & Operation.

A6.2 LCD Use Instruction

A6.2.1 Functional CharacteristicsThe LCD keypad is to let the user understand the function parameters displayed more clearly and definitely. With the

Forward/Reverse Switch Key

Operation Key

Shift Key

Programming Key

Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)Chinese: 2 lines, 7 Chinesecharacters at the most foreither lineEnglish: 2 lines, 14 letters atthe most for either line

Operation State Indicator Light

Digital Encoder Ascending

Digital Encoder Descending

Enter Key

Stop KeyFault Resetting Key

Jog Key

Pre-compensation Frequency

Sparex India



215

Chinese instruction, the meaning of a function code can be displayed directly when the user doesn’t understand it.The keypad is connected with the frequency inverters of 35R5GB and the above. As for the functions, it iscompletely compatible with the LED keypad operation. The frequency inverter can be identified and displayedautomatically when connected to the keypad.For the LCD keypad, the function of function parameter copying is added, which can make parameters of severalfrequency parameters be set as the same. When several motors require the unified setting, only the parameters of onemotor have to be set, then be uploaded, and finally be downloaded in other frequency inverters. In this way,parameters of all frequency inverters can be reserved the same, and repeated setting of parameters is also avoided.During the parameter copying, all parameters are uploaded, but they can all be downloaded or just the non-motorparameters are downloaded.Notes:To prevent repeated copying as PF.03 is not 0 during the parameter uploading and downloading, PF.03 is set as 0during the parameter copying;Parameter uploading and downloading should be done on the same series of frequency inverters. Otherwise,downloading will fail.

A6.2.2 Display StepsWhen the LCD keypad is powered (connected), the display will be blank, which will last for about 2s, as the keypadjudgment and display initiation will be done. After all are ready, the keypad will enter the stop state display interface,after which operation of the LCD keypad can be carried out.

A6.2.3 Keypad Display StateDisplay states and switch manners of the LCD keypad are the same as those of the LED keypad, and what they meanare also the same. Only the display content and manners differ. The specific display content of different displaystates as well as the meanings &switch manners are showed in “3.1.4 Keypad Display State” of Chapter III. Below,the specific content of different display states for the LCD keypad is described with figures.The display states of keypad consist of the stop state parameter display, the operation state parameter display, thefault alarm display state and the function code parameter edition state display, etc.

Sparex India



216

Frequency Inverter Stop and Operation State Display

图3 运行状态，RUN灯亮，运行到设定频率稳速时FWD恒亮

RUN

PRGESC

＞＞ ENTERJOG

STOPRESET

补偿前频率 50.00 Hz


- +

图5 告警时，闪烁显示告警字符

RUN

PRGESC

＞＞ ENTERJOG

STOPRESET

告警：OLP2 过载预警


- +

图6 故障时，显示故障代码及故障名，TRIP故障指示灯闪烁

RUN

PRGESC

＞＞ ENTERJOG

STOPRESET

故障: OL2 变频器过载


- +

图3 运行状态，RUN灯亮，加速中FWD指示灯快闪

RUN

PRGESC

＞＞ ENTERJOG

STOPRESET



- +

图1 上电初始化显示，补偿前输出频率为0.00Hz

RUN

PRGESC

＞＞ ENTERJOG

STOPRESET



- +

图2 停机状态，RUN灯熄灭 FWD慢闪指示设定方向

RUN

PRGESC

＞＞ ENTERJOG

STOPRESET



- +

灭亮

Figure A6-2 LCD Keypad: Display of Frequency Inverter Initiation, Stop, Operation, Alarm and Fault State

Figure 4 Operation state, RUN lightis on, and FWD is on constantly

when it operates to the set frequency

Figure 5 In the case of an alarm, the alarmcharacters are flickering and displayed

Figure 6 In the case of a fault, the faultcode and the fault name are displayed,

and TRIP fault indicator light isflickering

Pre-compensationFrequency50.00Hz

Alarm: OLP2Overload Pre-alarm

Fault: OL2Frequency Inverter

Overload

Figure 1 Power-on initiation display,the pre-compensation output frequency

is 0.00Hz

Figure 2 Stop state, RUN light is offand FWD is flickering slowly to

indicate the setting direction

Figure 3 Operation state, RUN light ison, and FWD indicator light is

flickering quickly during acceleration

Pre-compensationFrequency

0.00Hz


0.00 Hz

Pre-compensationFrequency30.00 Hz

Off On

Sparex India



217

Function Code Edition State:

Figure A6-3 Programming Display State of LCD Keypad

Supplement: Special Interface Display

Figure A6-4 LCD Keypad: Special Interface Display and Meaning

A6.2.4 Keypad Operation MethodLike the LED keypad, with the LCD keypad, various operations can be conducted on the frequency inverter.Examples are followed:Monitoring Parameter Display Switch


设定频率

输出电流

设定转速

运行转速

实际长度

＞＞＞＞＞＞＞＞＞＞＞＞

输出频率

(补偿前)

LED显示

按键操作

＞＞

输出频率

(实际)

LCD显示

50.00 50.00 50.00 1440 0.000

补偿后频率 50.00 Hz

输出电流 45.0 A

设定频率 50.00 Hz

运行转速 1440 rpm

设定转速 1440 rpm

实际长度 0.000 m

144045.0

Figure A6-5 LCD Keypad: Example of Monitoring Parameter Display Operation

Given Frequency Adjustment for Ordinary Operation (Change the Given Frequency from 50.00Hz into 40.00Hz)

停机显示输出频率

按旋钮自动进入给定频率修改状态，单位指示闪烁显示当前设定频率

向左旋转一次设定频率改变0.01Hz

连续旋转并保持旋转速率可使调整步长逐渐加大到0.10Hz

步长最大可到1Hz,到达设定值后,若需保存当前频率设定调整完频率后直接按ENTER键即保存

3s后自动退出返回初始显示状态

- - -

LCD显示

按键操作

-

停止旋转







Figure A6-6 LCD Keypad: Set Frequency Adjustment Operation


Function Group: P0Basic Functions

Function Code: P0.02Frequency Digital Setting

Frequency Digital Setting50.00 Hz

PrimaryMenu

SecondaryMenu

TertiaryMenu

Edition State

Stop State ParameterDisplay or OperationState Parameter Displayor Fault Alarm Display

Option Parameter Display Communication Request Display Terminal State Display

Frequency Setting 1:01Keyboard Setting

CALLCommunication Request

Terminal StateOption Name

Parameter Nameand Option Value

KeyOperation

LED

LCD

OutputFrequency

(BeforeCompensation)

OutputFrequency(Actual)

OutputCurrent

SetFrequency

OperationRotatingSpeed

SetRotatingSpeed

ActualLength


After-compensationFrequency50.00 Hz

Output Current45.0 A

Set Frequency50.00 Hz

Operation RotatingSpeed

1440 rpm

Set Rotating Speed1440 rpm

Actual Length0.000 m

Stop theinverteranddisplay theoutputfrequency

Press the knob to enterthe given frequencyrevision state; the unitindicator is flickeringand displaying thepresent set frequency

Turn left once tochange the setfrequency by 0.01Hz

Keep turning andmaintain the rotatingspeed to make theadjustment step lengthincrease to 0.10Hzgradually

The step length can reach 1Hz atthe most; after the set values isreached, if the present frequencysetting has to be saved, press thekey ENTER directly afterfrequency adjustment is over.

Stopturning

KeyOperation

LCDPre-compensation

Frequency0.00 Hz






0.00 Hz

It will escape 3slater and returnto the initialdisplay state

Sparex India



218

Function Code Parameter Setting

停机参数显示状态

进入编辑状态，显示一级菜单

功能组确认，进入二级菜单

旋转1次选择功能码P2.01

功能码确认，进入三级菜单

向左旋转三次修改闪烁位参数 6→3

存储修改后的数值，退回二级菜单

按键操作

将闪烁位右移 2位，跳至最高位

退回一级菜单

向右旋转1次修改闪烁位参数 0→1

退出编辑状态

旋转2次选择功能组P2

PRGESC

ENTER ＞＞PRGESC

PRGESC

ENTER+

+

+

-

LCD显示

功能码：P2.00 点动运行频率


功能组：P0 基本功能

功能组：P2 辅助运行

功能码：P2.01 点动加速时间

功能组：P2 辅助运行

功能码：P2.02 点动减速时间

点动加速时间 6.0 s


ENTERENTER


注：参数高位为0时，被修正不显示；参数编辑状态闪烁位移至该位时，¨„与空白字符交替显示，改变值为非零后，后续被修正位补零正常显示。

点动加速时间 ¨„ 3.0 s

Figure A6-7 LCD Keypad: Example of Parameter Edition Operation

A6.3 LCD Contrast Adjustment

When the user found the display contrast is poor, he or she can make adjustment via the combination key of the

keypad (shift key + digital encoder): turn the digital encoder - + when pressing the shift key ＞＞ ; if the

number increases, the contrast will be promoted; if the number decreases, the contrast will be reduced. There aretotally 5 shifts for the contrast adjustment. When the strongest contrast is reached through turning the encoder, thecontrast will not change any more and will keep the largest value, and vice versa.

Note: when the high bit of parameter is 0, the revised will not be displayed; when the parameter edition state flickering bitshifts to the bit, it will be displayed alternately with the blank characters; after the revised value is not 0, the bit revisedsuccessively will be displayed normally after supplemented with 0.

Escape from theEdition State

Return to thePrimary Menu

Save the revised valueand return to thesecondary menu

Turn right once andrevise the flickering-bitparameter 0-1

Shift the flickering bitby 2 bits and skip to thehighest bit

Turn left third time andrevise the flickering-bitparameter 6-3

Function Group: P2Auxiliary Operation

Function Code: P2.02Jogging Deceleration

Time

Jogging AccelerationTime

1003.0 s

Jogging AccelerationTime3.0 s


StopParameterDisplay State

Enter the edition stateand display theprimary menu

Turn twice to selectfunction group P2

Confirm the functiongroup and enter thesecondary menu

Turn once to selectfunction code P2.01

Confirm the functioncode and enter thetertiary menu

LCD

KeyOperation


0.00 HzFunction Group: P0

Basic FunctionFunction Group: P2Auxiliary Operation

Function Code: P2.00Jogging Operation

Frequency

Function Code: P2.01Jogging Acceleration

Time


Sparex India


Appendix 7 Guarantee Sheet

219

Appendix 7 Frequency Inverter Warranty Card

Frequency Inverter Warranty CardName of User:

Address of User:

Contact Person: Tel.:

P.C.: Fax:

Type: Serial No.:

Date of Purchase: Date of Fault:

Fault Details

Motor: KW Pole Application of Motor:

Fault Occurrence Time: power supply no-load load % Others:

Fault Phenomena:

Fault Display: OC OL OU OH LU None Others:

Control Terminal Used:

Operation after Resetting:Yes No Output Voltage: Yes No

Total Working Time: Hrs Fault Frequency:

Installation Site Details

Power Voltage: U-V V, V-W V, W-U V

Transformer Capacity: KVA Frequency Inverter Earthing: Yes No

Distance from the Power Source: m Distance from the Motor: m

Vibration: No Medium Strong Dust: No Medium Much

Others:

Sparex India


Sparex India


4.imimg.com...9 5 0 ! ! 3 ) :[ Yt [ 0 \ _W EDT¡FJE DVFDEBTO¢JNFGJBTO ET£GBH EDLGLFJE...

Documents

Transcript of 4.imimg.com...9 5 0 ! ! 3 ) :[ Yt [ 0 \ _W EDT¡FJE DVFDEBTO¢JNFGJBTO ET£GBH EDLGLFJE...